HomeMy WebLinkAboutEdge Development Inc; 2007-06-05; PWS07-13ENG (2)SECTION 06100
ROUGH CARPENTRY
1 PART 1 GENERAL
1 1 SECTION INCLUDES
A Structural floor, wall, and roof framing.
B Floor, wall, and roof sheathing
C Wood furring, backing and grounds.
D Preservative treatment of wood
1.2 REFERENCES
A CBC - California Building Code, (CCR) California Code of Regulations Title 24, Part 2
B ALSC - American Lumber Standards Committee Softwood Lumber Standards
C ANSI/NFoPA NDS-91 - National Design Specifications for Wood Construction
D APA - The Engineered Wood Association
E AWPA - American Wood Preservers' Association Book of Standards
F National Bureau of Standards - Product Standard PS-1-95 for Construction and Industrial Plywood
G WCLIB - West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau Standard Grading Rules for West Coast Lumber
H WWPA - Western Wood Products Association
1 3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A Lumber Grading Agency Certified by ALSC
B Plywood Grading Agency Certified by APA
1 4 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A Conform to CBC, California Building Code, (CCR) California Code of Regulations, Title 24, Part 2,
Chapter 23A
B Allowable stress design values shall be in compliance with the CBC, California Building Code, (CCR)
California Code of Regulations, Title 24, Part 2, Section 2316A and ANSI/NFoPA NDS-91 - National Design
Specifications for Wood Construction
1 5 SUBMITTALS
A Submit product data under provisions of Section 01330
B Provide technical data on wood preservative materials and application instructions
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING ^
A Store and protect products under provisions of Section 01600
B Deliver materials free from pest infestation Protect materials on site to prevent termite, beetle or other wood
boring insect attacks.
WLC/0414200 ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100
(D
REV 04/05
C Stack lumber flat, off grade, with spacers between each bundle to promote air circulation Provide for air
circulation around and under coverings
2 PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 LUMBER MATERIALS
A Lumber Grading Rules WCLIB and WWPA Lumber shall bear WCLIB grade stamp.
B Beam Framing: Douglas Fir species, Dense No 1 grade.
C Joist Framing- Douglas Fir species, No 1 grade
D. Rafter Framing. Douglas Fir species, No 1 grade
E Structural Framing, Studs, Plate and Blocking: Douglas Fir Species, No 1 grade.
F Non-structural Light Framing Studs, Plate and Blocking Douglas Fir species, construction grade
G Plank and Decking. Douglas Fir species, Com Dex
2 2 MOISTURE CONTENT
A 2x and 3x material, 19 percent moisture content, S-Dry Structural and non structural framing, beam, rafters,
joists, studs, plates and blocking
B 4x and 6x material, 19 percent moisture content at time of application of Architectural finishes 22 percent
maximum moisture content at time of delivery to project site Materials to be air dried as required to achieve
22 percent moisture content prior to delivery to site. Structural and non structural faming, beam, rafters,
joists, studs, plates and blocking
C. Lumber materials with a moisture content above 19 percent and less than 22 percent at the time of
installation shall be tested for moisture content prior to covering with Architectural finishes Moisture tests
shall be performed under the provisions of Section 01458
D No lumber shall be covered with an Architectural finish until the moisture content of the lumber is 19 percent
or below
2 3 PLYWOOD MATERIALS
A Roof Sheathing APA Structural I, Grade C-D, Exposure 1 minimum 5-ply construction, meeting product
Standard PS-1-95
B Wall Sheathing APA Structural I, Grade C-D, Exposure 1 minimum 5-ply construction, meeting product
standard PS-1-95.
C Floor Sheathing- APA Structural I, Grade C-D, Exposure 1 Minimum 5-ply construction, meeting Product
Standard PS-1-95.
D Telephone and Electrical Panel Boards APA Grade C-D with exterior glue, minimum 5 ply, 3/4 inch thick,
meeting PS-1-95
24 ACCESSORIES
A Fasteners Hot-dipped galvanized steel for exterior, high humidity, and treated wood locations; plain finish
elsewhere, size and type to suit condition
B. Connectors As indicated.
C Joist Hangers- Galvanized steel, sized to suit joists and framing conditions, manufactured by Simpson, USP
Connectors or KC Metals
WLC/0414200 ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100
(2)
REV 04/05
D Anchors Thru bolt or anchor bolt to concrete or masonry unless otherwise noted Bolt for anchorage to steel
unless otherwise noted
E Building Paper No 15 asphalt felt Plain untreated cellulosic building paper
2.5 WOOD TREATMENT
A Preservative Treatment: Where lumber or plywood is indicated as treated or is specified herein to be
treated, comply with applicable requirements of AWPA Standards C2 (Lumber) and C9 (Plywood)
B Pressure treat all lumber in contact with ground After treatment kiln-dry lumber to a maximum moisture
content of 19 percent.
C. Pressure treat above ground items as indicated. After treatment, kiln-dry lumber and plywood to a maximum
moisture content, respectively, of 19 percent and 15 percent Treat indicated items and the following-
1 Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping and similar members in
connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers and waterproofing
2 Horizontal wood sills, sleepers, blocking, furring, stripping and similar concealed members in contact
with masonry or concrete
3 Horizontal wood framing members less than 18 inches above grade
4 Wood floor plates installed over concrete slabs directly in contact with earth
5 Ends of wood girders entering masonry or concrete walls
6 Framing members used in exterior door, window, or louver openings.
D Complete fabrication of treated items prior to treatment, where possible If cut or drilled after treatment, coat
cut or drilled surfaces with heavy brush coat of same chemical used for treatment and to comply with
AWPA M4 Inspect each piece of lumber or plywood after drying and discard damaged or defective pieces.
3 PARTS EXECUTION
3 1 FRAMING
A Erect wood framing members level and plumb
B Place horizontal members laid flat, crown side-up
C Construct framing members full length without splices
D Double members at openings over 1 sq ft Space short studs over and under opening to stud spacing
E Construct double joist headers at floor and ceiling openings. Frame rigidly into joists
F Construct double joists under wall studding
G Bridge joists in excess of 8 feet span at mid-span members Fit solid blocking at ends of members
H Coordinate installation of glue laminated structural units and plywood web joists
3.2 FURRING, BLOCKING AND GROUNDS
A Provide wherever shown and where required for attachment of other work Coordinate with work of other
sections
B Item locations include but are not limited to toilet accessories, toilet partitions, door frames, window frames,
hardware, access doors and ladders, cabinetry, miscellaneous equipment locations and mechanical,
plumbing and electrical item locations and all other locations of wall mounted items.
WLC/0414200 ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100
(3)
REV 04/05
C Install plywood backboards for telephone, data and other electrical equipment
D Form to shapes as shown and cut as required for true line and level of work to be attached Coordinate
location with other work involved.
E Attach to substrates as required to support applied loading. Countersink bolts and nuts flush with surfaces,
unless otherwise indicated
F. Build into masonry during installation of masonry work Where possible, anchor to formwork before concrete
placement
G Install plumb and level with closure strips at edges and openings. Shim with wood as required for tolerance
of finished work.
H Firestop all concealed spaces of wood stud walls, ceilings and floor levels at 10 foot intervals both vertically
and horizontally
I Firestop all concealed vertical and horizontal spaces as occur at soffits, vents, stair stringers, pipes and
similar openings in compliance with CBC, (CCR) Title 24, Part 2, Section 708
J Firestoppmg shall consist of closely fitted wood blocks of 2 inch nominal thickness lumber of same width
as framing members
33 SHEATHING
A Secure roof sheathing perpendicular to framing members with ends staggered Secure sheet edges over
firm bearing Provide solid edge blocking between sheets
B. Secure wall sheathing perpendicular to wall studs, with ends staggered, over firm bearing
C Secure subfloor perpendicular to floor framing with end joints staggered. Secure sheet edges over firm
bearing Attach sheathing with subfloor glue and screws
D Place building paper between underlayment and subfloormg.
E Secure flooring underlayment with screws after dust and dirt generating activities have ceased and prior
to application of finished flooring Apply perpendicular to subfloormg Stagger end joints of underlayment
F Install telephone and electrical panel back boards where required Size of backboards to be 12 inches
beyond size of electrical panel boards
3 4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A Field inspection and testing will be performed under provisions of Section 01458
B Lumber materials will be inspected for compliance with material grading rules, limitations for moisture
content and pest infestation prior to any materials being concealed from view or being covered with an
architectural finish
3 5 TOLERANCES
A. Framing Members 1/4 inch maximum from true position
B Surface Flatness of Floor. 1/4 inch in 10 feet maximum.
END OF SECTION
WLC/0414200 ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100
(4)
REV 04/05
SECTION 06174
WOOD WEB JOISTS
1 PART1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A Wood chord and wood web joists for roof and floor framing
B. Bridging, bracing, and anchorage
C Framing for openings
1.2 REFERENCES
A ALSC - American Lumber Standards Committee Softwood Lumber Standards
B. APA - The Engineered Wood Association.
C ASTM D2559 - Adhesives for Structural Laminated Wood Products for use Under Exterior Exposure
Conditions
D CBC - California Building Code, (CCR) California Code of Regulations, Title 24, Part 2
E ICC - (International Code Council) Evaluation Service, Inc
F National Bureau of Standards - Product Standard PS-1-95 for Construction and Industrial Plywood
1 3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacture of plywood web joists with five years minimum
experience.
B Design joists under direct supervision of a Civil or Structural Engineer experienced in structural framing
design registered in State of California Where joists support mechanical equipment, include weight in joist
design
C Perform work in accordance with the following agencies
1 Lumber grading agency Certified by ALSC
2 Plywood grading agency Certified by APA
1 4 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A Conform to CBC - California Building Code, (CCR) California Code of Regulations, Title 24, Part 2, for loads,
seismic zoning, and other governing criteria
1 5 SUBMITTALS
A Submit shop drawings under provisions of Section 01330.
B. Indicate framing system, sizes and spacing of joists, loads and joist cambers, bearing and anchor details,
bridging and bracing, and framed openings.
C Submit manufacturer's installation instructions under provisions of Section 01330.
1 6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, and handle products to site under provisions of Section 01600
WLC/0414200 WOOD WEB JOISTS 06174
(D
REV 04/05
B. Transport and store joists in vertical position resting on bearing ends
C. Protect joists from moisture, warpage, and distortion during transit and when site stored
2 PART 2 PRODUCTS
2 1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A Boise Engineered Wood Products, BCI Joist, ICC No. PFC4665, www boisebuilding com
B Trus Joist Corp , TJI Series, ICC No ESR1153, www.trusjoist com
C Substitutions Under provisions of Section 01630.
2 2 MATERIALS
A Lumber Grading Rules ALSC
B. Flanges Top and Bottom Flanges MICRO-LAM lumber manufactured to Trus Joist standards, Grade AA
compressed to 1-1/2 inch thickness at TJI/L65 made of sixteen Alternate C and D grade Coast Region
Douglas Fir Veneers 1/10 inch in thickness Face Veneers C Grade, making a total of eight "C" veneers
and eight "D" veneers Veneers shall be spliced by 2 inch minimum lap joints occurring at any section Two
laps shall have at least seven continuous piles between them Lap joints in adjacent veneers Located at
not less than 12 inch center to center Gram of all Veneers. Oriented in the direction parallel to the flange
length Veneer Faces Fully glued with phenolic resin glue complying with ASTM 2559
C Webs 7/16 inch OSB web material
D Glue The rout and butt joint glue shall be waterproof glue room temperature setting phenol resorcmol
meeting MILA 46051, Type 18 and ASTM D2559
E Joist Bridging Type, size and spacing as indicated on the drawings
23 ACCESSORIES
A Provide all web stiffeners, blocking panels, connections, etc , as required for a complete installation
B Fasteners Galvanized steel, type to suit application
C Glue ASTM D2559, For wet condition of service.
D Joist hangers and hardware shall be as indicated
2 4 FABRICATION
' A Fabricate joists to achieve structural requirements specified
B Verify dimensions and site conditions prior to fabrication.
3 PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A Verify that supports and openings are ready to receive joists
B Verify sufficient end bearing area
C Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions
WLC/0414200 WOOD WEB JOISTS 06174
(2)
REV 04/05
3.2 PREPARATION
A Coordinate placement of bearing items.
3 3 INSTALLATION
A Install joists in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Place joists true to line and level
C Provide temporary bracing to position joists in place until permanently secured.
D Place permanent bridging, bracing, and anchors to maintain joists straight and in correct position before
installation of decking or inducing loads
<E. Place headers and supports to frame openings required
F Frame openings between joists with lumber in accordance with Section 06100
G Coordinate placement of decking with work of this Section.
3 4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A Field inspection and testing will be performed under provisions of Section 01458.
35 TOLERANCES
A Framing Members 1/2 inch maximum from true position i
END OF SECTION !
WLC/0414200 WOOD WEB JOISTS 06174
(3)
REV 04/05
SECTION 06180
/
GLUE LAMINATED STRUCTURAL UNITS
1 PART 1 GENERAL
1 1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Glue laminated structural wood elements
B Steel hardware and attachment brackets.
1 2 REFERENCES
A CBC - California Building Code, (CCR) California Code of Regulations, Title 24, Part 2
B AITC - American Institute of Timber Construction
C ALSC - American Lumber Standards Committee. Softwood Lumber Standards
D ASTM A36 - Structural Steel
E ASTM A123 - Zinc (Hot Galvanized) coatings on Products Fabricated from Rolled, Pressed, and Forged
Steel Shapes, Plates, Bars, and Strip
F ASTM A307 - Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs
G ASTM D2559 - Adhesives for Structural Laminated Wood Products for Use Under Exterior (Wet Use)
Exposure Conditions.
1 3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A Manufacturer. Company specializing in manufacture of glue laminated structural units with three years
minimum experience, and certified by the AITC
B Wood products shall be FSC Certified according to the rules of the Forest Stewardship Council
www.fscus org
C Accredited certification bodies shall be one of the following.
1. Scientific Certification Systems, www.scscertified.com *
2 Smart Wood, www smartwood com.
3 SGC Quahfor, www qualifor com
1 4 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A Conform to CBC - California Building Code, (CCR) California Code of Regulations, Title 24, Part 2, for loads,
seismic zoning, and other load criteria
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of Section 01330
B Indicate framing system, sizes and spacing of members, loads and cambers, bearing and anchor details,
bridging and bracing, framed openings
C Provide technical data on wood preservative materials, application technique, and resultant performance
information
WLC/0414200 GLUE LAMINATED STRUCTURAL UNITS 06180
d)
REV 01/04
1 6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store and protect products under provisions of Section 01600
B Protect members in accordance with AITC requirements for individually wrapped material.
C. Leave individual wrapping in place until finishing occurs.
2 PART 2 PRODUCTS
2 1 MATERIALS
A. Lumber Softwood Southern Pine, Douglas Fir, Alaska Yellow Cedar (all heart) lumber conforming to
AITC A190 1 grading rules Design for the following values
1 Bending (Fb) 2400 psi
2 Tension Parallel to Gram (Ft) 1150psi
3. Compression Parallel to Gram (Fc) 1650 psi
4 Compression Perpendicular to Gram Bottom (Fcl) 650 psi
5 Compression Perpendicular to Gram Top (Fcl) 650 psi.
6 Horizontal Shear (Fv) : 165 psi
7 Modulus of Elasticity (E) . 1.8 x 106 psi
B. Steel Connections and Brackets ASTM A36, weldable quality, hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A123
to 1 25 oz/sq ft
C Hardware: ASTM A307, structural quality steel, hot dip galvanized according to ASTM A123 to 1 25 oz/sq ft
D Anchor Bolts ASTM A307 galvanized steel
V
E. Adhesive ASTM D2559, For wet condition of service.
22 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate glue laminated structural members in accordance with CBC, California Building Code, (CCR)
California Code of Regulations, Title 24, Part 2, Section 2316A
B Fabricate glue laminated structural members in accordance with AITC industrial grade.
C. Verify dimensions and site conditions prior to fabrication.
D. Cut and fit members accurately to length to achieve tight joint fit.
E Fabricate member with camber built in.
F Do not splice or join members in locations other than that indicated, without permission
G. Fabricate steel hardware and connections with joints neatly fitted, welded, and ground smooth.
H After end trimming, and end-coat sealing, apply a heavy saturation coat of penetrating sealer in accordance
with AITC requirements except where preservative treatment has been applied.
2 3 FINISHES
A. Galvanized connectors in accordance with ASTM A123
WLC/0414200 GLUE LAMINATED STRUCTURAL UNITS 06180—
REV 01/04
3 PARTS EXECUTION
3 1 INSPECTION
A Verify that supports are ready to receive beams
B. Verify sufficient end bearing area.
C. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions.
3 2 PREPARATION
A Coordinate placement of bearing items
33 ERECTION
A Set structural members level and plumb, in correct positions
B Provide temporary bracing and anchorage to hold members in place until permanently secured
C Fit members together accurately without trimming, cutting, or any other unauthorized modification
34 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Field inspection and testing will be performed under provisions of Section 01458
35 TOLERANCES
A. Framing Members 1/2 inch maximum from true position
END OF SECTION
WLC/0414200 GLUE LAMINATED STRUCTURAL UNITS 06180
(3)
REV 01/04
SECTION 06200
FINISH CARPENTRY
1 PART 1 GENERAL
1 1 SECTION INCLUDES
A Finish carpentry items, other than shop prefabricated casework
B Hardware and attachment accessories
1.2 REFERENCES
A AWPA - American Wood Preservers Association
B CBC - California Building Code, (CCR) California Code of Regulations, Title 24, Part 2
>
C UL - Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc
D Wl - Woodwork Institute. Manual of Millwork
1 3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A Manufacture millwork and finish carpentry items in accordance with quality standards of the Manual of
Millwork of the Woodwork Institute.
B All millwork and the installation of millwork shall be monitored for compliance under the scope of the
Wl Certified Compliance Program (CCP)
C Issue Wl Certified Compliance Certificate to Architect prior to delivery of millwork and provide Wl Certified
Compliance Labels on all items of millwork
D \ Provide Wl Remspection Service at the job site prior to installation. Provide to Architect a written report
showing results of the remspection
E Upon completion of the installation, provide a Wl Certified Compliance Certificate
1 4 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A Conform to CBC and UL requirements for fire ratings
B. Conform to Flame Spread Classifications of Interior Millwork contained within the Appendix of the Wl
Manual of Millwork for flame spread ratings
1 5 SUBMITTALS
A Submit shop drawings under provisions of Section 01330
B Indicate materials, component profiles, fastening methods, jointing details, finishes, and accessories to a
minimum scale of 1-1/2 inch to one foot Provide Wl Certified Compliance label on first page of each set
C Submit samples under provisions of Section 01330
D. Submit two samples 6x12 inch in size illustrating wood gram, species, and specified finish.
E Submit two samples 18 inch long of wood trim
WLC/0414200 FINISH CARPENTRY 06200
(D
REV 01/04
1 6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store and protect products under provisions of Section 01600
B. Conform to Section 1 of Millwork Manual
C. Store materials in ventilated, interior locations under constant minimum temperatures of 70 degrees F and
maximum relative humidity of 50 to 55 percent
2 PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 FABRICATORS
A. Active member of the Woodwork Institute, licensed by Wl to provide the Wl certified Compliance
Certificates and Labels for the products and materials specified in this section, www woodworkmstitute com.
B Substitutions Under provisions of Section 01630
2 2 MATERIALS
A Materials specified under Millwork Manual Section Numbers refer to lumber grades in Millwork Manual as
follows Section 3, Lumber - Hardwood/Softwoods; Section 4, Plywood - Hardwood/Softwood, Section 6,
Exterior Trim, Section 9, Interior Trim
2 3 EXTERIOR TRIM
A Fabricate in accordance with Section 6 of Millwork Manual'
Item
Exterior Wood Trim Fascias
& Rakes
Species
Cedar.Western Red
2.4 INTERIOR TRIM
A. Fabricate in accordance with Section 9 of Millwork Manual.
Item
Window Trim
Bed Edge Trim
Swinging Door Jamb
Species
American Cherry
American Cherry
American Cherry
2.5 ADHESIVE
Grade
Custom
Grade
Premium
Premium
Premium
Intended Finish
Opaque
Intended Finish
Transparent
Transparent
Transparent
A. Adhesives Type 1 adhesive recommended by WI to accommodate application in accordance with the
Appendix to the Millwork Manual
B Formulation. Exterior type per AWPAC20, consisting of organic-resin solution, insoluble in water, thermally
set in wood by kiln drying
C. ^ Wall Adhesive Solvent release, cartridge type, compatible with wall substrate, capable of achieving durable
bond.
2.6 ACCESSORIES
A. Nails- Size and type to suit application, galvanized finish for interior use, stainless steel for exterior use
WLC/0414200 FINISH CARPENTRY 06200
(2)
REV 01/04
B Bolts, Nuts, Washers, Blind Fasteners, Lags, and Screws Size and type to suit application, galvanized
finish for interior use, stainless steel for exterior use
C Lumber for Shimming and Blocking Softwood lumber of Douglas Fir species •
D Primer Alkyd primer sealer.
E Wood Filler Solvent base, tinted to match surface finish color
27 FABRICATION
A Fabricate work in accordance with Wl Premium grade standards
B Shop assemble work for delivery to site, permitting passage through building openings
C When necessary to cut and fit on site, provide materials with ample allowance for cutting Provide trim for
scribing and site cutting
3 PART 3 EXECUTION
, 3.1 EXAMINATION
A Verify that surfaces and openings are ready to receive work and field measurements are as instructed by
the fabricator
B Verify mechanical, electrical, and building items affecting work of this Section are placed and ready to
receive this work
C Verify adequacy of backing and support framing
D Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions
3 2 PREPARATION
A Before installation, prime paint surfaces of items or assemblies to be in contact with cementitious materials
or that will be permanently concealed from view
3 3 INSTALLATION
A Install work in accordance with Wl Manual of Millwork, Premium quality standard
3 4 TOLERANCES ^
A. Maximum Variation from True Position 1/16 inch
B Maximum Offset from True Alignment with Abutting Materials 1/32 inch.
3 5 PREPARATION FOR FINISHING
A Set exposed fasteners Apply wood filler in exposed fastener indentations. Sand work smooth
3 6 FINISHING
A Site finish under provisions of Section 09900.
37 PROTECTION
A Protect finished installation under provisions of Section 01600
END OF SECTION
WLC/0414200 . FINISH CARPENTRY 06200
(3)
REV 01/04
SECTION 06412
LAMINATE-CLAD WOOD CASEWORK
1 PART1 GENERAL
1 1 WORK INCLUDED
A Special fabricated cabinet units.
B Countertops.
C. Preparation for utilities
D Cabinet hardware
E. Glass for cabinet units.
12 REFERENCES
A Wl - Woodwork Institute of California- Manual of Millwork
B. ASTM A653 - Steel Sheet, Zinc Coated, (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-
Dip Process
C. ASTM A924 - General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot-Dip Process.
D. ASTM C615 - Standard Specification for Granite Dimension Stone.
E ASTM E84 - Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials
F. CBC - California Building Code, (CCR) California Code of Regulations, Title 24, Part 2.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacture casework items in accordance with quality standards of the Manual of Millwork of the
Woodwork Institute
B. All millwork and the installation of millwork shall be monitored for compliance under the scope of the Wl
Certified Compliance Program (CCP).
C Provide Wl Inspection Service at the millwork fabricator. Provide to Architect a written report showing the
results of the inspection.
D Issue Wl Certified Compliance Certificate to Architect prior to delivery of millwork and provide Wl Certified
Compliance Labels on all items of casework and countertops
E Provide Wl Remspection Service at the job site prior to installation Provide to Architect a written report
showing the results of the reinspection.
F Self Certification by the millwork fabricator or inspection by other than an authorized representative of The
Woodwork Institute is not acceptable.
G Upon completion of the installation, provide a Wl Certified Compliance Certificate
1 4 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A Conform to CBC requirements for flame spread classification.
B Conform to Flame Spread Classifications of Interior Millwork contained within the Appendix of the Wl
Manual of Millwork for flame spread ratings as tested according to ASTM E84
WLC/0414200 LAMINATE-CLAD WOOD CASEWORK 06412
(1)
REV 04/05
1 5 MOCKUP
A. Prepare mockup under provisions of Section 01450.
B Provide full size base cabinet and upper cabinet of each type indicated, in specified finish with hardware
installed.
C. Units will be examined to ascertain quality and conformity to Wl standards
D Units will establish a minimum standard of quality for this work.
E. Approved units may be used as part of the Work
1 6 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of Section 01330.
B Include materials, component profiles, fastening methods, assembly methods, joint details, accessory
listings, and schedule of finishes Provide Wl Certified Compliance label on first page of each set.
2 PART 2 PRODUCTS
2 1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Active member of the Woodwork Institute licensed by Wl to provide Wl Certified Compliance Certificates
and Labels for the products and materials specified in this section www woodworkmstitute com.
B. Substitutions- Under provisions of Section 01630.
2.2 CABINET DESIGN
A Individual cabinets are indicated on the drawings by the Wl Cabinet Design Series (CDS) numbering
system, Section 15, Supplement No 2
2 3 MODULAR CASEWORK - LAMINATED PLASTIC COVERED
A. Fabricate in accordance with Section 15 of the Manual of Millwork.
1 WIG Grade
2 Type
3 Construction.
4 Joinery
5 Cabinet Backs
6 Cabinet Door Type
7. Shelves
8 Shelf Edge Bands
9 Door and Drawer Edge Bands
10. Exposed Surfaces (Including
shelves and interior of open
front cabinets)
WLC/0414200
Premium
Type I
Style A-Frameless.
Doweled Joints
Dadoed (Detail 2C and 7B of Millwork Manual).
Type A Type B for glass
1-M-2 particle board, 1 inch thick, MOE of 950, capable of
supporting 50 Ib/sq ft load with deflection of L/144.
0.028 inch high pressure plastic laminate in color to match
shelf All 4 edges of adjustable shelves to receive banding
0 028 inch high pressure plastic laminate the same as
exposed faces
0 028 inch high pressure plastic laminate, color and pattern
as selected by Architect from the Formica laminate series
Laminate colors will be selected from a maximum of seven
(7) different colors for use in varying amounts at all casework
locations
LAMINATE-CLAD WOOD CASEWORK 06412
(2)
REV 04/05
11 Semi-Exposed Surfaces Low pressure decorative polyester or melamine laminate
(Behind doors and inside ALA-85. Color as selected by Architect from manufacturer's
drawers) complete range.
12 Security and Dust Panels. Particle board, 3/4 inch thick at all lockable drawers.
2 4 MODULAR CASEWORK - SOLID COMPOSITE CONSTRUCTION
A Fabricate in accordance with Section 15 of the Manual of the Millwork
1. Material: Athlon solid composite materials as manufactured by Trespa
North America, LTD , (800) 487-3772.
2 Wl Grade: Premium
3 Type: Type I
4. Cabinet Door Type. Type I
5 Construction: Style A - Frameless. Fabricate entire cabinet of solid
composite material Thickness of solid composite panels to
match thickness of panels specified for laminated plastic
covered casework This would include door and drawer
faces, sides, backs, and shelves
6 Colors and Patter E2-12, Mid Beige
2.5 LAMINATED PLASTIC COUNTERTOPS
A Fabricate in accordance with Section 16 of the Manual of Millwork:
1 WIC Grade: Premium.
2 Core Thickness: 0.75 inch minimum.
3 Laminate Thickness 0 050 inch or .042 inch for postformed use
4 Edge Covering: Rolled No-Drip bullnose at sink locations.
5 Backsplaslr Integral Coved, 1/4 inch radius
6 Top of Back Splash. Square self-edge, 4 inch high unless noted otherwise.
7 Plastic Colors and Pattern: To be selected from Formica laminate series Laminate
colors will be selected from a maximum of five (5) different
colors for use in varying amounts at all countertop locations
2 6 GALVANIZED SHEET METAL COUNTERTOPS
A Galvanized Steel' ASTM A653, Grade 33, G90 zinc coating in accordance with ASTM 924, 0.0428 inch
thick
B Core Particle board, minimum 3/4 inch total thickness.
C Edge. Square front edge with 1/2 inch flange return under core, 1-1/2 inch total thickness.
D Backsplash. Integral cove with corners radiused, 1-1/2 inch total thickness
2.7 SOLID POLYMER COUNTERTOPS
A Manufacturers
1 Avonite, Inc , Product Avonite, www avonite.com
WLC/0414200 - LAMINATE-CLAD WOOD CASEWORK 06412
(3)
REV 04/05
2. El duPont de Nemours and Co., Inc , Product Conan, wwwconan.com
3. Formica Corporation, Product' Solid Surfacing, www formica com
4 LG Chemical, Product Hi-Macs, www.hi-macs.com
5 WilsonArt, Product: Earthstone/Gibraltor, www.wilsonart.com
6 Substitutions Under provisions of Section 01630
B Fabricate solid polymer tops and splashes in accordance with the following
1. Top Thickness . 0 50 inch.
2 Edge Detail 1.50 inch thick, Square edge
3. Backsplash/Sidesplash . 0.75 inch thick; Integral coved.
4. Top of Backsplash • As indicated on the Drawings
5 Color : To be selected from manufacturers entire range of
solid and textured colors
2.8 GRANITE COUNTERTOPS
A Granite Comply with requirements of ASTM C615.
1. Thickness : 3/4 inch
2. Edges 1-1/2 inch thick, built-up bullnose edge with Vz inch
smooth radius.
3. Finish . Polishes mirror gloss with sharp reflectors.
4. Sealant Bulletproof stone sealer by Stonetech Professional,
(877) 786-6383.
5. Backsplash/Sidesplash 3/4 inch thick, integral coved as indicated on the
drawings.
6. Top of Backsplash As indicated on the drawings
7. Back Surface Sawed to true plane, cleaned of rust, stainless and
free of iron particles
8. Color/Pattern : Canoca Gold, available from Southland Stone, Inc ,
(800) 778-2730
9. Tolerances Thickness: ± 1/8 inch; face dimension ± 1/16 inch;
flatness within 48 inches in any direction: ±1/16 inch
10. Cutouts Provide as required for plumbing or electrical
equipment.
2 9 GLAZING
A Glass Doors 1/4 inch thick clear laminated safety glazing with all exposed edges ground
B Glass Shelves 5/8 inch thick laminated safety glazing with all exposed edges ground
210 HARDWARE
A Finish Polished Chrome
B Shelf Supports Metal clips set in drilled holes spaced 32 mm on center Clips to have vertical locating pin
for retention of shelf
C Drawer and Door Pulls Epco MC-402-4.
WLC/0414200 LAMINATE-CLAD WOOD CASEWORK 06412
, (4)
REV 04/05
D. Cabinet Locks Olympus 700C/800C or CompXNational 8173-SCH-C/8178-SCH-C.
E Drawer Slides for Drawers 24 inch Wide or Less Accunde 7432
F Drawer Slides for Drawers over 24 inch Wide Accunde 3640.
G Drawer slides for File Drawers: Accunde 4034.
H Hinges: Hafele, Aximat hinge. Hinges per leaf: 3'-0" high doors - 2 hinges, 3'-0" to 5'-0" high doors - 3
hinges, 5'-0" to 7'-4" high doors - 4 hinges, 7'-0" to 8'-0" - 5 hinges
I. Grommets: Doug Mockett and Company, Inc , www mockett.com SG Series; plastic 1-3/4 inch diameter,
20 required LO Series, plastic 6x3 inch 4 required Color as selected by Architect from manufacturer's
complete range
J Hanger Rods- Knape and VOGT 770 with 764 end flanges.
K Remainder of hardware required shall be as listed in the Hardware Supplement to Sections 14 and 15 of
the Manual of Millwork. /
L. Substitutions. Under the provisions of Section 01630.
211 FABRICATION
A. Shop assemble casework for delivery to site in units easily handled and to permit passage through building
openings
B When necessary to cut and fit on site, provide materials with ample allowance for cutting. Provide trim for
scribing and site cutting.
C Provide cutouts for plumbing fixtures, inserts, appliances, outlet boxes, and other fixtures and fittings. Verify
locations of cutouts from on-site dimensions Seal contact surfaces of cut edges
D. Install plastic grommets in the field in plastic laminate casework and Owner furnished furniture as directed
by the Owner's Representative and/or Architect
E Install one adjustable shelf for each 1 '-0" of height for all wall mounted cabinets.
F. Provide stretcher at top face of all door and drawer fronts.
G. Provide locks as indicated on schedule Verify keying requirements with the Owner.
3 PART 3 EXECUTION
_ ^ ^
3 1 INSPECTION
A Verify adequacy of backing and support framing
3 2 INSTALLATION
A Set and secure casework in place rigid, plumb, and level.
B Install casework in accordance with Section 15 and the Appendix of the Manual of Millwork.
3 3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A Adjust doors, drawers, hardware, fixtures and other moving or operating parts to function smoothly and
correctly.
B Clean casework, counters, shelves, hardware, fittings and fixtures
WLC/0414200 LAMINATE-CLAD WOOD CASEWORK 06412
(5)
REV 04/05
3 4 SCHEDULE
A Provide casework at the following locations: Refer to the drawings for Wl Standard Numbering System or
custom design.
Room No. Casework Finish Counterton and Splash Lock
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
114
116
117
118
120
201
202
203
204
205
206
WLC/0414200
Plastic Laminate
Solid Composite
Plastic Laminate
Plastic Laminate
Plastic Laminate
Solid Composite
Plastic Laminate
Plastic Laminate
Plastic Laminate
Solid Composite
Solid Composite
Plastic Laminate
Plastic Laminate
Plastic Laminate
Plastic Laminate
Solid Composite
Solid Composite
Plastic Laminate
Solid Composite
Plastic Laminate
Plastic Laminate
N/A
Plastic Laminate
Plastic Laminate
Plastic Laminate
Granite
Plastic Laminate
Plastic Laminate
Plastic Laminate
Granite
Granite
Galvanized Steel
N/A
Plastic Laminate
Plastic Laminate
Granite
Granite
N/A
Granite
Plastic Laminate
END OF SECTION
Key Type at Cabinets and Drawers
Key Type at Cabinet
Key Type at Cabinets and Drawers
Key Type at Cabinets and Drawers
Key Type at Cabinets and Drawers
None
Key Type at Cabinets and Drawers
Key Type at Cabinets and Drawers
Key Type at Cabinets and Drawers
None
None '
Key Type at Cabinets and Drawers
Key Type at Cabinets
Key Type at Cabinets and Drawers
Key Type at Cabinets and Drawers
Key Type at Cabinets and Drawers
Key Type at Cabinets and Drawers
None
None
Key Type at Cabinets
LAMINATE-CLAD WOOD CASEWORK 06412
(6)
REV 04/05
SECTION 07132
ELASTOMERIC SHEET WATERPROOFING
1 PART 1 GENERAL
1 1 SECTION INCLUDES
A Below grade membrane waterproofing
B Protection board
1 2 REFERENCES
A ASTM C578 - Preformed, Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation
B ASTM D412 - Rubber Properties in Tension
C ASTM D570 - Method for Water Absorption of Plastics
D ASTM D1970 - Specification for Self Adhering Polymer Modified Bituminous Sheet Materials
E ASTM E96 - Water Vapor Transmission of Materials in Sheet Form
F ASTM E154 - Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Earth, Under Concrete Slabs, on Walls, or as
Ground Cover
1 3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A Waterproofing System Sheet membrane capable of resisting water head of 200 feet and preventing
moisture migration to interior
1 4 SUBMITTALS
A Submit product data under provisions of Section 01330
B Submit samples under provisions of Section 01330
C Submit two samples 6x6 inches in size of sheet membrane and protection board
D Submit manufacturer's installation instructions under provisions of Section 01330.
E Submit manufacturer's inspection reports under provisions of Section 01330
1 5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A Perform work in accordance with manufacturers recommendations
B Maintain one copy of document on site
1 6 QUALIFICATIONS
A Manufacturer Company specializing in the manufacture of products specified in this Section with minimum
five years documented experience
B Applicator Company specializing in applying the work of this Section with minimum three years documented
experience and approved by manufacturer
1 7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A Deliver, store and protect products to site under provisions of Section 01600
WLC/0414200 ELASTOMERIC SHEET WATERPROOFING 07132
d)
REV 04/05
1.8 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A Comply with all current federal, state, and local volatile organic compound (VOC) regulations
B Do not use solvent based primers containing 1-1-1 trichloroethane or asphalt emulsions
1 9 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A Do not apply products when surface or ambient temperature is below 25 degrees F.
B Do not apply to damp or frozen surfaces or during inclement weather
1 10 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A Coordinate work under the provisions of Section 01310
B Coordinate work of this Section with foundation and backfilling requirements
C Coordinate work of this Section with concrete, masonry, paving, and walkways
1 11 WARRANTY
A Furnish manufacturer's warranty that materials will be free of defects in manufacture
B Furnish applicator's warranty that the installation of materials will provide a leak free system
2 PART 2 PRODUCTS
2 1 MANUFACTURERS
A W R Grace and Co , Product - Bituthene System 3000, www graceconstruction com.
B Pecora Corporation, Product - Duramem 700-SM, www pecora com
C Carlisle Inc, Product - CCW Miradri 860, www carlisle-ccw com
D. Polyguard Products, Inc , Product-Polyguard 650, www polyguardproducts com
E W R Meadows, Inc., Product - Mel-Rol, www wrmeadows com
F. Tamko Products, Inc., Product-TW-60, www tamko com
G Substitutions Under provisions of Section 01630
2 2 MEMBRANE MATERIALS
A. Self-adhesive, cold-applied waterproofing sheet membrane consisting of a cross-laminated polyethylene
film and rubberized asphalt of a thickness of 060 inches (60 mils) by 36 inch wide rolls, inter-wound with
a disposable silicone-coated release sheet, conforming to the following
Properties
Pliability, 180 degrees bend over
1 inch mandrel at - 45 degrees F
Tensile Strength (membrane)
Tensile Strength (film)
Elongation
Puncture Resistance (membrane)
WLC/0414200
Test Results
ASTM D1970 Unaffected
ASTM D412
ASTM D412
ASTMD412
ASTM E1 54
250 psi
5000 psi
300 percent
40 Ib
ELASTOMERIC SHEET WATERPROOFING 07132
(2)
REV 04/05
Properties Test Results
Permeance ASTM E96 0 05 grains/sq ft./ hr/m Hg
(Method B)
Water Absorption ASTM D570 0 1 percent
2 3 ACCESSORIES
A Surface Conditioner Acrylic latex diluted with water
B Mastic Rubberized asphaltic type recommended by membrane manufacturer
C. Liquid Membrane Two component elastomenc, mastic grade
D Cement Mortar Epoxy or latex modified cementitious composition acceptable to membrane manufacturer
E Concrete Patching Compound Fast setting, non-shrinking patching compound, of type acceptable to
membrane manufacturer
F Tape 2 sided adhesive tape acceptable to membrane manufacturer.
2 4 PROTECTION BOARD
A Polystyrene Protection Board ASTM C578 expanded polystyrene board, 1 inch minimum thickness, for
vertical application
B Protection Board Adhesive Type recommended by board manufacturer and compatible with membrane
3 PART 3 EXECUTION
3 1 EXAMINATION
A Examine surfaces for conditions that would adversely affect execution Do not proceed until unsatisfactory
conditions are corrected Beginning of installation constitutes acceptance of conditions
B Ensure surfaces are reasonably smooth and free of holes, cracks or projections which might be detrimental
to successful installation
C. Verify that items penetrating waterproofing system are securely installed.
D Verify that concrete surfaces have cured a period of time acceptable to membrane manufacturer
E Verify that masonry joints are struck flush with face of unit
3 2 PREPARATION
A Protect adjacent surfaces not designated to receive waterproofing
B Clean and prepare surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's instructions
C Seal cracks and joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Use proper depth-width ratio
recommended by sealant manufacturer.
D Remove sharp projections, fins, and loose material. Remove form ties to 3/4 inch minimum behind face of
wall. Fill holes, voids, and honeycomb areas flush with concrete patching compound or cement mortar
E Seal penetrations in accordance with manufacturer's instructions
F Provide fillet or cant at junction of vertical and horizontal surfaces using liquid membrane Extend liquid
membrane 6 inches each way from corner at a minimum 90 mil thickness.
WLC/0414200 ELASTOMERIC SHEET WATERPROOFING 07132
(3)
REV 04/05
3 3 WATERPROOFING INSTALLATION
A Install products in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions.
B Extend membrane onto footing except terminate at point 12 inches below floor slab of protected space
where footings are at greater depth
C Apply latex surface conditioner at rate indicated by manufacturer Condition only as much area as can be
covered in same day
D Prior to placing full membrane, install minimum 3/4 inch cant of liquid membrane, extending 6 inches each
way at a minimum 90 mil thickness Provide membrane strips at inside corners, outside corners, and
working joints Center strips along axis of corner and/or joint
E Install sheets with edges and ends overlapped at dimensions recommended by manufacturer
F Remove release paper layer Roll out surface with mechanical roller to encourage full contact bond.
G Completely bond sheet to substrate, except those areas directly over or within 3 inches of working cracks
or expansion joints
H Place uniform bead of mastic to joint edges at locations recommended by manufacturer
I Seal perimeter ends and edges to adjoining surfaces
J Seal items penetrating membrane with flashing membrane material and liquid membrane, ensuring positive
seal with membrane and penetrating member
3 4 PROTECTION BOARD INSTALLATION
A Install protection board system over membrane and retain in place with adhesive in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions
35 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A Manufacturer's Field Services- Notify manufacturer prior to start of work and make arrangements for
manufacturer's technical representative to be present during work to verify work is being conducted in
accordance with their recommendations Submit reports
3 6 PROTECTION AND CLEANING
A Protect adjacent surfaces from damages and stains. Clean materials from surfaces where inadvertently
applied
END OF SECTION
WLC/0414200 ELASTOMERIC SHEET WATERPROOFING 07132
(4)
REV 04/05
SECTION 07190
WATER REPELLENTS
1. PART1 GENERAL
1 1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Water repellent coating applied to exterior and interior surfaces.
1 2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A Perform work in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions.
B. Maintain one copy of document on site
1 3 QUALIFICATIONS
A Manufacturer. Company specializing in manufacture of water repellent coatings with five years minimum
experience
B. Applicator: Acceptable to manufacturer
1 4 SUBMITTALS
A Submit product data under provisions of Section 01330.
B Include details of product descnption, tests performed, limitations to coating, cautionary procedures required
during application, and chemical properties, including percentage of solids.
C Submit manufacturer's installation instructions under provisions of Section 01330
D Submit manufacturer's certificate under provisions of Section 01330 that products meet or exceed specified
requirements and that their application was according to manufacturer's recommendation
E Submit manufacturer's certificate that products supplied comply with local regulations controlling the use
of volatile organic compounds (VOC)
F Submit manufacturer's test and inspection reports under provisions of Section 01330.
1.5 FIELD SAMPLE
A Apply coating to 24 sf area of each surface to be waterproofed where directed by Architect
B. Apply number of coats specified Color change or surface sheen is cause for rejection of product
1 6 WARRANTY
A Provide manufacturer's 5 year warranty for materials and their installation.
B Warranty Maintain treated surface free from penetration of moisture Repair damage to interior surface of
walls that moisture has penetrated.
1 7 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A Comply with all current federal, state, and local volatile organic compound (VOC) regulations.
1 8 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Do not apply coating when ambient temperature is lower than 50 degrees F or higher than 100 degrees F
WLC/0414200 WATER REPELLENTS 07190
(1)
REV 06/04
2 PART 2 PRODUCTS
2 1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A Huls America, (800) 344-6080.
B Hydrozo, Inc , www chemrex.com
C Monopole International, inc , www.monopolemc com
D. Okon, Inc , www okonmc com.
E Pecora Corp , www pecora.com.
F Pro So Co , Inc. www prosoco com.
G. Tnemec Company, Inc , www.tnemec com
H. Substitutions- Under provisions of Section 01630
2 2 MATERIALS
A Coatings Clear, non-yellowing formulations containing no sihcones
B Huls America Inc., Aqua-trete Emulsion EM
C. Hydrozo, Inc , Enviroseal Double 7
D. Monopole International, Inc., Aquaseal Micro Emulsion
E Pecora Corp , Klere-Seal 920-W Silane/Siloxane
F Pro So Co., Sure Kleen Weather Seal Siloxane WB
G Tnemec Co., Inc , Prime-A-Pell Plus
3 PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A Verify joint sealants are installed and cured
B Venfy surfaces to be coated are dry, clean, and free of efflorescence, oil, or other matter detrimental to
application of coating.
C Beginning of installation means acceptance of substrate
3 2 PREPARATION
A Remove loose particles and foreign matter
B Remove oil or foreign substance with a chemical solvent which will not affect coating
C Protect adjacent surfaces not scheduled to receive coating.
D If applied on unscheduled surfaces, remove immediately, by approved method.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Field inspection and testing will be performed under provisions of Section 01458
WLC/0414200 WATER REPELLENTS 07190
(2)
REV 06/04
B Manufacturer of water repellant coating shall provide the following inspection services'
1 Application start-up inspection
2. Periodic inspections during application
3 Certification of materials and application
34 APPLICATION
A. Delay work until substrate is cured a minimum of 30 days
B. Apply coating in two continuous successive wet-on-wet applications in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions, using airless spray with coverage, recommended by manufacturer for substrate being coated
3 5 PROTECTION AND CLEANING '
A. Protect adjacent surfaces from damages and stains.
B Clean materials from surfaces where inadvertently applied
C Protect finished installation under provisions of Section 01600
3 6 SCHEDULE
A. Exposed exterior simulated stone veneer
B Exposed interior concrete masonry building walls.
C Exposed surfaces of exterior concrete masonry site walls.
D Exterior exposed to view concrete surfaces at building foundation walls
END OF SECTION
WLC/0414200 WATER REPELLENTS 07190
(3)
REV 06/04
SECTION 07213
BATT INSULATION
1 PART1 GENERAL
1 1 SECTION INCLUDES
A Batt insulation and vapor barrier in exterior wall and roof construction
B Batt insulation for filling perimeter window and door shim spaces and crevices in exterior wall and roof
C Batt sound insulation in interior walls and above ceilings
1 2 REFERENCES
A ASTM C665 - Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light Frame Construction and Manufactured
Housing
B ASTM C1320 - Installation of Mineral Fiber Batt and Thermal Insulation for Light Frame Construction
C ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials \
D CBC - California Building Code, (CCR) California Code of Regulations, Title 24, Part 6.
E Business and Professions Code
1 3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A Materials of this Section shall provide continuity of thermal and moisture barrier at building enclosure
elements
B. Materials of this Section shall provide continuity of sound control where indicated or scheduled.
1 4 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A Installation of insulation may only commence if insulation meets mandatory manufacturer certification to the
California Energy Commission required by Title 24, Part 6, Section 118 of the CBC - California Building
Code, (CCR) California Code of Regulations that insulation complies with Title 20, Chapter 4, Article 3 of
the California Quality Standards for Insulating Materials
B Insulation materials to be certified in compliance with Business and Professions Code Section 19165
;
C Insulation manufacturer to be licensed by the California Department of Consumer Affairs, Bureau of Home
Furnishing and Thermal Insulation according to Business and Professions Code, Section 19059 7
1 5 SUBMITTALS I/
A Submit manufacturers certificates under provisions of Section 01330 that materials meet or exceed
specified regulatory requirements
2 PART 2 PRODUCTS
2 1 MANUFACTURERS - INSULATION MATERIALS
A Certain Teed Corp , www.certainteed.com <.
B. Johns Manville Corp , www jm com.
C Owens-Corning Fiberglass Corporation, www owenscornmg com
D. Substitutions Under provisions of Section 01630.
WLC/0414200 BATT INSULATION 07213
(1)
REV 09/04
2 2 MATERIALS
A Thermal Batt Insulation. ASTM C665 preformed glass fiber batt, Type III, Class A, with reflective membrane
faced surface with a flame spread of 25 or less, and a smoke density of 50 or less when tested in
accordance ASTM E-84 Category 1 with stapling flanges for attachment of blanket to applicable
construction Equivalent continuous roll membrane facing may be utilized in lieu of individual faced glass
fiber batts Provide R30 at roofs and R19 at walls
B Acoustical Batt Sound Insulation, Walls ASTM C665 preformed glass fiber batt, Type I unfaced, with flame
spread of 25 or less, and a smoke density of 450 or less when tested in accordance with ASTM E84
Provide R19, 6-1/2 inch minimum thickness.
C Acoustical Batt Sound Insulation, Ceiling: ASTM C665 preformed glass fiber batt, Type III Class A with
reflective membrane faced surface with a flame spread of 25 or less, and a smoke density of 50 or less
when tested in accordance with ASTM E-84 Category 2 Provide R19, 6-1/2 inch minimum thickness.
D Nails or Staples Steel wire, electroplated; type and size to suit application
E Tape. Bright aluminum self-adhering type, mesh reinforced, 2 inch wide
F Support Wire: 16 gauge steel wire
G Support Rods 13 gauge, pointed spring steel length as required for stud spacing
H. Spindle Fasteners: Steel impale spindle and clip on flat metal base, self adhering backing, length to suit
insulation thickness, capable of securely and rigidly fastening insulation in place
3 PARTS EXECUTION
3 1 EXAMINATION
A Verify that substrate, adjacent materials, and insulation are dry and ready to receive insulation
k
B Verify that enclosed spaces are ventilated to dissipate humidity
C Maximum relative humidity level of less than 50 percent shall be maintained during installation of insulation
32 INSTALLATION
A Install insulation in accordance with insulation manufacturer's instructions and ASTM C1320.
B Install batt insulation in all exterior wall and roof spaces without gaps or voids
C Install batt sound insulation in all interior walls for the full height of wall
D Install batt sound insulation above ceilings in all toilet and shower rooms
E Trim insulation neatly to fit spaces.
/F Fit insulation tight in spaces and tight to exterior side of mechanical and electrical services within the plane
of insulation. Leave no gaps or voids
G Install with factory applied membrane facing warm side of building spaces
H. Lap ends and side flanges of vapor barrier membrane over face of framing members
I. Extend vapor barrier on to any adjacent construction and tape seal edge of vapor barrier.
J. Seal butt ends, lapped flanges, and tears or cuts in membrane with tape or another layer of membrane
K Seal joints in vapor barrier caused by pipes, conduits, electrical boxes, and similar items penetrating vapor
barrier
WLC/041420Q BATT INSULATION 07213
(2)
REV 09/04
L Face staple flange over flange of adjacent blanket to wood studs at maximum 6 inches oc
M Friction fit sound insulation between studs and fill as required to completely fill space between the wall
finishes
N Where wall finish does not occur, use support rods spaced not-to-exceed 16 inches oc vertically at wood
studs
O Retain unsupported roof insulation to metal or concrete substrate with spindle fasteners at 24 inches on
center
END OF SECTION
WLC/0414200 BATT INSULATION 07213
(3)
REV 09/04
SECTION 07320
ROOF TILES
1 PART 1 GENERAL
1 1 SECTION INCLUDES
A Formed concrete roofing tiles
B Underlayment, flashings, and nailers
1 2 REFERENCES
A ASTM D226 - Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt Used in Roofing and Waterproofing
B ASTM D4586 - Asphalt Roof Cement, Asbestos Free
C CBC - California Building Code, (CCR) California Code of Regulations, Title 24, Part 2
D NRCA - Steep Roofing Manual
E SMACNA - Architectural Sheet Metal Manual
1 3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A Installer Company specializing in installation of concrete roof tiles with minimum five years experience
B Conform to NRCA - Steep Roofing Manual for roofing installation
1 4 SUBMITTALS
A Submit samples under provisions of Section 01330
B Submit two samples full size, illustrating finish, color and texture
C Submit manufacturers installation instructions
1 5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A Conform to installation requirements of the CBC, California Building Code, (CCR) California Code of
Requirements, Title 24, Part 2, Section 1507
1 6 STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A Deliver store and protect products under provisions of Section 01600
B Protect concrete tiles from damage in accordance with manufacturer's storage instructions.
1.7 WARRANTY
A Provide warranty under provisions of Section 01770
B Provide 10 year warranty for labor and materials for repair or replacement of defective roofing and flashing
installation for failure to resist penetration of water
WLC/0414200 ROOF TILES 07320
(1)
REV 01/04
2 PART 2 PRODUCTS
2 1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A MonierLifetile Co , www monierhfetile.com
B Eagle Roofing Company, www eagleroofmg com
C Hanson Roof, www hansonrooftile com
D Westile, www westile com
E Substitutions Under provisions of Section 01630
2 2 ROOFING MATERIALS
A Concrete Tiles: Slate style by MonierLifetile, 17 x 12-3/8 inches, 3 inch headlap holes provided for
attachment, special shapes to suit valley, ridge, eave, and other conditions. Average breaking load 400 Ibs
Individual breaking load 350 Ibs Color as selected by Architect from manufacturer's complete range.
B Underlayment ASTM D226, No 30 unperforated asphalt saturated felt
C Nails Fabricated of copper, stainless steel, or brass.
D. Plastic Cement. ASTM D4586, Type I
E Lap Cement Fibrated cutback asphaltic type, as recommended for use as an adhesive in the cold
application of asphalt roofing or underlayment, free of toxic solvent
F. Nailers Softwood lumber, preservative treated by pressure.
23 FLASHING MATERIALS
A Type as specified in Section 07620
3 PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Verify that roof deck surfaces are dry, sound, flat, and of sufficient thickness to accept fasteners
B Beginning of installation means acceptance of substrate
3.2 PREPARATION
A Coordinate installation of roof mounted components, or work projecting or penetrating through roof Verify
roof openings are prepared prior to installing work of this Section.
3 3 PROTECTIVE UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION
A Place one ply of underlayment over deck area, with ends and edges weatherlapped minimum 6 inches.
B. Stagger end laps of each consecutive layer. Nail in place
C. Install perpendicular to slope of roof
D Weather lap and seal items projecting through or mounted on roof with plastic cement
E Embed wood nailers in plastic cement before through nailing
WLC/0414200 ROOF TILES 07320
(2)
REV 01/04
3 4 VALLEY PROTECTION INSTALLATION
A Place one layer of metal flashing, minimum 24 inches wide, centered over valleys and crimped to guide
water.
B Weather lap joints minimum 4 inches.
C Hem exposed edges and turn edge up
D Nail in place minimum 18 inches oc, 1 inch from edges
3 5 FLASHING INSTALLATION
A Installation to conform to requirements of Section 07620
3 6 ROOF TILE INSTALLATION
A Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, and NRCA Steep Roofing Manual.
B Install in accordance with requirements of CBC, California Building Code, (CCR) California Code
Requirements, Title 24, Part 2, Section 1507
C Place wood battens of size and configuration to suit tile system Place battens parallel to roof edge Notch
battens 48 inches oc to allow air ventilation and promote drainage
D Project tile 1-1/2 inches beyond face of fascia board.
E Place filler and closure pieces as required
F Coordinate installation of roof mounted components and work projecting through roof with weather tight
placement of counter flashings
G Complete installation to provide weathertight service
END OF SECTION
WLC/0414200 ROOF TILES 07320
(3)
REV 01/04
SECTION 07550
MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING
1 PART1 GENERAL
1 1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Cleaning deck surface
B Membrane roofing and base flashings.
C. Spray applied elastomeric acrylic coating
12 REFERENCES
A. ASTM B370 - Standard Specification for Copper Sheet and Strip for Building Construction
B ASTM B749 - Standard Specification for Lead and Lead Alloy Strip, Sheet, and Plate Products
C ASTM C728 - Perlite Thermal Insulation Board
D ASTMD312-Asphalt Used in Roofing.
E ASTM D412 - Rubber Properties in Tension
F ASTM D2523 - Testing Load-Strain Properties of Roofing Membranes
G ASTM D4601 - Asphalt-Coated Glass Fiber Base Sheet Used in Roofing.
H ASTM D6083 - Standard Specification for Liquid Applied Acrylic Coating Used in Roofing
I. ASTM D6162 - Standard Specification for Styrene Butadiene Styrene (SBS) Modified Bituminous Sheet
Materials Using a Combination of Polyester and Glass Fiber Reinforcements
J ASTM D6163 - Standard Specification for Styrene Butadiene Styrene (SBS) Modified Bituminous Sheet
Materials Using Glass Fiber Reinforcements
i
K ASTM D6221 - Standard Specification for Reinforced Bituminous Flashing Sheets on Roofing and
Waterproofing. ^
L ASTM E408 - Standard Test Methods for Total Normal Emittance of Surfaces Using Inspection - Meter
Techniques
M ASTM E903 - Standard Test Method for Solar Absorption, Reflectance, and Transmittance of Materials
Using Inspection - Meter Techniques.
N. CBC - California Building Code, (CRC) California Code of Regulations, Title 24, Part 6.
O CCRC - Cool Roof Rating Council - Product Rating Program CRRC-1.
P FM (FM Global) - Roof Assembly Classifications
Q. UL (Underwriters Laboratories) - Fire Hazard Classifications
1 3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A Modified Bitumen Conventional Roofing System- Three layer SBS membrane system having a granulated
surfacing
WLC/0414200 MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING 07550
d)
REV 01/05 i
1 4 SUBMITTALS
A Submit manufacturer's product data, summary of weights of materials and installation instructions under
provisions of Section 01330.
B. Submit documentation of conformance of roofing system with regulatory requirements specified under
provisions of Section 01330.
1 5 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer- Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this Section with five years
documented experience
B. Applicator. Company specializing in performing the work of this Section with five years documented
experience and approved by system manufacturer
C Work of this Section to conform to manufacturer's instructions.
1 6 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A Conform to applicable UL and FM requirements for roof assembly requirements
B Fire Hazard Classification: UL Class A
C Conform to CBC - California Building Code, (CCR) California Code of Regulations, Title 24, Part 6
requirements for a Cool Roof under the Product Rating Program CRRC-1 of the Cool Roof Rating Council
D Windstorm Rating- FM I-90
1 7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site under provisions of Section 01600.
B Deliver products in manufacturer's original containers, dry, undamaged, seals and labels intact.
C. Store products in weather protected environment, clear of ground and moisture,
D Store products in a manner to avoid significant or permanent deflection of roof deck.
E. Stand roll materials on end.
1 8 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A Do not apply roofing membrane during inclement weather.
B Do not apply roofing membrane to damp or frozen deck surface
C Do not expose materials vulnerable to water or sun damage in quantities greater than can be
weatherproofed during same day.
1 9 COORDINATION
A Coordinate work under provisions of Section 01310
B. Coordinate the work with installation of associated metal flashings as the work of this Section proceeds
j C. Notify roofing manufacturer 72 hours priorto commencing work to arrange for inspection of roof application.
1 10 GUARANTEE
A. Provide 20 year guarantee under provisions of Section 01770
WLC/0414200 MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING 07550
(2)
REV 01/05
B. Warranty Manufacturer's No Dollar Limit Guarantee covering roof membrane, base flashings, and
workmanship equivalent to Signature Series Guarantee offered by the Johns Manville Corporation
Warranty to include repair of roof membrane damage due to windstorms less than or equal to 64 mph.
1 11 INSPECTION SERVICE
A Manufacturer of the roofing materials shall provide the following services
1 Application start-up inspection.
2. Periodic inspections during applications
3 Certification of materials used and application.
2 PART 2 PRODUCTS
2 1 MANUFACTURERS - MEMBRANE MATERIALS
A Johns Manville Corp., System 3CND, www jm com
B. Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products
1. GAF, www gaf com
2. MB Technology, www mbtechnology com.
3. Certain Teed, www gsroof.com
C. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01630
2 2 MANUFACTURERS - ACRYLIC COATING
A National Coatings Corporation, Acryshield MB Primer with Acryshield A420 Top Coat, CCRC Product ID
No. 0626-0004, UL No R11754 , www nationalcoatings.com
B -Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products:
1 Everest Coatings, Inc , EverCoat 710 Primer with EverCoat 500/510 Top Coat, CCRC Product ID
No. 0624-0009, UL No R13336 , www everestcoatings.com
2. General Coatings, Ultraflex 1500 Base Coat with Ultraflex 1600 Top Coat, CCRC ID No. 0684-0006,
UL No 14330, www generalcoatmgs net
3 Henry Company, 291 Base Coat with HE 280 Top Coat, CCRC ID No 0620-0004, UL No R10185,
www.henry com
4 Republic Powdered Metals, Inc., Solarguard Ultra Prime WB with Solarguard Ultra Top Coat, CCRC
ID. No 0650-0003 UL No. R8480, www rpmrepublic com
C Substitutions- Under provisions of Section 01630.
2.3 MEMBRANE MATERIALS
A. Membrane Cap Sheet- ASTM D6162, Type II, Grade G Asphalt and polymer modifiers of
styrene-butadiene-styrene (SBS) type, reinforced with nonwoven polyester and fiberglass, equivalent to
Dynakap FR as manufactured by a Johns Manville Corp., with the following characteristics
Thickness 160 mils at 75 degrees F
Average Weight 88 lb/100 sq ft
Sheet Width . 37 inch
WLC/0414200 MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING 07550
(3)
REV 01/05
Tensile Strength : 135 psi when tested in accordance with
ASTM D2523
Elongation 6 percent when tested in accordance with
ASTM D412.
Elasticity 100 percent with full recovery without set when
tested in accordance with ASTM D2523.
Granular Surfacing White granular surfacing
B . Intermediate Sheet. ASTM D6163, Type II, Grade S, SBS modified bitumen coated glass fiber reinforced
membrane, DynaBase as manufactured by the Johns Manville Corporation
C. Glass Fiber Base Sheet. ASTM D4601, Type II, GlasBase Plus as manufactured by the Johns Manville
Corporation.
2 4 BITUMINOUS MATERIALS
A Asphalt Bitumen ASTM D312, Type III.
B Flashing Compound Elastomenc adhesive specially formulated to be compatible to SBS modified bitumen
roll goods; asbestos free
2 5 ROOF SURFACING
A Acrylic Roof Top Coat 100 percent acrylic elastomeric roof coating, white in color, conforming to the
following:
Properties Test Results
Solids ASTM D6083 60 percent
Elongation ASTM D6083 250 percent
Tensile Strength ASTM D6083 250 Percent
Flexibility ASTM D6083 180 degree bend at - 30 degree F
Solar Reflectance (albedo x 100) ATSM E903 0 75 percent
Emisivity ASTM E408 0.90 percent
26 BASE FLASHINGS
A Base Flashing: Flexible sheet flashing, ASTM D6221, Type 1, modified bitumen, granule surfaced,
equivalent to Dynaflex, as manufactured by the Johns Manville Corporation.
27 CANT STRIPS
A. ASTM C728, fire resistant expanded Perhte, preformed to 45 degree angle, 4 inch minimum face dimension
2.8 TAPERED EDGE STRIPS
A. ASTM C728 fire resistant expanded perlite, configuration as detailed.
29 ACCESSORIES
A Roofing Nails: Galvanized or non-ferrous type, size as required to suit application.
B. Lead Sheet. ASTM B749, Type L51121, copper-bearing lead sheet, 2-1/2 to 4 lbs./sq ft.
C Copper Sheet ASTM B370, Temper HOO of H01, cold-rolled copper sheet, 16 oz./sq. ft
WLC/0414200 MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING 07550
(4)
REV 01/05
D Acrylic Coating Accessories. Acrylic prime coat, 3.0 oz /sq. yd polyester reinforcing fabric, adhesives,
elastomenc caulking compounds and similar materials shall be as approved by the coating manufacturer
Sealants and adhesives shall meet South Coast Air Quality Management District (SCAQMD) Rule #1168
2 10 SUMMARY OF MATERIALS PER 100 SQUARE FEET
A Base sheet (1 ply) 28 Ibs
B intermediate sheet (1 ply) 56 Ibs
C Asphalt moppmgs (2 @ 23 Ibs.) 46 Ibs
D Cap sheet (1 ply) 88 Ibs.
E Acrylic Prime Coat (1-1/2 gal/coat) 18 Ibs
F Acrylic Top Coat (2 gal/coat) 24 Ibs
260 Ibs
3 PART 3 EXECUTION
3 1 EXAMINATION
A Verify that surfaces and site conditions are ready to receive work
B. Verify that deck is supported and secured
C Verify deck is clean and smooth, free of depressions, waves, or projections, properly sloped to drains,
valleys, or eaves
D Verify that deck surfaces are dry and free of snow or ice
E. Confirm dry deck by moisture meter with 15 to 19 percent moisture maximum
F Verify roof openings, curbs, pipes, sleeves, ducts, and vents through roof are solidly set, and reglets are
in place.
G Beginning of installations means installer accepts existing surfaces
32 PROTECTION
A. Protect building surfaces against damage from roofing work
3 3 PREPARATION
A Verify flatness and tight joints of wood decking Fill knot holes with latex filler
B Prime metal flashings with asphalt primer.
C. Install tapered edge strips, 1-1/2 inch thick x 24 inch wide, at all roof penetrations and at all intersections
of roof with vertical surfaces
D Nail cants 2 feet o c. to roof deck Fit flush at ends and to vertical surfaces. Apply cant 2 inches back from
flange and bevel 8 inches from ends at scuppers
3 4 ASPHALT
A Mop Application Apply asphalt at a temperature range of between 400 degrees to 450 degrees F or per
manufacturer's printed EVT range
B. Mechanical Spreader Apply asphalt at a temperature range of between 425 degrees to 475 degrees F or
per manufacturer's printed EVT range
WLC/0414200 MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING 07550
(5)
REV 01/05
C Asphalt shall not be heated above maximum temperature Asphalt which has been overheated shall be
rejected.
D. Kettle shall be equipped with an accurate thermostat and thermometer
3.5 BASE SHEET APPLICATION
A Lay a strip of base sheet, 8 inches wide, over metal straps and mechanical anchors exposed on deck
surface Fasten in place.
B Lay base sheet; lap side edges 3 inches, end laps 4 inches. Nail laps 9 inches oc. Nail the field area with
two rows of nails at 11 inches oc staggered, on 18 inch centers.
36 MEMBRANE APPLICATION
A. Equiviscous Temperature of Bitumen at Point of Application Within 25 degrees F of bitumen rating labeled
on bitumen container
B Lap intermediate sheet edges 3 inches, cap sheet edges 4 inches.,
C Apply membrane in bitumen, seal seams and ends permanently waterproof
D Apply membrane smooth, free from air pockets, wrinkles, or tears
E Reinforce valleys with an additional ply of base sheet 36 inches wide, center over valley Apply in direction
of slope of valley, lapping 4 inches on ends Solid mop to base sheet
F Extend membrane up cant strips
G Install waterproof cut-off to membrane at end of day's operation Remove cut-off before resuming roofing
H Mop and seal membrane around roof penetrations
I Repair edge seams of cap sheet with emulsion and granules where bitumen extends beyond seam
3 7 FLASHINGS AND ACCESSORIES
A Coordinate installation of roof drains and related flashings
B Set base sheet at roof drains in flashing compound 9 inches wide around ring and flange Provide a
minimum 30 inch square, lead or copper flashing set in flashing compound over base sheet Strip in flashing
with two plies of intermediate membrane extending 4 inches and 6 inches beyond the outside edge of
flashing Solid mop flashings, and while hot, embed cap sheet, install clamp ring and tighten entire
assembly while membrane is hot.
C. Seal flashings and flanges of items penetrating membrane
D. Apply granule surfaced membrane base flashings to seal membrane to vertical elements Extend a
minimum of 8 inches up vertical surfaces and 4 inches out onto field membrane.
E. Secure to nailing strips at 6 inches oc
F Repair edge seams of membrane base flashing with emulsion and granules where bitumen extends beyond
seam
WLC/0414200 MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING 07550
(6)
REV 01/05
3.8 ACRYLIC ROOF COATING
A Repair imperfections in roof field or flashing areas with sealant
B Apply prime coat approximately 3'-10" wide at all valleys, waterways, dram areas, junctions of vertical wall
surfaces, mechanical equipment and roof penetrations at the rate of 2 gallons per 100 square feet
C Immediately embed a 3'-4" wide polyester reinforcing fabric into the wet prime coat
D Lap joints in fabric a minimum of 3 inches Extend fabric up vertical wall and curb surfaces a minimum of
6 inches
y
E Apply a second prime coat immediately onto polyester fabric at the rate of 1 gallon per 100 square feet
Extend prime coat a minimum of 2 inches beyond edge of fabric.
F Allow prime coat to dry for 24 hours
G Apply roof prime coat over entire roof surface at the rate of 1-1/2 gallons per 100 square feet
H Extend prime coat up vertical wall surface 3 inches minimum above termination of base flashing.
I Allow prime coat to dry for 24 hours
J Apply first application of roof top coating at the rate of 1 -1/2 gallons per 100 square feet
K Allow first application of roof top coating to dry for a minimum of 12 hours
L Apply second application of roof top coating in a perpendicular pattern to first application at the rate of 1-
1/2 gallons per 100 square feet
M Cut edges of final roof top coating application in evenly and uniformly
3 9 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A Field inspection will be performed under provisions of Section 01458
B Correct identified defects or irregularities
C Site attendance of roofing materials manufacturers during installation of the Work is required
3 10 CLEANING
A Remove bituminous markings from finished surfaces
B In areas where finished surfaces are soiled by work of this Section', consult manufacturer of surfaces for
cleaning advice and conform to their documented instructions
C Repair or replace defaced or disfigured finishes caused by work of this Section
3 11 PROTECTION
A Protect building surfaces against damage from roofing work
B Upon completing roofing, including associated work, institute appropriate procedures for surveillance and
protection of roofing during remainder of construction period
C Where traffic must continue over finished roof membrane, protect surfaces
D At end of construction period, or at a time when remaining construction will in no way affect or endanger
roofing, inspect roofing and prepare a written report with copies to Architect describing nature and extent
of deterioration or damage found
v.
WLC/0414200 MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING 07550
(7)
REV 01/05
Repair or replace, as required, deteriorated or defective work found at time of above inspection to a
condition free of damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion according to requirements of
specified warranty
END OF SECTION
WLC/0414200 MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING 07550
(8)
REV 01/05
SECTION 07620
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
1 PART1 GENERAL
1 1 SECTION INCLUDES
A Pre-coated coping, parapet, and cap flashings
B Pre-coated eave, rake and valley flashing
C Counter flashing at piping penetrations, vent pipes, and conduits
D Counterflashmgs over bituminous base flashings.
E Counterflashmgs at roof mounted equipment, curbs and supports
F Counterflashmgs for roof hatches
1.2 REFERENCES
A ASTM A653 - Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated, (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-
Dip Process
B ASTM A755 - Steel Sheet, Metallic Coated by the Hot-Dip Process and Prepamted by the Coil-Coating
Process for Exterior Exposed Building Products
C ASTM A792 - Steel Sheet, Aluminum-Zinc Alloy Coated by the Hot-Dip Process, General Requirements.
D ASTM A924 - General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot-Dip Process
E ASTM B101 - Standard Specifications for Lead-Coated Copper Sheet and Strip for Building Construction
F ASTM D226 - Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt Used in Roofing and Waterproofing
G ASTM D549 - Rosin in Paper and Paperboard.
H ASTM D4586 - Asphalt Roof Cement, Asbestos Free
I SMACNA - Architectural Sheet Metal Manual
1 3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A Work of this Section is to physically protect membrane roofing, concrete roofing tiles, and base flashings,
from damage that would permit water leakage to building interior
1 4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A Applicator Company specializing in sheet metal flashing work with five years minimum experience.
B Perform work in accordance with SMACNA standard details and requirements.
1 5 SUBMITTALS
A Submit shop drawings, product data, and samples under provisions of Section 01330
B Submit shop drawings of sheet metal items indicating profiles, jointing, terminations and installation details
Indicate type and spacing of fasteners
C Submittal of specific plates from the SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual constitutes acceptable
documentation of installation details
WLC/0414200 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07620
(D
REV 06/04
D. Submit product data for pre-coated galvanized steel
E Submit two samples, 4x4 inch in size illustrating metal finish color for pre-coated steel
F Submit product data for flashing accessories
G. Submit warranty for water tightness
H Submit warranty for metal finish
1 6 STORAGE AND HANDLING
A Store products under provisions of Section 01600
B Stack preformed material to prevent twisting, bending, or abrasion, and to provide ventilation
C Prevent contact with materials during storage which may cause discoloration, staining, or damage
1 7 WARRANTY
A Provide warranty under provisions of Section 01770
B Provide 2-year warranty coverage for degradation of water tightness and integrity of seals
C Provide 20-year warranty coverage for metal finish from all defects
2 PART 2 PRODUCTS
2 1 SHEET MATERIALS
A Pre-Coated Galvanized Steel ASTM A755 on zinc-coated galvanized substrate, ASTM A653, Grade 33,
G90 zinc coating in accordance with ASTM A924 or ASTM A792, Grade 50, AZ55 aluminum zinc coating,
0 0299 inch thick core steel
B Galvanized Steel ASTM A653, Grade 33, G90 zinc coating in accordance with ASTM A924, 0 0299 inch
thick core steel
22 ACCESSORIES
A Lead-Coated Copper ASTM B101, Temper HOO and H01, cold-rolled copper sheet, coated both sides with
lead weighing not less than 12 lb/100 sq ft. or more than 15 Ib /100 sq ft total weight of copper sheet with
lead applied to both sides
B Fastener Galvanized steel or Stainless steel with soft neoprene washers at exposed fasteners Finish
exposed fasteners same as pre-coated metal
C Underlayment ASTM D266, No 30 asphalt saturated roofing felt.
D Metal Primer As specified in Section 09900
E Protective Backing Paint. Zinc chromate alkyd
F. Slip Sheet' ASTM D549, 0 05 Ib/sq ft, rosin sized building paper
G. Sealant Type specified in Section 07900
H. Bedding Compound Rubber-asphalt type
I. Plastic Cement ASTM D4586, Type I
WLC/0414200 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07620
(2)
REV 06/04
J Metal Flashing System Two piece pre-coated galvanized steel similar to Spnnglok Flashing System,
manufactured by Fry Reglet, www fryreglet com, type as indicated Include fabricated end closures and
mitered corners
K Solder for Lead-Coated Copper ASTM B32, Grade SN 60 percent tin, 40 percent lead
2 3 FABRICATION
A Form sections true to shape, accurate in size, square, and free from distortion or defects
B Fabricate concealed cleats of galvanized steel, ASTM A653, Grade 33, G90 zinc coating, 0 0478 inch
thickness, mterlockable with sheet
C Fabricate exposed cleats and coverplates of same material as sheet, mterlockable with sheet
D Form pieces in longest practical lengths
E Hem exposed edges on underside 1/2 inch. Miter and seam corners
F Form material with flat lock seam
G Solder and seal metal joints After soldering, remove flux Wipe and wash solder joints clean
H Fabricate corners from one piece with minimum 18 inch long legs, seam for rigidity, seal with sealant
I Fabricate vertical faces with bottom edge formed outward 1/4 inch and hemmed to form drip
J Fabricate flashings to allow toe to extend 2 inches over roofing surface Return and brake edges
K Fabricate vent pipe and roof penetration flashings of lead-coated copper with clamping ring
24 FINISH
A At concealed flashing and trim
1 Shop prepare and prime exposed ferrous metal surfaces
2 Back-paint concealed metal surfaces with protective backing paint to a minimum dry film thickness
of 15 mil.
B At exposed view flashing and trim
1 Kynar 500 or Hylar 5000 shop pre-coated finish with 0 2 mil baked on primer and 0 8 mil baked on
topcoat for a 1 0 mil dry film thickness Custom color to be selected by Architect
3 PART 3 EXECUTION
3 1 INSPECTION
A Verify roof openings, curbs, pipes, sleeves, ducts, or vents through roof are solidly set, cant strips and
reglets are in place, and nailing strips located
B Verify membrane termination and base flashings are in place, sealed, and secure
C Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions
3 2 PREPARATION
A Field measure site conditions prior to fabricating work
B Install starter and edge strips, and cleats before starting installation
WLC/0414200 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07620
(3)
REV 06/04
C Install surface mounted reglets true to line and level Seal top with sealant
D Install underlayment with protective slip sheet over parapets, caps, copings, gravel stops and curbs
33 INSTALLATION
A Conform to indicated details on the drawings and the recommendations included in the SMACNA
Architectural Sheet Metal Manual L
B Provide for thermal expansion of exposed sheet metal work Space movement joints at 10 feet - 0 inches
o c maximum with no joints within 2 feet - 0 inches of corners
C Form expansion joints of mtermeshmg hooked flanges filled with sealant
D Insert flashings into reglets to form tight fit Secure in place with lead wedges at maximum 12 inches on
center Pack remaining spaces with lead wool Seal flashings into reglets with sealant
E Secure flashings in place using concealed fasteners. Use exposed fasteners only where indicated
F. Lap, lock, seam and seal all joints
G Apply plastic cement compound between metal flashings and felt flashings. Apply bituminous coating
between dissimilar metals where occurs.
H Fit flashings tight in place Make corners square, surfaces true and straight in planes, and lines accurate
to profiles
I Roof-Penetration, Vent Pipe Flashing Turn lead flashing down inside vent piping Clamp flashing to other
pipes penetrating roof except for vent piping Seal with elastomenc sealant
J Seal metal joints watertight
3 4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A Conform to SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual
B Field observation will involve surveillance of work during installation to ascertain compliance with specified
requirements
END OF SECTION
WLC/0414200 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07620
(4)
REV 06/04
SECTION 07631
GUTTERS AND DOWNSPOUTS
1 PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Galvanized steel gutters
B. Steel pipe downspouts.
1 2 REFERENCES
A ASTM A53 - Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped Zinc-Coated Welded and Seamless
B ASTM A123 - Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coating on Iron and Steel Products.
C. ASTM A653 - Steel Sheet, Zinc Coated, (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-
Dip Process
D. ASTM A755 - Steel Sheet, Metallic Coated by the Hot-Dip Process and Prepamted by the Coil-Coating
Process for Exterior Exposed Building Products
E. ASTM A792 - Steel Sheet, Aluminum-Zinc Alloy Coated by the Hot-Dip Process, General Requirements.
F ASTM A924 - General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot-Dip Process
G. SMACNA - Architectural Sheet Metal Manual
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A Submit shop drawings, product data, and samples under provisions of Section 01330.
B Submit shop drawings of metal items indicating profiles, jointing, terminations, and installation details
Indicate type and spacing of fasteners.
C Submittal of specific plates from the SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual constitutes acceptable
documentation of installation details.
D Submit product data for pre-coated galvanized steel
E Submit two samples 4x4 inch in size illustrating metal finish color for pre-coated steel.
F. Submit warranty for metal finish
1 4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Applicator Company specializing in sheet metal work with five years minimum experience
B. Perform work in accordance with SMACNA standard details and requirements
1.5 STORAGE AND HANDLING
A Store products under provisions of Section 01600
B. Stack preformed material to prevent twisting, bending, or abrasion and to provide ventilation
C. Prevent contact with materials during storage which may cause discoloration, staining or damage
WLC/0414200 GUTTERS AND DOWNSPOUTS 07631
(1)
REV 06/04
1 6 WARRANTY
A Provide warranty under provisions of Section 01770.
B Provide 20-year warranty coverage for metal finish from all defects
2 PART 2 PRODUCTS
21 MATERIALS
A Pre-coated Galvanized Steel ASTM A755 on zinc-coated galvanized substrate, ASTM A653, Grade 33,
G90 zinc coating in accordance with ASTM A924, or ASTM A792, Grade 50, AZ55 aluminum zinc coating
thickness as specified
22 COMPONENTS
A Gutters 0 0299 inch thick
B. Downspouts ASTM A53, Grade B, Schedule 40 steel pipe, standard weight, Type S, one piece without
joints, galvanized according to ASTM A53, 1.8 oz./sq ft.
23 ACCESSORIES
A Anchorage Devices Meet SMACNA requirements
B End Caps, Downspout Outlets and Strainers, Rain Diverters, Stiaps, Support Brackets, Joint Fasteners
Profiled to suit gutters and downspouts
C Sealant. Silicone type as specified in Section 07900.
2 4 FABRICATION
A Form gutters and downspouts of profiles and sizes indicated
B Field measure site conditions prior to fabricating work
C Fabricate with required connection pieces
D Form sections square, true, and accurate in size, in maximum possible lengths and free of distortion or
defects detrimental to appearance or performance
E Hem exposed edges of metal.
F Seal metal joints.
G. Fabricate gutter and downspout accessories, seal watertight.
2.5 FINISHING
A Site paint steel pipe downspouts metal surfaces under provisions of Section 09900
B Kynar 500 or Hylar 5000 shop pre-coated finish on flat sheet metal stock. Finish with 0.2 mil baked on
primer and 0 80 mil baked on topcoat for a 1 0 mil dry film thickness Custom color to be selected by
Architect.
3 PART 3 EXECUTION
3 1 EXAMINATION
A Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work
B Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions
WLC/0414200 GUTTERS AND DOWNSPOUTS 07631
(2)
REV 06/04
32 INSTALLATION
A Install gutters, downspouts, and accessories in accordance with SMACNA requirements.
B Join lengths with seams sealed watertight. Flash and seal gutters to downspouts and accessories.
C Seal metal joints watertight
END OF SECTION
WLC/0414200 GUTTERS AND DOWNSPOUTS 07631
(3)
REV 06/04
SECTION 07724
ROOF HATCHES
1 PART1 GENERAL
1 1 SECTION INCLUDES
A Prefabricated roof hatches with integral support curbs, operable hardware, and counterflashmgs
B. Roof hatch railing system
1 2 REFERENCES
A. OSHA - Standards of Occupational Safety and Health Administration
1 3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit product data under provisions of Section 01330
B. Provide data on unit construction, sizes, configuration, jointing methods, attachment methods, and
accessories
C Manufacturer and/or fabricator shall submit a certificate of product compliance with OSHA Standards
1 4 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A OSHA regulations as applicable to roof access hatches, 29 CFR 1910.23.
2 PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Acryhght International, www acralight com
B Babcock-Davis Hatchways, Inc , www.babcockdavis com
C Bilco Co , www.bilco.com
D. Bristol Fiberlite Industries, www bristolite.com
E Dur-Red Products, www dur-red com
F Lane-Aire, www lane-aire com
G Milcor, Inc , www milcormc com
H Nystrom Building Products, www.nystrom com
I Precision Ladders, LLC, www precisionladders com
J Substitutions Under provisions of Section 01630
2.2 ROOF HATCHES
A Unit 2'-6" x 3'-0" size, single leaf type.
B. Curb 0 0747 inch thick galvanized prime painted steel with one inch rigid insulation, integral cap flashing
to receive roof flashing system, extended flange for mounting
C. Cover 0 0747 inch thick galvanized prime painted steel with 1 inch glass fiber insulation retained by
0 0299 inch thick steel inner liner Continuous gasket to provide weatherproof seal
WLC/0414200 ROOF HATCHES 07724
d)
REV 04/05
D Hardware Manufacturer's standard manually operated type with compression spring operators, positive
snap latch with turn handles inside and out and padlock hasp inside, automatic hold-open arm with vinyl
covered grip handle for easy release, galvanized finish.
E Hinges Manufacturer's recommended type
2 3 RAILING SYSTEM
A Kee Hatch, Model No. RHSR-SS, www.thesafetyrailsource com
B. Babcock-Davis Hatchways, Inc Model No. RHSR-SS , www babcockdavis com.
C Dur-Red Products, Model No Safety Rail, www dur-red com
D Nystom Building Products, Model No. RHSR-SS, www.nystom com
E Substitutions Under provisions of Section 01630
2 4 HATCH FABRICATION
A Fabricate free of visual distortions and defects Weld corners and joints
B Provide for removal of condensation
C Provide weathertight assembly
2.5 FINISH
A Shop prime paint all exposed metal
B Site paint metal surfaces under provisions of Section 09900.
3 PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions Coordinate with installation of roofing system and
related flashings Provide weather tight installation.
B Permanently bolt railing system to roof hatch curb in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C. Apply bituminous paint on metal surfaces of units in contact with cementitious materials and dissimilar
metals
END OF SECTION
WLC/0414200 ROOF HATCHES 07724
(2)
REV 04/05
SECTION 07900
JOINT SEALERS
1 PART1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A Preparing sealant substrate surfaces.
B Sealant and backing
1 2 SUMMARY OF SEALANT LOCATIONS
A Joints in horizontal surfaces
1 Expansion and isolation joints in cast-m-place concrete slabs
2 Expansion and isolation joints in masonry paving
3 ' Control and expansion joints in ceramic tile
4 Perimeter joints in exterior openings
5 Joints between ceiling surfaces and frames for doors and windows
6 Joints in flashing and sheet metal
7 Perimeter joints of toilet fixtures
8 Joints between countertops and wall surfaces
9 Joints between thresholds and floors.
10 Isolation joints in plaster soffits and ceilings
11 Joints between dissimilar materials and those listed above
12 Other joints as indicated
B Joints in vertical surfaces.
1 Expansion and isolation joints in cast-m-place concrete
2 Expansion and isolation joints in masonry
3 Control and expansion joints in ceramic tile
4 Perimeter joints in exterior openings
5 Joints in flashing and sheet metal
6 Perimeter joints of toilet fixtures.
7 Joints between cabinets and walls
8 Joints between wall surfaces and door and window frames
9 Joints between dissimilar materials and those listed above.
10 Other joints as indicated
WLC/0414200 JOINT SEALERS 07900
(D
REV 04/05
13 REFERENCES
A ASTM C834 - Latex Sealing Compounds
B ASTM C919 - Practices for Use of Sealants in Acoustical Applications
C ASTM C920 - Elastomeric Joint Sealants
D ASTM C1193 - Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants
E ASTM D1056 - Flexible Cellular Materials - Sponge or Expanded Rubber
F FS TT-S-001657 - Sealing Compound, Single Component, Butyl Rubber Based, solvent Release Type
G SWRI - (Sealant, Waterproofing and Restoration Institute) - Sealant and Caulking Guide Specification
1 4 SUBMITTALS
A Submit product data under provisions of Section 01330
B Submit product data indicating sealant chemical characteristics, performance criteria, limitations, and color
availability
C Submit samples under provisions of Section 01330
D Submit two samples 4 inches long in size illustrating colors selected
1 5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A Manufacturer Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this Section with minimum
five years documented experience
B Applicator Company specializing in applying the work of this Section with minimum three years documented
experience, approved by sealant manufacturer
C Conform to Sealant, Waterproofing, and Restoration Institute (SWRI) requirements for materials and
installation
D Perform work in accordance with ASTM C1193
E Perform acoustical sealant application work to provide maximum STC values in accordance with
ASTM C919
1 6 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A Do not install solvent curing sealants in enclosed building spaces
B Do not install sealant when temperature is less than 40 degrees F
C Maintain temperature and humidity recommended by the sealant manufacturer during and after installation
1 7 WARRANTY
A. Provide 5-year warranty under provisions of Section 01770
B Include coverage for installed sealants and accessories which fail to achieve air and water seal and exhibit
loss of adhesion or cohesion or do not cure
WLC/0414200 JOINT SEALERS 07900
(2)
REV 04/05
2 PART 2 PRODUCTS
21 MATERIALS
A Compatibility Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible with one
another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant
manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.
B VOC Content of Interior Sealants Provide interior sealants and sealant primers that comply with the
following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24)
1 Sealants 250 g/L
2 Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates 250 g/L
3 Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates 775 g/L
2 2 MANUFACTURERS
A Manufacturers and their products are listed for each type of sealant Acceptable manufactures include the
following
1 Dow Corning Corp , www dowcornmg com.
2 General Electric Co , www gesealants com
3 Pecora Corp., www pecora com
4 Sika Corp , www.sikausa com.
5 Sonneborn/ChemRex, www chemrex com.
6 Tremco Inc , www tremcosealants com
7 United States Gypsum Co , www usg com.
8 W R Meadows, Inc., www wrmeadows com.
B Substitutions Under provisions of Section 01630
2 3 SEALANTS
A Type A - Acrylic Latex- One-part, non-sag, mildew resistant acrylic emulsion compound complying with
ASTM C834, Type S, Grade NS, formulated to be pamtable
1 Tremco Inc , Acrylic Latex Caulk
2. Pecora Corporation, AC-20.
3 Sonneborn, Chemrex, Sonolac
B Type B - Butyl Sealant One-part, non-sag solvent-release-curing sealant complying with FS TT-S-001657
for Type 1 and formulated with a minimum of 75 percent solids
1 Tremco Inc., Tremco Butyl Sealant
2 Pecora Corporation, BC-158
3 Sonneborn, Chemrex, Multi-Purpose Sealant.
WLC/0414200 JOINT SEALERS 07900
(3)
REV 04/05
C Type C - Silicons Sealant One-part nonacid-curmg sihcone sealant complying with ASTM C920, Type S,
Grade NS, Class 25
1 Dow Corning Corp , Dow Corning 790
2 General Electric Co , Silpruf
3 Tremco, Inc , Spectrum 1
4 Pecora Corp , 864 or 890
5 Sonneborn/Chemrex, Omniseal
D TypeD - Neutral-Curing Sihcone Sealant One part medium modulus neutral-curing silicone sealant
complying with ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25
1 Dow Corning Corp Dow Corning 795
2. General Electric Co , Ultraglaze 4000
3 Tremco, Inc , Spectrum 3
4 Pecora Corp , 895
E Type E - One-Part Mildew-Resistant Sihcone Sealant Complying with ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS,
Class 25.
1. Dow Corning Corp , Dow Corning 786
2 General Electric Co , Sanitary 1700
3 Tremco, Inc , Tremsil'200
4. Pecora Corp , 863 or 898 White
F Type F - Multi-Part Pourable Sealant Complying with ASTM C920, Type M, Grade P, Class 25 Shore A
hardness +40
1 Tremco, Inc , THC900/901
2 Pecora Corp , Dynatred or Urexpan NR-200
3 Sika Corporation, Sikadur S1xNS/NL
4 W R Meadows, Pourthane
24 ACCESSORIES
A Primer Non-stammg type, recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application
B Joint Cleaner Non-corrosive and non-staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer; compatible
with joint forming materials
C Joint Backing ASTM D1056, round, closed cell polyethylene foam rod, oversized 30 to 50 percent larger
than joint width
D Bond Breaker. Pressure sensitive tape recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application
WLC/0414200 JOINT SEALERS 07900
(4)
REV 04/05
3 PART 3 EXECUTION
3 1 EXAMINATION
A Verify that joint openings are ready to receive work and field measurements are as shown on Drawings and
recommended by the manufacturer
B Beginning of installation means installer accepts existing substrate
3 2 PREPARATION
A Clean and prime joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions Prime if recommended by
manufacturer
B Remove loose materials and foreign matter which might impair adhesion of sealant
C Verify that joint backing and release tapes are compatible with sealant
D Perform preparation in accordance with ASTM C1193.
E Protect elements surrounding the work of this Section from damage or disfiguration
3 3 INSTALLATION
A Install sealant in accordance with manufacturer's instructions
B Measure joint dimensions and size materials to achieve required width/depth ratios
C Install joint backing to achieve a neck dimension no greater than 1/3 the joint width
D Install bond breaker where joint backing is not used
E Apply sealant within recommended application temperature ranges Consult manufacturer when sealant
cannot be applied within these temperature ranges.
F Install sealant free of air pockets, foreign embedded matter, ridges, and sags
G Tool joints concave, unless otherwise detailed
3 4 CLEANING AND REPAIRING
A Clean work under provisions of Section 01770
B Clean adjacent soiled surfaces
C Repair or replace defaced or disfigured finishes caused by work of this Section
3 5 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK
A. Protect sealants until cured
36 SCHEDULE
Type Location Color
A Type A - Acrylic All interior joints not otherwise To match adjacent surfaces
Latex Cure scheduled Match plastic laminate at all
casework locations
B Type B - Butyl Under thresholds Black
WLC/0414200 JOINT SEALERS 07900
(5)
REV 04/05
Type Location Color
C Type C - One-Part Exterior door, entrance & window To match adjacent material
Nonacid Curing frames Exterior & Interior vertical
Silicone joints in natural colored concrete and
integral colored masonry and at
prefinished metal flashing
D Type D - Neutral- Joints within glass and glazing Translucent
Curing Silicone
E Type E - Mildew- Interior joints in ceramic tile and at White
Resistant Silicone plumbing fixtures
F Type F - Multi-part Exterior and interior joints in horizontal To match adjacent material
Pourable Urethane surfaces of concrete, between metal
and concrete masonry and mortar
END OF SECTION
WLC/0414200 JOINT SEALERS 07900
(6)
REV 04/05
SECTION 08110
STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES
1 PART 1 GENERAL
1 1 WORK INCLUDED
A Non-rated rolled steel doors and frames
B Interior and exterior light frames
C Louvers
12 REFERENCES
A ANSI A250 8 - Recommended Specification for Standard Steel Doors and Frames.
B ANSI A250 10 - Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Prime Painted Steel Surfaces for Steel Doors
and Frames
C ASTM A653 - Steel Sheet, Zinc Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-
Dip Process
D ASTM A924 - General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot-Dip Process
E CEC - California Energy Commission
F. NFPA 80 - Fire Doors and Windows
G SDI-105 - Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel Frames.
H DHI - Door and Hardware Institute
I CBC - California Building Code, (CCR) California Code of Regulations, Title 24, Part 2 and Part 6
1 3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Conform to requirements of ANSI A250 8
B Installed exterior frame and door assembly to be weather tight
C Manufacturer shall have both fabrication and assembly plant located within the continental United States
or Canada Products that are either fabricated or assembled outside the continental United States or
Canada are not acceptable. '
1 4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A Thermal Performance' Glazed exterior borrowed lite, sidelite and transom lite frames shall have an overall
minimum u-value of 1 19 as rated in accordance with the default table method approved by the California
Energy Commission (CEC) Provide Label Certificate FC-1, Figure 3-3, from the Nonresidential Compliance
Manual documenting compliance with the CBC, California Building Code, (CCR) California Code of
Regulations, Title 24, Part 6, Section 116, Table 116-A
B. Solar Heat Gam Coefficient Glazed exterior borrowed lite, sidelite and transom lite frames shall have an
overall maximum solar heat gam coefficient of 0 83 as rated in accordance with default'table method
approved by the California Energy Commission (CEC). Provide Label Certificate FC-1, Figure 3-3, from the
Nonresidential Compliance Manual documenting compliance with the CBC, California Building Code, (CCR)
California Code of Regulations, Title 24, Part 6, Section 116, Table 116-B
WLC/0414200 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110
(D
REV 04/05
1 5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A Conform to CBC, California Building Code, (CCR) California Code of Regulations, Title 24, Part 2 for fire
rated frames and doors
B Conform to CBC, California Building Code, (CCR) California Code of Regulations, Title 24, Part 6, for u-
value and solar heat gain coefficient
1 6 SUBMITTALS
A Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of Section 01330
B Indicate frame configuration, anchor types and spacmgs, location of cutouts for hardware, reinforcement,
and finish
C Indicate door elevations, internal reinforcement, closure method, and cut outs for glazing and louvers
D Submit two samples of exterior frame profile at mullion intersection.
E Submit Label Certificate FC-1, Figure 3-3, from the Nonresidential Compliance Manual documenting
compliance with the CBC, California Building Code, (CCR) California Code of Regulations, Title 24, Part 6,
Section 116, Table 116-A and 116-B
1 7 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND PROTECTION
A Deliver, store, protect, and handle products under provisions of Section 01600
B Store products on site under cover
C Place products on at least 4 inch wood sills to prevent rust and damage
D Protect doors and frames with resilient packaging.
1 8 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A Sequence work under the provisions of Section 01110
B Schedule work under the provisions of Section 01323
C. Schedule delivery of all doors and frames so as not to delay progress of other trades
2 PART 2 PRODUCTS
2 1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A Amweld Building Products, Inc , www amweld com
B Curries Mfg Inc , www curries com.
C Door Components, Inc , www doorcomponents com.
D Fleming, www flemmgdoor com
E Kneger Steel Products Company, www kriegersteel com
F. Republic Builders Products Corporation, www.repubhcdoor com
G Security Metal Products, www secmet com.
H Steelcraft, www steelcraft com.
I Stiles Custom Metal, Inc , www.hollowmetal com
WLC/0414200 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110
(2)
REV 04/05
J Titan Metal Products, Inc , www titanmetalproducts com.
K Substitutions Under provisions of Section 01630
2 2 DOORS AND FRAMES
A Steel Commercial quality cold rolled steel conforming to ASTM A653 galvanized to A60 or G60 coating
class or Type B, A40 (ZF120) according to ASTM A924 with minimized spangle, mill phosphatized
B Exterior Doors ANSI A250 8, Level 3, extra heavy-duty, Model 2, continuous welded seam, minimum
0 053 inch thick faces
C Interior Doors. ANSI A250 8, Level 2 heavy duty, Model 1, minimum 0.042 inch thick faces
D Exterior Frames ANSI A250 8, Level 3, 0 067 inch thick material, core thickness
E Interior Frames ANSI A250 8, Level 2, 0 053 inch thick material, core thickness
2 3 DOOR CORE
A Exterior Core Polystyrene insulation
B Interior Door Core- Impregnated cardboard honeycomb
24 ACCESSORIES
A Louvers Roll formed steel, prime coated, inverted V blade, sightproof, with countersink, tamperproof
fasteners v
B Rubber Silencers: Resilient rubber as supplied by Section 08710
C Glazing Stops Rolled steel channel shape, mitered corners, prepared for countersink style tamperproof
screws at door installations, square butt at light frames
25 FRAME ANCHORS
A Masonry Anchors Adjustable T-strap, 0 053 inch thick steel, corrugated, 2 inch x 10 inch size
B Wood Stud Anchor U shaped anchor, welded to frame, 1 inch wide, 0 053 inch thick steel, with 2 pre-
punched holes in nailing flange
C Floor Clip. Angle anchor, full width of frame, 0.067 inch thick steel
26 PROTECTIVE COATINGS
A Bituminous Coating Fibered asphalt-based corrosion proofing and sound deadener compound Equivalent
to Transcoat 101-F, www oilservice com
B Primer Clean and treat with three stage iron phosphate process. Provide baked-on shop coat of EPA
compliant gray synthetic rust - inhibitive enamel primer meeting acceptance criteria of ANSI 250 10
2.7 HARDWARE REINFORCEMENT
A Fabricate frames and doors with hardware reinforcement plates welded in place
B Hinge reinforcing shall be full width of frame profile
C Provide spacers for all thru-bolted hardware
D Reinforcement components shall be the following minimum thickness
1. Hinge (door and frame) 3/16 inch
WLC/0414200 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110
(3)
REV 04/05
2 Mortise Lock or Deadbolt 0 093 inch
3 Bored Lock or Deadbolt 0 093 inch
4 Flush Bolt Front 0 093 inch
5 Surface Bolt 0 093 inch
6 Surface Applied Closer 0 093 inch
7 Hold Open Arm 0 093 inch
8 Pull Plates and Bars 0 067 inch
9 Surface Exit Device 0 093 inch
10 Floor Checking Hinge 0 167 inch
11 Pivot Hinge 0 167 inch
2 8 FABRICATION
A When shipping limitations so dictate, frames for large openings shall be fabricated in sections designed for
splicing
B All spliced joints shall occur on the interior side of exterior frames
C Fabricate frames as full profile welded units.
D All face, rabbet and soffit joints between abutting members shall be continuously welded and finished
smooth when exposed to exterior
E Corner joints shall have all contact edges closed tight, with faces mitered and continuously welded
F Frames with multiple openings shall have mullion members fabricated with no visible seams or joints All
face, rabbet and soffit joints between abutted members shall be continuously welded and finished smooth
when exposed to exterior
G Provide 3/8 inch back bend return on frames where gypsum board wall material occurs whether on one or
both sides
H Dust cover boxes or mortar guards of 0 016 inch thick steel shall be provided at all hardware mortises on
frames
I Reinforce frames wider than 48 inches with roll formed, 0 093 inch thick steel channels fitted tightly and
welded into frame head, inverted U-shape profile
J. Prepare frame for silencers except for frames which receive weatherstnppmg Provide three single rubber
silencers for single doors on strike side, and two single silencers on frame head at double doors without
mullions
K Provide steel spreader temporarily attached to feet of both jambs as a brace during shipping and handling
Spreader is not to be used for installation purposes
L Close top edge of exterior door flush with inverted steel channel closure. Weld all joints watertight
WLC/0414200 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110
(4)
REV 04/05
2 9 MANUFACTURING TOLERANCE
A Manufacturing tolerance shall be maintained within the following limits
1 Frame width +1/16 inch-1/32 inch
2. Frame height +-3/64 inch
3 Frame face +-1/32 inch
4 Frame stop +-1/32 inch
5 Frame rabbet +-1/64 inch
6 Frame depth +-1/32 inch
7 Frame throat +-1/16mch
8 Door width and height +-3/64 inch
9 Door thickness +-1/16mch
10 Hardware location +-1/32 inch
11 Door flatness +-1/16 inch
210 FINISH
A Primer: Baked on rust-mhibitive enamel.
B Finish Site paint under provisions of Section 09900
C Coat inside of all frames with bituminous coating to a thickness of 1 /16 inch Coating may be factory or site
applied
3 PARTS EXECUTION
3 1 INSTALLATION
A Install frames in accordance with SDI-105
B Install doors in accordance with DHI
C. Installation of exterior doors and frames to be weathertight and waterproof
D Seal penetration of all surface applied screws on exterior face of frames at glass stops and hardware
attachments
E Coordinate with wall construction and details for anchor placement. Provide anchors as follows
1. Frames up to 7'-6" height - 4 anchors each jamb
2 Frames 7'-6" to 8'-0" height - 5 anchors each jamb Plus an additional anchor for each 2' or fraction
thereof over 8'-0"
3 Frames for double doors, minimum of 2 anchors in head approximately 12 inches from each jamb
4 Borrowed lite frames; 2 anchors each jamb plus 1 for each 18 inches or fraction thereof over 3'-0"
Minimum 2 anchors in head and sill approximately 12 inches from each jamb plus 1 for each 30 inches
of length or fraction thereof
5. Floor anchors-1 anchor each jamb for interior doors Where wall construction will not allow placement
of floor anchor, provide one additional jamb anchor as close to floor as possible
WLC/0414200 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110
(5)
REV 04/05
F. Frames installed in masonry walls to be fully grouted with masonry grout
G Exposed field welds to be finished smooth and touched up
H Primed or painted surfaces which are scratched or marred shall be touched up.
I Hardware to be applied in accordance with hardware manufacturer's templates and instructions
J Coordinate installation of glass and glazing
K Install door louvers.
3 2 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES
A Edge clearance for swinging doors shall not exceed the following
1 Between door and frame at head and jamb 1/8 inch
2 Between edge of pair of doors 1/8 inch
3 At door sill with threshold (From bottom of door to top of threshold) 3/8 inch
4 At door sill with no threshold 1/2 inch
5 At door bottom and rigid floor covering per NFPA 80 1/2 inch
6. At door bottom and nominal floor covering per NFPA 80 5/8 inch
B Frame installation tolerance shall not exceed the following
1. Squareness +-1/16mch
2 Alignment +-1/16mch
3 Plumbness +-1/16mch
4 Diagonal Distortion +-1/32 inch
END OF SECTION
WLC/0414200 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110
(6)
REV 04/05
SECTION 08214
PLASTIC FACED WOOD DOORS
1. PART1 GENERAL
1 1 SECTION INCLUDES
A Plastic faced wood doors
B Door louvers.
12 REFERENCES
A CBC - California Building Code, (CCR) California Code of Regulations, Title 24, Part 2.
B NFPA 80 - Fire Doors and Windows
C NEMA LD-3 - High Pressure Decorative Laminates
D Wl - Manual of Millwork
1 3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A Conform to requirements of Wl Manual of Millwork, Section 12, [Cistom] [Premium] Grade
B All plastic faced wood doors and their installation shall be monitored for compliance under the scope of the
Wl Certified Compliance Program (CCP)
C Issue a Wl Certified Compliance Certificate prior to delivery of doors certifying that doors meet all
requirements of Wl Grade specified
D After completion, issue a Wl Certified Compliance Certificate for Installation
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A Submit shop drawings under provisions of Section 01330. Shop drawings shall bear the Wl Certified
Compliance Label on the first page of each set.
B Indicate door elevations, stile and rail reinforcement, internal blocking for hardware attachment, and cutouts
for glazing and louvers.
C Submit samples under provisions of Section 01330
D Submit two samples 12x12 inch in size illustrating color, finish, and texture
E Submit manufacturer's installation instructions under provisions of Section 01330.
1 5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION
A Protect products under provisions of Section 01600
B Package, deliver, and store doors in accordance with Wl requirements as set forth in Technical
Bulletin 419-R
1.6 WARRANTY
A Provide manufacturer's standard lifetime warranty under provisions of Section 01770
WLC/0414200 PLASTIC FACED WOOD DOORS 08214
(1)
REV 06/04
2 PART 2 PRODUCTS
2 1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A Buell Door Co., www buelldoor com
B Eggers Industries, www eggersindustnes com
C Oskosh Door Co , www oshkoshdoor com
D Marshfield Door Systems, Inc , www marshfield com
E V T Industries, www vtmdustnes com
F Substitutions Under provisions of Section 01630
22 DOOR CONSTRUCTION
A Core. Solid wood block, framed block glued, or solid particle board
B Vertical Edge Plastic laminate same as door facing
2 3 FACING
A Plastic Laminate NEMA LD-3, special purpose type, 0 125 inch thick, color and finish selected from the
entire range of colors and patterns available in the Formica Laminate Series
24 ADHESIVES
A Wl Type I
25 ACCESSORIES
A Louvers Roll formed 20 gage galvanized steel, factory primed, inverted 'V slat blade; sightproof
B Glass Stops Rolled metal
2 6 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate doors in accordance with Wl Manual of Millwork, Section 12.
B Premachine doors for finish hardware.
3 PART 3 EXECUTION
31 INSTALLATION
A Install doors in accordance with Wl Manual of Millwork, Section 12, and Wl Technical Bulletin 420-R
B Conform to Wl and NFPA requirements for fit tolerances.
C Coordinate installation of glass and glazing
D Install door louvers.
E Adjust doors for smooth and balanced movement
3 2 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES
A. Edge clearance for swinging doors shall not exceed the following as required by Wl and NFPA 80
1 Between door and frame at head and jamb 1/8 inch
WLC/0414200 PLASTIC FACED WOOD DOORS 08214
(2)
REV 06/04
2 Between edge of pair of doors 1/8 inch
3 Diagonal distortion 1/8 inch
4 At door sill with threshold (From bottom of door to top of threshold) 3/8 inch
5 At door sill with no threshold 1/2 inch
6 At door bottom and rigid floor covering per NFPA 80 1/2 inch
7 At door bottom and nominal floor covering per NFPA 80 5/8 inch
END OF SECTION
WLC/0414200 PLASTIC FACED WOOD DOORS 08214
(3)
REV 06/04
SECTION 08360
SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS
1 PART 1 GENERAL
1 1 SECTION INCLUDES
A Electrically operated overhead sectional doors.
B Operating hardware, controls, and supports.
1 2 REFERENCES
A. ANSI/NAGDM 102 - Sectional Overhead Type Door (NAGDM 102)
B NEMA MG 1 - Motors and Generators
C. ANSI/NFPA70 - National Electrical Code
D ASTM E330 - Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls and Doors by Uniform Static Air
Pressure Difference
E. UBC - Uniform Building Code.
F NAAMM - National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers
G UL - Underwriters Laboratories.
1 3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ,i \
A Panels: Stile and rail aluminum with infill panels of glass and aluminum.
B High lift operating style with track and hardware
C. Operation Electrically operated with manual chain hoist.
D Design and size components to withstand dead and live loads caused by pressure and suction of wind
acting normal to plane of wall as calculated in accordance with 1991 UBC to a design pressure of 24 Ib/sq
ft as measured in accordance with ANSI/ASTM E330.
1 4 SUBMITTALS
A Submit under provisions of Section 01330.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate opening dimensions and required tolerances, connection details, control stations,
anchorage spacing, hardware locations, and installation details.
C. Product Data' Provide component construction, anchorage method, and hardware
D. Samples Submit two (2) 4 inch x 4 inch samples of each of the following, illustrating color and finish
1. Stile and rails
2. Aluminum panels.
3 Glass panels
E Manufacturer's Installation Instructions1 Indicate special procedures and perimeter conditions requiring
special attention
F. Submit calculations signed and prepared by a certified structural engineer, licensed in the State of
California, verifying wind load requirements
1 5 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A. Submit under provisions of Section 01770
B. Operation Data Include electrical and manual control adjustments
WLC/0414200 SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS 08360
9/90 , (1)
C Maintenance Data Include data for motor and transmission, shaft and gearing, lubrication frequency, spare
part sources
1 6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A Perform Work in accordance with ANSI/NAGDM 102 Application Type Industrial
1 7 QUALIFICATIONS
A Manufacturer Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum
20 years documented experience
B Installer: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum 5 years documented
experience and approved by manufacturer.
1.8 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A Conform to applicable NEC code for motor and motor control requirements.
B. Products Requiring Electrical Connection Listed and classified by Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc , as
suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.
1.9 WARRANTY
A Provide one year warranty under provisions of Section 01770
B Warranty Include coverage for electric motor and transmission.
2 PART 2 PRODUCTS
2 1 MANUFACTURERS
A Finishlme Industries, (800) 523-5836, Model No 450 HD
B Overhead Door Corporation, (800) 275-3290; Model No 520.
C Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01630.
2 2 DOOR MATERIALS
A. Door Section Framing Horizontal top and bottom rails and end and intermediate vertical stiles shall be
extruded aluminum, 6063-T5 alloy with specified finish.
B Door Section Panels- Sheet aluminum, 0 050 inch minimum thickness with specified finish All edges fitted
with vinyl edge moldings
C. Glass shall be 3/16 inch thick, tempered safety plate Match tint of tempered tinted glazing specified in
Section 08800. Furnish and install all door glazing at the door factory.
D. Weatherstnppmg.
1 Provide a safety edge along the bottom surface of the bottom horizontal rail of the bottom door section
for the full door width, electrically interconnected to the door control L panel. Safety edge, with black
and yellow vinyl jacket as manufactured by Tech Strip Sales, (800) 874-4052
2.3 DOOR HARDWARE
A Counterbalance assembly shall consist of the following
1 Use a minimum of two helically wound oil tempered steel torsion springs each having a certified .
50,000 life cycle mounted on a solid steel crossheader shaft of size indicated on the approved shop
drawings and provided with an inside or outside steel sleeve to prevent deflection or distortion during
the door opening and/or closing action.
2 Cast cable drums attached to each end of the crossheader shaft for which 3/16 inch diameter
galvanized aircraft type cables will be attached and wind up on.
3 Crossheader shaft shall be provided with attached grease fitting ball bearing end and intermediate
support brackets for attachment to the structure to prevent flexing and vibration of the shaft assembly
WLC/0414200 SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS 08360
9/90 (2)
B Cradle type cable brackets shall be provided and bolted to both ends of the bottom horizontal rail and to
the end vertical stiles of the bottom door section, on the inside face of the door section to which lift cables
will be attached
C. Track Rollers Heavy duty steel tire type sized to roll within a 3 inch wide door track, provide with ball
bearings in case-hardened inner and outer steel races and secured to a minimum 7/16 inch diameter steel
shaft fitted into an extruded aluminum bracket for attachment to the inside face of each of the door sections
end stiles
D Tracks
1 Vertical Tracks Minimum 3 inch wide x minimum 12 gage galvanized steel with continuous and
slotted angle brackets for attachment to steel door jambs and with provision for end attachment to the
front end of the horizontal tracks
2. Horizontal Tracks: Same size, shape and material as the vertical tracks, reinforced with steel angle
to provide the required rigidity and stability when the doors are fully opened in a horizontal position
and shall be provided with spring type bumpers at the end of the track.
E. Hinges Heavy duty piano type of 14 gage steel, 3 inch wide with 1/2 inch offset and with fixed 3/16 inch
steel pin Attach hinges to the inside face of the door section rails and to the end and intermediate vertical
stiles with rust proof or galvanized steel pop-rivets or with through bolts (accessible from the inside of the
building).
2 4 DOOR CONSTRUCTION
A General Door assemblies shall consist of seven door sections high of frame and recessed panel
construction, designed to withstand minimum air and wind pressures of 24 Ibs per sq. ft. of door surface
when doors are in the closed position and shall not deflect more than 1/120 of the door width when doors
are fully open in the horizontal position Door sections shall contain aluminum and glass panels as
indicated on the Drawings
B Framing for door sections. Vertical stiles and horizontal rails shall be of extruded aluminum shapes
integrally reinforced for strength and rigidity and shall have a minimum wall thickness of 090 inch, the top
and bottom horizontal rails and the two end vertical stiles shall be 3-1/2 inches wide x 1-3/4 inches thick
The three intermediate vertical stiles (muntms) shall be 2-3/4 inches wide x 1-3/4 inches thick. The
combined width of meeting rails shall be 2-3/4 inches wide x 1 -3/4 inches thick. Intermediate meeting rails
to have a .130 stiffener the entire width of the rail and contain a .050 aluminum channel on both ends of all
sections Intermediate sections shall be joined together with double hinges on both ends of all sections
1 Top and bottom horizontal rail edges of the door sections shall be rabbetted to provide for weathertight
joining of the door sections
2 Join rail and stiles together using 5/16 inch diameter through bolts with nuts and lock washers
(accessible from the inside of the building) as per manufacturer's standard
3. Reinforce the bottom rail of each of the 7 door sections as necessary to prevent any sag or deflection
in excess of the limits specified in Article 2.4, Item A, with an extruded aluminum strut bolted to the
integral strut on the rail section, the full door section width as indicated on the approved shop
drawings
C. Recessed aluminum and glass panels shall be secured in place from the interior side of the door in plumb
and aligned position within the door section rail and stile framing and be attached in place with snap-m-
place extruded aluminum glazing moldings so that the vertical exposed face of the molding will be flush with
the face of the door section framing
D Safety Edge shall be attached to the bottom horizontal rail of the bottom door section for the full door width
as specified in Article 2.5, Item D.
2 5 ELECTRICAL DOOR OPERATOR
A Operator. Heavy duty, to be jack shaft type, equivalent to Overhead Door Model JST for universal right
and/or left side mounting, U L. listed Operator shall be of design to operate the door(s) at a speed of 1 foot
per second, and to include disconnect switches reversing combination starter stations, 120/24 volt control
transformer, field wiring, photo cell, etc.
B Motor High torque heavy duty type, 1/2 HP, 120 volt, 60 hz, AC, single phase with instant reversing
provisions and automatic overload disconnect for current orthermal overload protection. Provide and mount
conductors and other operator controls separately in the dooroperator control panel in accordance with the
drawings. All doors shall be on emergency power.
WLC/0414200 SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS 08360
9/90 (3)
C Door Operator Controls.
1 Heavy duty drive limits.
2 Adjustable friction clutch.
3 Heavy duty reversing magnetic starter and/or controller NEMA Type O, 120 volt, 60 Hz, AC, for
operator motor
4 Remote Transmitter and Receiver
(a) Equivalent to Linear Model DRQ
(b) The transmitter shall be equivalent to Linear Model DT with four buttons. The buttons on each
transmitter should operate the front and rear doors of a single apparatus bay Verify
compatibility of transmitter with automatic gate controller specified in Section 02826.
(c) Provide a total of 20 transmitters
5. Control Stations
(a) At each door location, provide manufacturer's standard three-button control station in flush
mounted NEMA 1 enclosure Locate as indicated on the drawings
D Safety edge Electrically connected to a double pole double throw switch which will instantly reverse the
closing action of the door and return it to the fully open horizontal position when the safety edge contacts
an object before the door reaches its fully closed vertical position.
E Loop Detector Designed to recycle timer if door is open, reverse door if door is in downward travel
Recess detectors in concrete slab as indicated on the drawings Sawcuttmg for detector is not allowed
Manufacturer. Detector Systems, Inc
F Photo Eye- One at each door, designed to recycle timer if door is open, reverse door if door is in downward
travel.
2 6 EMERGENCY MANUAL OPERATOR
A. Required To open and close the door easily and smoothly within a maximum time limit of 1-1/2 minutes
by hand operation of a chain hoist in case of power failure.
B Cham Hoist Operator Electrically and mechanically inter-locked to the door operator and the
counterbalance assembly The chain shall be a heavy duty cadmium plated continuous lock link type sized
for comfortable and easy hand grip and shall be provided with guards to prevent chain from disengaging
the gear sprockets
2.7 FINISH
A Interior and Exterior Aluminum Surfaces: NAAMM AA-M12-C22-R1X, Kynar/Hylar based fluoropolymer
Custom colors as selected by Architect. Stiles, rails, muntms and meeting rails will be a different color than
the aluminum infill panels
B Non-galvanized Steel Components: Rust-mhibitive primer except on track where in contact with rollers
3. PART 3 EXECUTION
31 EXAMINATION
/
A Verify that wall openings are ready to receive work and opening dimensions and tolerances are within
specified limits
B Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing surfaces.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A General' Complete assembly and installation of the doors, tracks, electrical and manual operators,
counterbalance assembly, with all controls all properly hooked up Properly connect all electrical
components and place into smooth, working order in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions, and
shop drawings, meeting the approval and acceptance of the Architect.
WLC/0414200 SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS 08360
9/90 (4)
B Tracks:
1. Vertical Tracks Slightly taper mounted and aligned with the door jambs as necessary to provide a
wedge type closing action of the door and shall be secured by the bracketing of the continuous angle
(on the track) to the steel door jamb member with 5/16 inch steel bolts set in tapped and .threaded
holes in the steel door jamb members or as otherwise indicated on the shop drawings
2 Horizontal Tracks Shall be end connected to the top end of the vertical tracks to provide continuous
run of the rollers and shall be slightly inclined approximately 8 inches in 12 feet to accommodate the
side mounting of the "Jack Shaft" operator and shall be supported from the structure above im
accordance with manufacturer's requirements
3 Both vertical and especially the horizontal tracks shall be laterally braced as necessary to prevent side
sway either way and deflection caused by the door movement up and/or down by means of bracing
angles or other devices as required. All bracing to be approved by the Architect.
C The counterbalance assembly shall be secured in a horizontal level position to the door opening head
section of the interior side of the building in four places as indicated on the shop drawings and shall be
interconnected to the door operator and chain hoist and the hoist cables
D The electric door operator (with attached manual chain hoist) Mount to the side of the door and interlock
with the counterbalance assembly and secure to the inside face of the building wall at height recommended
by the door manufacturer and approved by the Architect Door operator shall be electrically interconnected
to the following specified controls:
1 The control stations shall be wall mounted at a height 44 inches above the floor (center of unit) and
be located where indicated on the Drawings and electrically hooked-up to the power source.
2 The Safety Edge shall be secured full door width to the bottom horizontal rail of the bottom door
section and shall be electrically connected to each of the control stations.
3 Loop Detector shall be installed so that any movement of equipment will be detected in sufficient time
before any contact of door
E The manually operated chain hoist shall be securely interconnected to the counterbalance assembly and
the side mounted door operator and shall hang to be within reach 5 feet from the floor and not be more than
12 inches out from the wall surface
The doors shall be completely assembled with all door sections hinged together with attached rollers,
bumpers, weatherstnppmg, Safety Edge and cable attached to the counterbalance assembly and the door
operator. Doors shall be hung plumb, aligned, straight, true and balanced to operate smoothly on the
vertical and horizontal tracks, and when in the closed vertical position, provide a positive weathertightseal.
F Operation of Doors
1. Individually electrically operated to open and close the doors by means of permanent push button
stations as specified herein.
2 Emergency reversing the closing action of the door shall be initiated by the specified Safety Edge,
Photo Eye, and the Loop Detector specified herein.
3 Emergency manual opening and closing of the doors in case of power failure shall be by the manual
operation of a continuous chain hoist.
G Coordinate installation of electrical service Complete power and control wiring from disconnect to unit
components
33 TOLERANCES
A Maintain dimensional tolerances and alignment with adjacent work.
3 4 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES
A Prepare and start systems under provisions of Section 01450
B Ensure the operation and adjustments to door assembly for smooth operation.
35 ADJUSTING
A Adjust work under provisions of Section 01770
WLC/0414200 SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS 08360
9/90 (5)
B As a result of all testing, the door and the operator manufacturer shall make all necessary adjustments to
provide safe, rapid and smooth operation of the doors in accordance with the requirements of these
specifications to the full satisfaction and approval of the Architect and the Fire Department
3.6 CLEANING
A Clean work under provisions of 01770
B. Clean doors, frames and glass
C Remove labels and visible markings.
3 7 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK
A Protect finished Work under provisions of Section 01600
B Do not permit construction traffic through overhead door openings after adjustment and cleaning
END OF SECTION
WLC/041420Q SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS 08360
9/90 (6)
SECTION 08520
ALUMINUM WINDOWS
1 PART1 GENERAL
1 1 SECTION INCLUDES
A Extruded aluminum windows with fixed and operating sash.
B Glass and glazing
C Operating hardware and insect screens
D Perimeter sealant
12 REFERENCES v
A AAMA 101 - Voluntary Specifications for Aluminum Prime Windows and Sliding Glass Door.
B ASTM B221 - Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bar, Rod, Wire, Shape, and Tube.
C ASTM E283 - Rate of Air Leakage through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors
D ASTM E330 - Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors by Uniform Static Air
Pressure Difference.
E ASTM E331 - Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors by Uniform Static Air
Pressure Difference v
F ASTM E547 - Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors by Cyclic Static Air
Pressure Differential
G CBC - California Building Code, (CCR) - California Code of Regulations, Title 24, Part 6
H CEC - California Energy Commission
I FS RR-W-365A - Wire Fabric (Insect Screening).
J. NFRC - National Fenestration Rating Council.
K NAAMM - National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers.
1 3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS )
A. Comply with air infiltration, water penetration and structural performance requirements indicated in
AAMA 101 for the type, grade and performance class of window units required
B. Provide current certified AAMA test report that reflects the window configuration and type specified.
C Test each type and size of required window unit through a recognized testing laboratory or agency, in
accordance with ASTM E330 for structural performance, with ASTM E283 for air infiltration and with both
ASTM E331 and ASTM E547 for water penetration Provide certified test results
D. Thermal Performance Overall U-value of .63 as rated in accordance with the National Fenestration Rating
Councils' (NFRC) 100 Rating Procedure or in accordance with default table method approved by the
•~ California Energy Commission (CEC). Provide certified test results.
E Air Leakage" Infiltration rates shall not exceed 0 3 cfm/ft squared of window area when tested according
to The National Fenestration Rating Councils' (NFRC) 400 Rating Procedure or ASTM E283 at a pressure
differential of 1 57 pounds/ft squared Provide certified test results
WLC/0414200 ~m ALUMINUM WINDOWS 08520
(D
REV 04/05
F Solar Heat Gain Coefficient (SHGC) The SHGC Shall be rated in accordance with The National
Fenestration Rating Councils' (NFRC) 200 Rating Procedure or in accordance with the default table method
approved by the California Energy Commission (CEC) Provide certified test results
1 4 SUBMITTALS ,
A Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of 01330
B Include wall opening and component dimensions; wall opening tolerances required, anchorage and
fasteners, affected related work, installation requirements
C. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions under provisions of 01330
D Submit samples under provisions of 01330
E Submit two samples 12x12 inches in size illustrating window frame sections, corner section, mullion
section, and screen and frame
F Submit two samples of operating hardware
G. Submit manufacturer's certificate under provisions of 01330 that window units meet or exceed specified
requirements
1 5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A Label to be permanently affixed to frame listing certified U-value, certifying organization and rating
procedure
B Label to be temporarily affixed to frame certifying that U-value, SHGC, and air infiltration requirements of
California Building Code (CBC), California Code of Regulations (CCR), Title 24, Part 6, Section 116 have
been met
1 6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A Deliver, store and protect window units under provisions of 01600
B. Provide wrapping or stnppable coating to protect prefmished aluminum surfaces
1 7 WARRANTY
s A Provide five year manufacturer's warranty under provisions of Section 01770
B. Manufacturers Warranty. Include coverage for materials and finish
2 PART 2 PRODUCTS
2 1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Horizontal Sliding Windows: HS-HC40 type, grade, and performance class
1 EFCO Corporation, 3500 Series, www.efcocorp.com
2 Graham Architectural Products, 200 Series, www.grahamarch.com.
3 Modulme Window Systems, 54P Series, www vistawall com
4 TRACO, 6800 Series, www traco.com
B. Substitutions'Under provisions of 01630
WLC/0414200 ALUMINUM WINDOWS 08520
(2)
REV 04/05
2 2 MATERIALS
A Extruded Aluminum ASTM B221, 6063 alloy, T5 or T6 temper
2 3 FABRICATED COMPONENTS
A Frames Nominal 2 inches wide x 4 inches deep profile, of non- thermally broken, flush glass stops of snap-
on type with capped sill ends
B Horizontal Sliding Window Sash verticals to telescope into sash horizontals, corners to be of screw spline
construction Aluminum extrusion wall thickness for frame sections, 0.062 inch, sill, 0 094 inch Locking
device, Continuous interlock at meeting rail.
C Insect Screens FSRR-W-365A, Type VIII, woven aluminum mesh, 16/18 mesh size, fitted taught in tubular
aluminum frame. Miter and reinforce frame corners, provide with manufacturer's standard retainer.
D Operable Sash Weatherstrippmg- Window manufacturers standard, permanently resilient, profiled to effect
weatherseal
E Operable Sash Hardware Corrosion resistant, pivot bearings, positive position stop.
F Fasteners Stainless steel
2 4 GLASS AND GLAZING MATERIALS
A Glass and Glazing Materials Specified in 08800
25 SEALANT MATERIALS
A Sealant and Backing Material As specified in Section 07900
2 6 FABRICATION
A Fabricate windows allowing for minimum installation clearances and shim spacing around perimeter of
assembly, yet enabling installation
B Rigidly fit joints and corners. Accurately fit and secure corners tight Make corner joints flush, hairline, and
weatherproof. Seal corner joints with sealant
C Develop drainage holes with moisture pattern to exterior
D Prepare components to receive anchor devices. Fabricate anchorage items
E Prepare components with internal reinforcement for operating hardware
F Provide internal reinforcement in mulhons to maintain rigidity.
G Shop glaze window units in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
27 FINISHES
A Organic Colored Finish. NAAMM AA-M12-C42-R1X Kynar/Hylar based fluoropolymer in custom color as
selected by Architect. >
B Apply one coat of bituminous paint to concealed aluminum and steel surfaces in contact with cementitious
or dissimilar materials
WLC/0414200 ALUMINUM WINDOWS 08520
(3)
REV 04/05
3 PARTS EXECUTION
3 1 INSPECTION
A Verify, wall openings are ready to receive work of this Section
B Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions
3 2 INSTALLATION
A Install window frames, glass, glazing, and hardware in accordance with manufacturer's instructions
B Use anchorage devices to securely attach frame to structure
C Align window frame plumb and level, free of warp or twist. Maintain dimensional tolerances, aligning with
adjacent work
D Pack fibrous insulation in shim spaces at perimeter to maintain continuity of thermal barrier
/
E Install sealant and backing materials as specified in 07900
F Adjust operable hardware for smooth operation and tight fit of sash
3.3 CLEANING
A Remove protective material from prefmished aluminum surfaces.
B Wash down exposed surfaces using a solution of mild detergent in warm water Rinse with clean water, and
wipe dry with soft, clean wiping cloths Take care to remove dirt from corners. Wipe surfaces clean
C Remove excess sealant by moderate use of mineral spirits or other solvent acceptable to sealant
manufacturer
END OF SECTION
WLC/0414200 ALUMINUM WINDOWS 08520
(4)
REV 04/05
SECTION 08710
DOOR HARDWARE
1 PART1 GENERAL
1 1 SECTION INCLUDES
A Hardware for doors
B. Thresholds
C. Gasketting
D Keying and key cabinet
1 2 REFERENCES
A ADAAG - Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities
B. BHMA - Builders' Hardware Manufacturers Association
C CBC - California Building Code, (CCR) California Code of Regulations, Title 24, Part 2, California State
Accessibility Standards
D DHI - Door and Hardware Institute.
1 3 COORDINATION
A Coordinate work of this Section with other directly affected Sections involving manufacturer of any internal
reinforcement for door hardware.
1 4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A Manufacturers. Companies specializing in manufacturing door hardware with minimum five years
experience Obtain each kind of hardware from only one manufacturer.
B Hardware Supplier Company specializing in supplying commercial door hardware with five years
documented experience.
C Hardware Installer Company specializing in the installation of commencal door hardware with five years
documented experience.
D. Hardware Supplier Personnel. Employ an Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC) to assist in the work
of this Section.
1.5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A Conform to CBC - California Building Code, (CCR) California Code of Regulations, Title 24, Part 2, and
ADAAG for accessibility requirements.
B Exit Doors' Openable at all times from the inside without the use of a key or any special knowledge or effort
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A Submit schedule under provisions ofSection 01330
B. Submit schedule at earliest possible date along with essential product data where acceptance of hardware
schedule must precede fabrication of other work
WLC/0414200 DOOR HARDWARE 08710
(1)
REV 01/05
C Organize hardware schedule into "hardware sets" indicating complete designations of every item required
for each door or opening Include the following
1 Type, style, function, size and finish of each hardware item
2 Name and manufacturer of each item.
3 Fastenings and other pertinent information
4 Location of hardware set cross-referenced to indications on Drawings both on floor plans and in door
and frame schedule
5 Explanation of all abbreviations, symbols, codes, etc , contained in schedule
6 Mounting locations for hardware
7 Door and frame sizes and materials
D Provide product data on specified hardware
E Keying Schedule Submit separate detailed schedule indicating clearly how the Owner's final instructions
on keying of locks has been fulfilled
F Furnish hardware templates to each fabricator of doors, frames, and other work to be factory-prepared for
the installation of hardware
1 7 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A Submit operation and maintenance data under provisions of Section 01770
B. Include data on operating hardware, lubrication requirements, and inspection procedures related to
preventative maintenance
1 8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A Deliver products to site and to other Sections under provisions of Section 01600
B Store and protect products under provisions of Section 01600
C Package hardware items individually; label and identify package with door opening code to match hardware
schedule
D Deliver keys to Owner by security shipment direct from hardware supplier.
1 9 WARRANTY
A Provide five year warranty for closers, two year warranty for all other hardware under provisions of
Section 01770.
1.10 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS
A. Provide special wrenches and tools applicable to each different or special hardware component
B Provide maintenance tools and accessories supplied by hardware component manufacturer.
WLC/0414200 DOOR HARDWARE 08710
(2)
REV 01/05
Manufacturer
Stanley
Markar
Schlage
Tnmco
Von Duprm
Norton
Simplex
Tnmco
Trimco
Tnmco
Glynn Johnson
Pemko
Pemko
Lund
Bommer
Acceptable Substitute
McKmney
McKmney
As specified
Hager
Precision
LCN
v As specified
Hager
Hager
Hager
Rixson
Reese
Reese
Telkee
1 McKmney
Hager
Hager
Best
Ives
Yale
Ives
Ives
Ives
ABH
NGP
NGP
KCS
Hager
2 PART2 PRODUCTS
2 1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
Item
A Hinges
B Continuous Hinges
C. Locks
D Pulls
E Exit Devices
F Surface Closers
\
G. Pushbutton Locks
H Auto Flush Bolts
I Silencers
J. Stops and Holders
K. Overhead Stops
L Seals and Bottoms
M Thresholds
N Key Cabinets
O Gate Pivots
P Protection Plates As Specified in Section 05500
2 2 MATERIALS
A Locksets Mortise type. 16 gage steel stnkebox, bronze or brass strikes with 2 inch deep box construction,
with lips of sufficient length to clear trim and protect clothing
1. Locks. Minimum 3/4 inch throw Dead bolts 1 inch minimum throw
2. Comply with requirements of local security ordinances
3 Locks shall be of such construction that when locked, the door may be opened from within by using
lever and without the use of a key or special knowledge
4. Lock series and design- Schlage L Senes-03A Lever.
B. Floor Hinges. Shall have maximum degree dead stop permitted by trim of adjacent structure Furnish
special pins and longer spindles as may be required
C. Hinges1 Outswmgmg exterior doors shall have non-removable (NRP) pin All hinge open widths shall be
minimum, but of sufficient size to permit door to swing 180 degrees Furnish hinges with stainless steel pins
and ball bearings
1 Furnish 3 hinges per leaf to 7'-5" height. Add one for each additional 2 foot height.
2. Exterior hinges with prime finish shall have Stanley K base.
3 Size listed in Hardware Sets indicates height x width.
4 Provide extra heavy weight hinges on doors over 3'-4" width.
WLC/0414200 DOOR HARDWARE 08710
(3)
REV 01/05
D Panic Hardware Furnish all sets at wood doors with sex bolts Lever handle trim shall match iocksets All
touch bar type devices shall have deadlocking latch bolt, and be non-handed. The authority having
jurisdiction may increase the maximum effort to operate fire doors to achieve positive latching, but not to
exceed 15 Ibs maximum pressure Maximum effort to release device on non fire rated door shall not exceed
5 Ibs. for exterior doors and 5 Ibs for interior doors When the latched door is subjected to a horizontal force
of 250 Ibs applied against the latching edge adjacent to the latch in the direction in which the door opens
a force of 15 Ibs or less shall actuate the release bar Device shall bear UL label for fire and or panic as may
be required
E Surface Door Closers. Full rack and pinion type with removable non-ferrous case Provide sex bolts and
grommets at all wood doors Place closers inside building, stairs, rooms, etc Closers shall be non-handed,
non-sized and adjustable Closers shall be installed to permit door to swing 180 degrees.
1 Provide size 2 through 6 unless otherwise specified at exterior and interior fire rated doors
2 Provide size 1 through 4 at interior non-rated doors.
3 Flush transom offset brackets shall be used where parallel arm closers are listed for doors with fixed
panels over
4 Drop bracket are required at narrow head rails
5 Maximum effort to operate doors shall not exceed 5 Ibs for exterior doors and 5 Ibs for interior doors,
such pull or push effort being applied at right angles to hinged doors and at the center plane of sliding
or folding doors Compensating devices or automatic door operators maybe utilized to meet the above
standards When fire doors are required, the maximum effort to operate the door may be increased
not to exceed 15 Ibs
6 Sweep period of closer to be adjusted so that from an open position of 70 degrees, the door will take
at least 3 seconds to move to a point 3 inches from the latch
F Protection Plates As detailed on the drawings as specified in Section 05500 Furnish with machine or wood
screws of stainless steel to match other hardware.
G Seals Solid neoprene to be MIL Spec R6855-CL III, Grade 40 Sponge neoprene to be MIL Spec. R6130,
Type II, Group C. UL label shall be applied on all rated doors
H Silencers Furnish silencers for interior hollow metal frames, 3 for single doors, 4 for pairs of doors Omit
where sound or light seals occurs, or for fire-resistive-rated door assemblies
I Thresholds. Change in level between 1/4 inch and 1/2 inch shall be beveled with a slope no greater than
1 unit vertical to 2 units horizontal (50 percent slope). The floor or landing shall not be more than 1/2 inch
lower than the threshold of the doorway.
2 3 KEYING
A Door Locks Keying locks shall be coordinated with the Owner Keying system shall be approved by Owner's
representative in writing. Furnish construction key system in accordance with lock manufacturer's standard
Where interchangeable core systems are used, provide temporary cores for construction keying. Stamp
keys "DO NOT DUPLICATE"
B Supply 2 keys for each lock
2 4 KEY CABINETS
A Key Cabinet Sheet steel construction, .047 inch thick, piano hinged door with lock keyed to building system,
manufactured by Lund Equipment Company, Bath, Ohio, or equal from Key Control System, Bechtelsvill,
Pennsylvania, and Telkee, Inc , Glen Riddle, Pennsylvania Model number as shown in schedule
B Cabinet Size Size for project keys plus 10 percent growth
C. Horizontal metal strips for keyhook labeling with plastic strip cover over paper labels
WLC/0414200 DOOR HARDWARE 08710
(4)
REV 01/05
D Provide book index
E Finish Baked enamel finish, color as selected by Architect
25 FINISHES (
A. Generally to be BHMA 630 Satin stainless steel
B Spray door closers to match other hardware, unless otherwise noted
C Aluminum items to be finished AL unless otherwise noted
26 FASTENERS
A Screws for strikes, face plates and similar items shall be flathead, countersunk type; provide machine
screws for metal and standard wood screws for wood
B Screws for butt hinges shall be flathead, countersunk, full-thread type
C Fastening of closer bases or closer shoes to doors shall be by means of sex bolts and spray painted to
match closer finish
D Provide expansion anchors for attaching hardware items to concrete or masonry
E. All exposed fasteners shall have a phillips head.
F. Finish of exposed screws to match surface finish of hardware or other adjacent work
2 7 OTHER MATERIAL
A All other materials not specifically described, but required for a complete and proper finish hardware
installation shall be selected by Architect as required at no additional cost
3 PART 3 EXECUTION
31 INSPECTION
A Verify that doors and frames are ready to receive work and dimensions are as instructed by the
manufacturer.
B Verify that power supply is available to power operated devices.
C Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions.
32 INSTALLATION
A Install hardware in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and requirements of DHL
B Use the templates provided by hardware item manufacturer
C Wherever cutting and fitting is required to install hardware onto or into surfaces which are later to be painted
orfmished in anotherway, coordinate removal, storage and remstallation or application of surface protection
with finishing work specified in Division 9. Do not install surface-mounted items until finishes have been
completed on the substrate
D Set units level, plumb and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce the attachment substrate as
necessary for proper installation and operation.
E Drill and countersink units which are not factory-prepared for anchorage fasteners Space fasteners and
anchors in accordance with industry standards '
F Install protection plates specified in Section 05500
WLC/0414200 DOOR HARDWARE 08710
(5)
REV 01/05
G Set thresholds for exterior doors in full bed of butyl-rubber sealant
H If hand of door is changed during construction, make necessary changes in hardware at no additional cost
3 3 ADJUST AND CLEAN
A Adjust and check each operating item of hardware and each door, to ensure proper operation or function
of every unit Replace units which cannot be adjusted to operate freely and smoothly as intended for the
application made
B Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by hardware installation
C Final Adjustment Wherever hardware installation is made more than one month prior to acceptance or
occupancy of a space or area, return to the work during the week prior to acceptance or occupancy, and
make final check and adjustment of all hardware items in such space or area. Clean operating items as
necessary to restore proper function and finish of hardware and doors Adjust door control devices to
compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment
D Instruct Owner's Personnel in proper adjustment and maintenance of hardware finishes, during the final
adjustment of hardware
E Continued Maintenance Service Approximately six months after the completion of the project, the
Contractor, accompanied by the Architectural Hardware Consultant, shall return to the project and re-adjust
every item of hardware to restore proper function of doors and hardware Consult with and instruct Owner's
personnel in recommended additions to the maintenance procedures Replace hardware items which have
deteriorated or failed due to faulty design, materials or installation of hardware units Prepare a written
report of current and predictable problems (of substantial nature) in the performance of the hardware
3 4 HARDWARE LOCATIONS
A. Hinges:
1 Bottom Hinges 10 inches from door bottom to bottom of hinge
2. Top Hinge. 5 inches from door top to top of hinges
3. Center Hinge. Center between top and bottom hinge.
4 Extra Hinge" 6 inches from bottom of top hinge to top of extra hinge.
B. Lock. 38 inches from bottom of door to center of lever or knob Verify manufacturer's template with door
design.
C Push Bar. 44 inches from bottom of door to center of bar
D Push/Kick Plate As detailed on the drawings
E. Pull Plate 42 inches from bottom of door to center of pull
F Panic Device 39-13/16 inches from bottom of door to center of pad. Verify manufacturer's template with
door design
G. Deadlock Strike 44 inches from floor, centered.
H. Floor Stops 4 inches maximum distance from any adjacent wall surface
I Conform to CBC, California Building Code (CCR) California code of Regulations, Title 24, Part 2, and
ADAAG for positioning requirements for accessibility
WLC/0414200 DOOR HARDWARE 08710
(6)
REV 01/05
35 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC) to inspect installation and certify that hardware and its installation
have been furnished and installed in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and as specified herein
3 6 SCHEDULE
A Numeric legend of listed manufacturers. The last column of numbers m the schedule of finish hardware
refers to the manufacturer listed in the following schedule-
B The items listed in the following schedule shall conform to the requirements of the foregoing specification
C The Door Schedule on the Drawings indicates which hardware set is used with each door
END OF SECTION
WLC/0414200 DOOR HARDWARE 08710
(7)
REV 01/05
SECTION 08800
GLAZING
1 PART1 GENERAL
1 1 SECTION INCLUDES
A Glass and glazing for hollow metal work, windows, and doors
/
B Mirror glass
12 REFERENCES
A ANSI Z97 1 - Safety Performance Specifications and Methods of Test for Safety Glazing Used in Buildings.
B ASTM C920 - Elastomeric Joint Sealants
C ASTM C1036 - Flat Glass
D ASTM C1048 - Heat-Treated Flat Glass
E ASTM E774 - Sealed Insulating Glass Units.
F CPSC - Consumer Product Safety Council
G GANA - Glazing Manual
1 3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A Conform to The Glass Association of North America (GANA) Glazing Manual and Sealant Manual for
glazing installation methods
1 4 SUBMITTALS
A Submit product data under provisions of Section 01330
B. Provide structural, physical and environmental characteristics, size limitations,; special handling or
installation requirements
C Provide data on glazing sealant Identify colors available ,
D Submit samples under provisions of Section 01330.
E Submit two samples, 12x12 inches in size, illustrating each glass coloration
F Submit 12 inch long bead of glazing sealant in color selected \
G Submit sealed glass unit manufacturer's certificate under provisions of Section 01330 indicating units meet
or exceed specified requirements
1 5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION
A Deliver, store and protect products under provisions of Section 01600 s
1 6 WARRANTY
A Provide five year manufacturer's warranty under provisions of Section 01770
B Warranty Include coverage of sealed insulating glass units from seal failure, mterpane dusting or misting,
and replacement of same
WLC/0414200 GLAZING 08800
(1)
REV 04/05
C Warranty Include coverage for reflective coating on mirrors and replacement of same
D Warranty Include coverage for delammation of laminated glass and replacement of same
2 PART2 PRODUCTS
2 1 ACCEPTABLE GLASS MANUFACTURERS
A Tempered Glass:
1. AFG Industries, Inc., www afgglass com
2 Guardian Industries Corp , www guardian com
3. Oidcastle Glass Co., www.oldcastleglass.com.
4. Interpane, www interpane com.
5 Pilkmgton Glass NA, www pilkmgton com
6. PPG Industries, Inc , www ppgglazmg com
7 Versalux Architectural Glass, www.visteon.com.
8. Viracon, Inc., www viracon com.
B Sealed Insulating Glass
1. AFG Industries, Inc , www afgglass com
2. Guardian Industries Corp., www guardian com
3. Interpane, www interpane com
4 Oidcastle Glass Co , www.oldcastleglass com
5. Pilkmgton Glass NA, www pilkmgton.com.
6 PPG Industries, Inc , www ppgglazmg com
7. Versalux Architectural Glass, www.visteon.com.
8. Viracon, Inc , www viracon com.
C Mirror Glass
1 Laurence Co., Inc , www.crlaurence com
2 PPG Industries, Inc , www.ppgglazmg com.
D Substitutions Under provisions of Section 01630
2 2 GLASS MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Tempered Glass Standard Comply with ASTM C1048 requirements, including those indicated by reference
to kind, condition, type, quality, class, and, if applicable, form, finish, and pattern.
B. Sizes Fabricate glass to sizes required for glazing openings, with edge clearances and tolerances
complying with recommendations of glass manufacturer and GANA
C. Provide thicknesses indicated or, if not indicated, as recommended by glass manufacturer for application
indicated
WLC/0414200 GLAZING 08800
(2)
REV 04/05
2 3 MIRROR GLASS PRODUCTS
A Mirror Glass. ASTM C1036, Type I Transparent Glass, Flat, Class 1, Clear, q1 mirror select, 1/4 inch thick
with pressure-sensitive adhesive coated scrim-impregnated film tape safety backing
2.4 TEMPERED GLASS PRODUCTS
A Manufacturing Process- Horizontal (roller hearth) process with roll wave distortion parallel with bottom edge
of glass as installed
B. Clear Tempered Float Glass- ASTM C1048, Kind FT (fully tempered), Condition A (uncoated surfaces),
Type 1 (transparent glass, flat) Class 1 (clear), Quality q3 (glazing select), conforming to ANSI Z97 1 and
CPSC 16 CFR 1201, Category II.
C Tinted Tempered Float Glass. ASTM C1048, Kind FT (fully tempered), Condition A (uncoated surfaces),
Type 1 (transparent glass, flat), Class 2 (tinted heat absorbing and light reducing), Quality q3 (glazing
select), tint color matching non-heat treated float glass, conforming to ANSI Z97.1, and CPSC 16 CFR
1201, Category II. Tint color equivalent to Solexia as manufactured by PPG Industries, Inc.
2 5 SEALED INSULATING GLASS UNITS
A Comply with ASTM E744, Class A
B Thickness of exterior pane. 1/4 inch
C Thickness of interior pane. 1/4 inch
D Air Space Thickness- 1/2 inch.
E Exterior Pane Tinted tempered float glass
F Interior Pane- Clear tempered float glass
G Coating- Low E coating on No. 2 surface
H Spacer Material Aluminum, clear anodized finish
I Dessicant Molecular sieve or silica gel or blend of both.
2.6 GLAZING SEALANTS AND PREFORMED GLAZING TABS
A General Comply with ASTM C920, and sealant and glass manufacturers recommendations for suitability
and compatibility.
B One-Part Butyl Glazing Sealant
1 Chem-Calk 300; Bostik Construction Products Div , www.bostik-fmdley-us.com
2 BC 158, Pecora Corp., www.pecora com
C. One-Part Acid-Curing Silicone Glazing Sealant Type S, Grade NS, Class 25.
1 Chem-Calk 1200; Bostik Construction Products Div., www bostik-fmdley-us com
2 Dow Corning 999; Dow Corning Corp., www dowcornmg com
3. SCS 1200, General Electric Corp , www gesealants.com
4 863, Pecora Corp , ww.pecora com
5 Omniglaze, Sonneborn Building Products Div.; ChemRex Products Inc., www.chemrex com
WLC/0414200 GLAZING 08800
(3)
REV 04/05
6 Proglaze, Tremco, www tremcosealants com
D Preformed Butyl-Polyisobutylene Glazing Tape With Spacer Rod
1 Chem-Tape 60, Bostik Construction Products Div , www bostik-fmdley-us com
2 Shim-Seal; Pecora Corp., www.pecora com
3 Pre-shimmed Tremco Polyshim II Tape, Tremco Inc , www tremcosealants com
27 GLAZING ACCESSORIES
A Setting Blocks Neoprene, EPDM or silicons blocks, 80-90 Shore A durometer hardness.
B Spacer Shims Neoprene, EPDM or silicone blocks, Shore A durometer hardness, self adhesive one face
C Glazing Gasket Resilient polyvmylchlonde extruded shape to suit glazing channel retaining slot with
prefabricated molded corners Color to be selected by Architect from manufacturer's complete range.
D Glazing Clips. Manufacturer's standard type
E Mirror Attachment Accessories- Mirror adhesive, chemically compatible with mirror coating and wall
substrate Stainless steel clips at top and bottom
3 PART 3 EXECUTION
3 1 INSPECTION
A Verify surfaces of glazing channels or recesses are clean, free of obstructions, and ready for work of this
Section
B Beginning of installation means acceptance of substrate
32 PREPARATION
A Clean contact surfaces with solvent and wipe dry
B Seal porous glazing channels or recesses
C Prime surfaces scheduled to receive sealant
3 3 EXTERIOR DRY METHOD (PREFORMED GLAZING)
A Cut glazing tape to length; install on glass pane Seal corners by butting tape and dabbing with butyl
sealant
B Place setting blocks at 1/4 points with edge block no more than 6 inches from corners
C Rest glass on setting blocks and push against fixed stop with sufficient pressure to attain full contact at
perimeter of pane
D Install removable stops without displacement of glazing gasket Exert pressure for full continuous contact
E. Trim protruding tape edge.
F Use for all aluminum windows and aluminum framed storefronts
3 4 EXTERIOR COMBINATION METHOD (TAPE AND SEALANT)
A Cut glazing tape to Idngth and set against permanent stops, 3/16 inch below sightlme. Seal corners by
butting tape and dabbing with butyl sealant
WLC/0414200 GLAZING 08800
(4)
REV 04/05
B Apply heel bed of butyl sealant along intersection of removable stop with frame ensuring full seal between
glass and frame
C. Place setting blocks at 1/4 points with edge block no more than 6 inches from corners.
D. Rest glass on setting blocks and push against tape and heel bead of sealant with sufficient pressure to
attain full contact at perimeter of pane
E Install removable stops with spacer strips inserted between glass, and applied stops at 24 inch intervals,
1/4 inch below sightlme
F Fill gap between pane and removable stop with silicone sealant to depth equal to bite of frame on pane, but
not more than 3/8 inch below sightlme
G Apply cap bead of silicone sealant along exterior void, to uniform line, flush with sightlme Tool or wipe
sealant surface with solvent for smooth appearance
H. Use for all exterior steel frames.
3.5 INTERIOR - DRY METHOD (TAPE AND TAPE)
A Cut glazing tape to length and set against permanent stops, projecting 1/16 inch above sight line
B. Place setting blocks at 1/4 points with edge block no more than 6 inches from corners.
C Rest glazing on setting blocks and push against tape for full contact at perimeter of pane or unit.
D Place glazing tape on free perimeter of glazing in same manner described above.
E Install removable stop without displacement of tape Exert pressure on tape for full continuous contact
F Knife trim protruding tape.
G Use for all interior steel frames
3 6 INSTALLATION - MIRRORS
A Set mirrors with adhesive and stainless steel trim applied in accordance with adhesive manufacturer's
instructions.
B Place plumb and level
37 CLEANING
A After installation, mark pane with an "X" by using plastic tape or removable paste.
B • Remove glazing materials from finish surfaces
C Remove labels after work is completed
END OF SECTION
WLC/0414200 GLAZING 08800
(5)
REV 04/05
SECTION 09220
PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER
1 PART 1 GENERAL
1 1 WORK INCLUDED
A Metal furring and lathing
B Portland cement plaster system
C Acrylic based finish coat
D Plaster application schedule
1 2 REFERENCES
A ASTM C91 - Masonry Cement
B ASTM C150 - Portland Cement
C ASTM C206 - Finishing Hydrated Lime.
D ASTM C207 - Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes
\
E ASTM C847 - Standard Specifications for Metal Lath
F ASTM C897 - Aggregate for Job-Mixed Portland Cement-Based Plasters
G ASTM C926 - Application of Portland Cement-Based Plaster
H ASTM C954 - Steel Drill Screws for the Application of Gypsum Board or Metal Plaster Bases to Steel Studs
from 0.033 inches to 0 112 inches in thickness
I ASTM C1002 - Steel Drill Screws for the Application of Gypsum Board or Metal Plaster Bases
J ASTM C1063 - Installation of Lathing and Furring for Portland Cement Based Plaster
K NAAMM Standard ML/SFA 920 - Guide Specifications for Metal Lathing and Furring
L PCA (Portland Cement Association) - Portland Cement Plaster (Stucco) Manual
M CBC - California Building Code, (CCR) California Code of Regulations, Title 24, Part 2
N ICC - International Conference Code Council.
1 3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Applicator Company specializing in cement plaster work with five years documented experience
B At the completion of lathing and pnor to the application of "scratch coat of plaster, contact the International
Institute for Lath And Plaster, www nlp.org, and arrange for inspection of lathing and accessories installation.
Provide Architect a written report of the results of the inspection
1 4 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A Conform to CBC, California Building Code, (CCR), Title 24, Part 2, Chapter 25A for materials and their
installation.
B Obtain approval of enforcement agency for installation of self furring metal lath
WLC/0414200 PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER 09220
d)
REV 04/05
1 5 SUBMITTALS
A Submit product data under provisions of Section 01330
B. Provide product data on plaster materials, characteristics and limitations of products specified
C Submit samples of texture for plaster finish
1 6 FIELD SAMPLES
A Provide sample panel under provisions of Section 01330.
B Construct field sample panel, minimum'48 inches long by 48 inches wide, illustrating lath installation, base
coat installation, surface texture, and color of finish coat
C Locate where directed
D Accepted sample may remain as part of the work
1 7 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A Do not apply plaster when substrate or ambient air temperature is less than 40 degrees F or more than
90 degrees F
B Maintain minimum ambient temperature of 40 degrees F during and after installation of plaster
C. Protect portland cement plaster from uneven and excessive evaporation during dry weather and from strong
blasts of dry air
2 PART 2 PRODUCTS
2 1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A Lathing Materials
1 Western Metal Lath, www wmlmc com
2 Amico-West, www amico-lath com
3 United States Gypsum Co , www usg com.
4 National Gypsum Co , www nationalgypsum com
5 CEMCO, www cemcosteel com
B Accessories:
1 Flannery, Inc., www flannerytrim com.
2. Fry Reglet Corp., www fryreglet com.
3 United States Gypsum Co , www.usg com.
4 Keene Building Products, Metalex Corp., www metlx com
5 MM. Systems Corporation, www mmsystemscorp com
6 CEMCO, www.cemcosteel com
7. Amico-West, www amico-lath com
8. Superior Metal Trim, www supenormetaltrim com
WLC/0414200 PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER 09220
(2)
REV 04/05
9 Stockton Wire Products, www.stocktonproducts com
10 Western Metal Lath, wwwwmlinc.com
11 National Gypsum Co , www nationalgypsum com
C Acrylic-Based Finish Coat.
1 Dryvit Systems, Textured Acrylic Finish, www dryvit com
2 Omega Stucco, Akroflex, www omega-products.com.
3 Senergy, Inc., Acrylic Finish, www.senergy cc
4 Sto Industries, Stolit, www stocorp.com
5 Thoro System Products, Thorowall Acrylic Finish, www chemrex.cc.
D. Underlayment-
1 Tyvek Stucco Wrap as manufactured by E I DuPont de Nemours, www tyvek.com
2 Typar House Wrap as manufactured by Reemay, Inc , www reemay com
E Substitutions- Under provisions of Section 01630
2 2 PLASTER BASE COAT MATERIALS
A Cement: ASTM C150, Normal - Type I, Portland or ASTM C91, masonry.
B Lime ASTM C206, Type S for use with Portland cement or ASTM C207, Type S, for use with masonry
cement
C Aggregate In accordance with ASTM C897 and PCA Plaster (Stucco) Manual
D Water. Clean, fresh, potable and free of mineral or organic matter which can affect plaster
E Plaster Mix Reinforcement. Glass fibers, 1/2 inch nominal length, alkali resistant.
2 3 PLASTER FINISH COAT MATERIALS
A Acrylic Finish Coat Factory-mixed formulation of acrylic emulsion, colorfast mineral pigments and fine
aggregates for use over portland cement plaster base coats Integral pre-mixed color in custom color as
selected by Architect Up to four (4) different colors will be selected for use in varying amounts at plaster
locations.
2 4 FURRING AND LATHING
A Metal Lath for Vertical Surfaces ASTM C847, 3 4 Ib/sq yd expanded metal, galvanized, self furring type
with continuous groove
B Metal Lath for Honzontal Surfaces. ASTM C847,3.4 Ib /sq yd expanded metal, galvanized, 3/8 inch rib lath
with factory applied kraft paper backing
2.5 ACCESSORIES
A Corner Mesh: Formed steel, minimum 0179 inch thick, expanded flanges shaped to permit complete
embedding in plaster; minimum 2 inches wide, galvanized finish
B Corner Reinforcement- Equivalent to Western Metal, 0179 inch Stucco-Lok or 18 gage Stockton Corneraid
for straight corners Stockton Bullnose Regular for rounded corners, galvanized finish
WLC/0414200 PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER 09220
(3)
REV 04/05
C Strip Mesh. Metal lath, 3 4 Ib/sq yd expanded metal, galvanized, 6 inch wide x 18 inch long
D Vent Screed Equivalent to Superior SRS, minimum 0179 inch thick; depth governed by plaster thickness,
minimum 4 inch width, double "V" profile with perforated expanse between "V's" of longest possible lengths,
galvanized finish ^
E Casing Bead Formed steel, minimum .0179 inch thick; thickness governed by plaster thickness, maximum
possible lengths, expanded metal flanges, with square edges, galvanized finish
F. Curved Casing Bead' Square-edged style fabricated from aluminum, preformed into curve or radius
indicated.
G. WeepScreed Equivalent to Superior SWS, minimum 0179mchthick,depthgovernedbyplasterthickness,
minimum 3-1/2 inch high flange, "V" shaped, of longest possible lengths, galvanized finish
H Drip Screed Equivalent to Superior No 5 or No 10 drip mould as indicated on drawings, minimum
0179 inch thick, depth governed by plaster thickness, minimum 3-1/2 inch high flange, of longest possible
lengths, galvanized finish
I. Window/Door Drip Screed: Equivalent to Superior SWD, minimum .0179 inch thick, depth governed by
plaster thickness, minimum 3-1/2 inch high flange, of longest possible lengths, galvanized finish
J Control and Expansion Joints Equivalent to Western XJ 15-3, depth to conform to plaster thickness,
maximum practical lengths, galvanized finish
K. Single Point Screed" Equivalent to Superior SSP, minimum 0 179 inch thick; depth governed by plaster
thickness, maximum practical lengths, galvanized finish
L Interior Corner Joints Equivalent to Western No 30, depth to conform to plaster thickness, maximum
practical lengths, galvanized finish
M Anchorages Nails, staples, or other approved metal supports, of type and size to suit application,
galvanized to rigidly secure lath and associated metal accessories in place
N Screws ASTMC954 or ASTMC1002, self drilling
O Penetration Flashing Tyvek flashing system Straight flash for jambs and heads, FlexWrap for sills
P Polyethylene Sheet Clear, 6 mil thick
Q Wire ASTM A641, Class 1 coating (galvanized), soft temper
R Powder Activated Fastener 0 145 inch diameter SDM flat head nail with washer as manufactured by
Hilti, Inc , www us hilti com, ICC/ES Report No 2388
S Tape Acrylic adhesive backed oriented polypropylene, 3 inch in width
2 6 CEMENT PLASTER MIXES
A. Mix and proportion cement plaster in accordance with ASTM C926 and PCA Plaster (Stucco) Manual
B. Base Coat and Brown Coat' One part cement, minimum 3-1/2 and maximum 4 parts aggregate, and 0-3/4
parts hydrated lime, and alkali resistant glass fibers at a rate of 1 Ib. per sack of cement
C Acrylic-Based Finish Coat: Factory packaged, comply with finish coat manufacturer's directions
D. Mix only as much plaster as can be used in 1 hour.
E. Mix materials dry, to uniform color and consistency, before adding water.
F. Protect mixtures from frost, contamination, and evaporation
WLC/0414200 PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER 09220
(4)
REV 04/05
G Do not retemper mixes after initial set has occurred
3 PART 3 EXECUTION
31 INSPECTION
A Verify that surfaces and site conditions are ready to receive work
B Masonry Verify joints are cut flush and surface is ready to receive work of this Section. Verify no bituminous
or water repellent coatings exist on masonry surface
C. Concrete. Verify surfaces are flat, honeycomb is filled flush, and surface is ready to receive work of this
Section Verify no bituminous, water repellent, or form release agents exist on concrete surface that are
detrimental to plaster.
D Grounds and Blocking. Verify items within walls for other Sections of work have been installed
E. Mechanical and Electrical Verify services within walls have been tested and approved
fl
F Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions
3 2 PREPARATION
A Protect surfaces near the work of this Section from damage, disfiguration, and overspray. Mask off all
ventilation screeds occurring in plastered areas
B Clean concrete and masonry surfaces of foreign matter Clean surfaces using acid solutions, solvents, or
detergents Wash surfaces with clean water.
C Roughen smooth concrete surfaces.
D Apply bonding agent in accordance with manufacturer's instructions
3 3 INSTALLATION - LATHING MATERIALS
A Install metal lathing in accordance with ML/SFA 920, ASTM C1063 and as specified herein.
B On vertical surfaces apply underlayment over substrate, weatherlap horizontal edges 6 inches, vertical
edges 6 inches Fasten in place at 12 inches on center vertically over stud. Tape seal all joints and
penetrations
C Install penetration flashing around all openings and penetrations in exterior walls, soffits and ceilings in
compliance with underlayment manufacturer's recommendations and in conformance with
recommendations contained in Plaster and Lathing Systems Manual and ML/SFA 920 Turn sill flashing up
6 inches at jambs
D Apply self-furring reinforcement with self-furring ribs perpendicular to supports for horizontal surfaces.
E Apply metal lath taut, with long dimension perpendicular to supports for vertical surfaces.
F Lap ends minimum 1 inch. Secure end laps with tie wire where they occur between supports
G. Lap sides of expanded metal lath minimum 1-1/2 inches Nest outside ribs of rib lath together
H Furr out metal lath from vertical supports or backing not less than 1/4 inch Furring of metal lath on vertical
supports having a bearing surface width of 1-5/8 inches or less is not required
WLC/0414200 PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER 09220
(5)
REV 04/05
I Attach metal lath to wood supports using 1 -1/2 inch No 11 galvanized nails with 7/16 inch diameter heads
at maximum 6 inches on center In addition, at horizontal wood supports, secure lath to each support with
1/2 inch wide, 1-1/2 inch long No 9 W & M gage ring shank, hook staple placed around a 10d common nail
laid flat under the surface of the lath at 27 inches oc and not more than 3 inches from the edge of each
sheet Such staples may be placed over the ribs of 3/8 rib lath or over the back wire of other approved lath
at 27 inches oc, omitting the 10d nails.
J Attach metal lath to vertical metal supports with tie wires or No 8 self drilling screws with 3/8 inch diameter
wafer head capable of penetrating metal supports by not less than 1 /4 inch Maximum spacing 6 inches on
center
K. Attach metal lath to horizontal metal supports with tie wires or No 8 self drilling screws with 3/8 inch
diameter wafer head fitted with 1 inch O D x 1/4 inch I.D. x 16 gage galvanized cut washers capable of
penetrating metal supports by not less than 1/4 inch
L Attach metal lath to concrete and masonry using powder actuated fastener with washers with minimum 1 -
1/4 inch penetration into substrate Space at maximum 8 inches on center horizontally and 12 inches on
center vertically. Securely wire tie side laps
«
M Continuously reinforce internal angles with corner mesh, except where corner joint No. 30 is shown Fasten
at perimeter edges only
N Place beaded external angle with mesh at corners. Fasten at outer edges only
O Place strip mesh diagonally at corners of lathed openings Secure rigidly in place
P Place 4 inch wide strips of metal lath centered over junctions of dissimilar backing materials Secure rigidly
in place
Q Place window/door drip screed at head of all windows and door openings in exterior walls
R Place weep screed at base of all vertical plaster applications at foundation line not less than 4 inches above
earth or 2 inches above paved surfaces Underlayment and lath shall cover and terminate on the attachment
flange of the screed
S Place drip screed at base of all vertical plaster applications which do not terminate at framed wall openings
or at foundation line
T Place vent screed in soffit areas indicated
U Place casing beads at all terminations of plaster finish not otherwise indicated to have screeds installed and
at all intersections with dissimilar materials Butt and align ends Secure rigidly in place
V Install accessories to lines and levels
3 4 CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS
A Locate control joints as indicated on the drawings
B Establish control and expansion joints with specified joint device x
C. Attach control and expansion joints to metal lath with wire ties
D Install expansion joint over 6 inch wide strip of polyethylene sheet to assist with air seal continuity
E. Cut metal lath behind control and expansion joints
F Coordinate joint placement with other related work
WLC/0414200 PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER 09220
(6)
REV 04/05
3.5 PLASTERING
A Apply plaster in accordance with ASTM C926 and PCA Portland Cement Plaster (Stucco) Manual
B Three Coat Application At metal lathed surfaces, apply scratch coat to a nominal thickness of 3/8 inch,
brown coat to a nominal thickness of 3/8 inch, and finish coat to a nominal thickness of 1/8 inch
C 'Moisture Curing. Moist cure plaster surfaces using a fine fog spray to assure continuous hydration of
cementations materials Where hot, dry and windy conditions exist, plaster surfaces shall be moistened and
covered with a single sheet of polyethylene plastic to prevent water loss thru evaporation
D. Moist cure scratch and brown coats Do not apply brown coat sooner than 48 hours following scratch coat
iE After curing, dampen base coat prior to applying finish coat. Do not apply finish coat sooner than 7 days
following brown coat
F Apply acrylic-based finish coat as factory packaged, do not add other ingredients, comply with
manufacturer's written instructions
36 FINISH COAT TEXTURE
A Fine Sand Float as defined by photographs and application procedures in the Plaster Texture Brochure
published by the Technical Services and Information Bureau, www tsib org
3.7 TOLERANCES
A Maximum Variation from True Flatness 1/8 inch in 10 feet
3 8 CLEANING
A Remove protective maskmgs
B Remove any overspray from surrounding materials
C Clean adjacent affected surfaces
3 9 PLASTER APPLICATION SCHEDULE v
A Exterior Vertical Surface of Concrete and Masonry Walls Three coat plaster over metal lath and
underlayment
B Exterior Vertical Surface of Framed Walls Three coat plaster over metal lath and underlayment
C Exterior Horizontal Framed Surfaces. Three coat plaster over metal lath and underlayment
END OF SECTION
WLC/0414200 PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER 09220
(7)
REV 04/05
SECTION 09260
GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS
1 PART1 GENERAL
1 1 WORK INCLUDED
A Gypsum board
B Taped and sanded joint treatment
C Resilient furring channels
1 2 REFERENCES
A. ASTM C11 - Standard Terminology Relating to Gypsum and Related Building Materials and Systems
B ASTM C36 - Standard Specification for Gypsum Wallboard
C. ASTM C79 - Standard Specification for Treated Core and Nontreated Core Gypsum Sheathing Board
D ASTM C475 - Joint Treatment Materials for Gypsum Wallboard Construction.
E ASTM C557 - Adhesives for Fastening Gypsum Wallboard to Wood Framing
F. ASTM C630 - Water Resistant Gypsum Backing Board
G ASTM C645 - Non-Load (Axial) Bearing Steel Studs, Runners (Track), and Rigid Furring Channels for Screw
Application of Gypsum Board
H ASTM C840 - Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board.
I ASTM C1002 - Steel Drill Screws for the Application of Gypsum Board
J ASTM C1396 - Standard Specification for Gypsum Board
K ASTM D226 - Asphalt-Saturated Felt Used in Roofing and Waterproofing
L GA 201 - Using Gypsum Board for Walls and Ceilings.
M. GA 214 - Levels of Gypsum Board Finish
N GA 216 - Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board
O CBC - California Building Code (CCR), Title 24, Part 2.
P UL - Underwriters Laboratories
1 3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Applicator. Company specializing in gypsum board systems work with five years documented experience.
1 4 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A Maintain uniform temperature of minimum 60 degrees F and humidity of 30 to 50 percent prior to, during,
and after installation of the work of this section.
1 5 DEFINITIONS
A Refer to ASTM C11 for definitions of terms related to gypsum board assemblies
WLC/0414200 GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS 09260
(D
REV 06/04
1 6 FIELD SAMPLES
A Provide field samples under provisions of Section 01330.
B On wall and ceiling surface duplicate specified texture finish on at least 100 sq ft of surface area
C Simulate finished lighting conditions for review of field sample
D After surface is accepted, the accepted surface will remain as part of the work and will be used to evaluate
subsequent applications of finish surfaces
2 PART2 PRODUCTS
2 1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEM
A American Gypsum Corp , www.amencangypsum com
B Georgia Pacific Corp , www gp com
C National Gypsum Co., www nationalgypsum com
D PABCO Gypsum, www pabcogypsum.paccoast com
E. United States Gypsum Co , www.usg com
F Substitutions Under provisions of Section 01630
22 FRAMING MATERIALS
A Metal Furring: ASTM C645, hat-shaped, 7/8 inch deep, 0329 inch thick.
B Fasteners ASTM C1002
C Adhesive ASTM C557
2 3 GYPSUM BOARD MATERIALS
A Gypsum Board ASTM C36 or ASTM C1396, fire resistive type, UL rated, 5/8 inch thick unless otherwise
indicated, maximum permissible length, ends square cut, tapered and beveled edges Mold and mildew-
resistant gypsum core and paper facing at exterior locations
B Moisture Resistant Gypsum Board ASTM C36 or ASTM C1396, fire resistive type, UL rated; 5/8mch thick
unless otherwise indicated, water resistant core, water resistant paper on front, back and long edges,
maximum permissible length, ends square cut, tapered and beveled edges
N
24 ACCESSORIES
A Corner Beads Metal, hot dip galvanized.
B Edge Trim- GA 201 and GA 216; Type LC bead, unless otherwise indicated
C. Spot Grout ASTM C475, setting-type joint compound
D Joint Materials- ASTM C475, reinforcing tape, joint compound, adhesive, water, and fasteners Use tapes
and compound recommended by gypsum board manufacturerforthe use intended Use ready mixed, drying
type compounds. Use taping compound for embedding tape and first coat over fasteners and flanges of
corner beads and trim Use topping compound for fill and finish coats
E. Membrane. ASTM D226, No 15 asphalt saturated roofing felt
WLC/0414200 GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS 09260
(2)
REV 06/04
3 PARTS EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A Verify that site conditions are ready to receive work
B. Beginning of installation means acceptance of substrate.
3 2 WALL FURRING INSTALLATION
A Erect wall furring for direct attachment to masonry and concrete walls
B Erect metal furring vertically at 16 inches oc. Secure in place on alternate channel flanges at maximum
24 inches oc
3 3 MEMBRANE INSTALLATION
A Install membrane over wall studding where moisture resistant gypsum board is to be installed.
B Install membrane over substrate, weatherlap horizontal edges 4 inches, vertical edges 6 inches.
3 4 GYPSUM BOARD INSTALLATION
A Install gypsum board in accordance with ASTM C840 and manufacturer's instructions
B Erect single layer gypsum board in most economical direction, with ends and edges occurring over firm
bearing except those ends and edges which are perpendicular to framing
C Use screws when fastening gypsum board to metal furring.
D Use screws when fastening gypsum board to wood furring or framing
E Treat cut edges and holes in moisture resistant gypsum board with sealant
F Place corner beads at external corners Use longest practical length Place edge trim where gypsum board
abuts dissimilar materials
G. Spot grout metal door frames Apply spot grout at each jamb anchor clip just before inserting board into
frame
35 JOINT TREATMENT
A Tape, fill, and sand joints, edges, and corners in accordance with GA-214
B Feather successive coats a minimum of 2 inches onto adjoining surfaces for each coato
C Where fire resistance rating is required, detail of joint treatment shall meet fire rating requirement
D Level 1 Treatment
1 All joints and angles shall have tape embedded in joint compound
2 Surface shall be free of excess joint compound.
3 Tool marks and ridges are acceptable
4 Use for plenum areas above ceiling, in areas that are generally concealed and other areas not
normally open to view.
WLC/0414200 GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS 09260
(3)
REV 06/04
E. Level 2 Treatment
1. 'All joints and angles shall have tape embedded in joint compound and one separate coat of joint
compound shall be applied over all fastener heads and accessories
2 Surface shall be free of excess joint compound
3 Tool marks and ridges are acceptable.
4 Use where surface is substrate to stone tile
F Level 3 Treatment
1 Not used.
G Level 4 Treatment
1 Not used.
H Level 5 Treatment
1 All joints and angles shall have tape embedded in joint compound with three separate coats of topping
compound applied over all joints, fasteners, and accessories.
2 Apply a thin skim coat of topping compound over entire surface.
3 Final texture to match existing texture at Fire Station No 1 located at 180 West Mission Road,
San Marcos, CA 92069
4 Sand lightly between coats.
5 Use for all surfaces that are scheduled to receive a painted finish
3 6 FINISHING
A Remove any topping compound from door frames, windows, and other adjoining construction
37 TOLERANCES
A Maximum Variation from True Flatness 1/8 inch in 10 feet in any direction
END OF SECTION
WLC/0414200 GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS 09260
(4)
REV 06/04
SECTION 09441
THIN-SET EPOXY TERRAZZO
1 PART1 GENERAL
1 1 SECTION INCLUDES
A Thin-set epoxy matrix terrazzo floor, wall and ceiling finish
B Flexible reinforced crack bridging membrane.
C Divider and control joint strips
1 2^ REFERENCES
A ASTM D2047 - Static Coefficient of Friction of Polish Coated Floor Surfaces as Measured by the James
Machine.
B. NTMA (National Terrazzo and Mosaic Association, Inc.) - Terrazzo Information Guide
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A Submit shop drawings, product data, and samples under provisions of Section 01330
B. Shop Drawings' Indicate divider strip, control joint layout, and details of adjacent components.
C Review proposed divider strip and control joint strip layout with indicated pattern. Provide additional strips
of either type if recommended by manufacturer Indicate on shop drawings
D Product Data- Provide data for divider strips, control joint strips, safety inserts, flexible membrane and
sealerl
E. Samples for Verification Submit two finished samples 6x6 inch in size illustrating each color selected, chip
size and variation, chip gradation, flexible membrane and typical divider strip
F Applicator Qualifications Proof of NTMA membership with signed certificate from manufacturer that
applicator is approved by them for installation
1 4 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A. Submit cleaning and maintenance data in accordance with Section 01770
B Include procedures for stain removal, stripping and sealing
1 5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A Perform work in accordance with NTMA recommendations contained in "Terrazzo Information Guide" unless
more stringent requirements are specified
B Applicator Qualifications NTMA member company specializing in performing the work of this section with
minimum 5 years of documented experience and approved by manufacturer.
1 6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND PROTECTION
A. Transport, handle, store and protect products in accordance with Section 01600
B Store resin materials in a dry, secure area
C Maintain minimum temperature of 60 degrees F
D Keep products away from fire or open flame
1.7 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A Do not install terrazzo when temperature is below 60 degrees F or above 90 degrees F.
B Maintain temperature within specified range 24 hours before, during and 72 hours after installation of
flooring.
C Provide ambient lighting level of 50 ft candles measured at floor surface
WLC/0414200 THIN-SET EPOXY TERRAZZO 09441
(1)
REV 06/04
D Control and collect dust produced by grinding. Provide temporary enclosures to limit dust migration
1 8 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Flooring shall have a coefficient of friction when tested to ASTM D2047 of 0.60
2 PART 2 PRODUCTS
2 1 MANUFACTURERS AND MATERIALS
A. Epoxy Thin-Set Terrazzo Flooring System as formulated by General Polymers Corporation, (714) 963-5538,
shall be Epoxy Thin-Set Terrazzo 1100, consisting of 3553 Epo-Flex Membrane, 3577 LV Low Viscosity Low
Modulus Epoxy as the primer, 3520 Epoxy Terrazzo Matrix as the binder resin, 5270 Epoxy Filler, Marble
Chip Aggregate. 3520G Epoxy Terrazzo Grout, and 4501 Acrylic Sealer The total system thickness will be
3/8 inch nominal
B Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01630
22 EPOXY TERRAZZO
A. Floors, Wall and Ceilings. Epoxy matrix, 3/8 inch thick.
1 Matrix Color To be selected by Architect. Up to five custom colors will be selected for use in varying
amounts at all Terrazzo locations. Provide computerized color matching
2. Aggregate- Marble chips of size recommended by manufacturer Color and mix as selected by
Architect
23 ACCESSORIES
A Divider Strips Angel or T-shape, 1/8 inch thick white zinc exposed top strip, zinc coated steel concealed
bottom strip, with anchoring features
B Control Joint Strips. Double L type angles, 1/8 inch white zinc exposed top strips, zinc coated steel
concealed bottom strips, 1/4 inch wide neoprene filler strip between vertical strips, with anchoring features
C Strip Height. To suit thickness of terrazzo topping, with allowance for grinding
D Flexible Reinforcing Mesh Resinous membrane for substrate crack preparation and reflective crack
reduction with fiberglass scrim reinforcement.
E Divider -Strip Adhesive Epoxy-resm adhesive.
F Finishing Grout Resin based
G Primer Manufacturer recommended type for use indicated
H Seal Coat Slip resistant acrylic sealer approved by terrazzo manufacturer
I. Joint Sealants- Silicone type as specified in Section 07900
J. Cleaner Chemically neutral cleaner with pH factor of between 7 and 10, biodegradable, phosphate free,
recommended for use by terrazzo manufacturer.
3 PARTS EXECUTION
31 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that substrate surfaces are ready to receive work
B. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions
3 2 PREPARATION
A Clean substrate of foreign matter
B. Prepare concrete in accordance with manufacturer's written instruction.
C. Fill voids and chipped areas with mortar to produce smooth surface.
D Install flexible membrane to produce full coverage.
WLC/0414200 THIN-SET EPOXY TERRAZZO 09441
(2)
REV 06/04
E. Apply primer in accordance with manufacturer's instructions
3 3 INSTALLATION - ACCESSORIES
A Install divider and control joint as indicated on the shop drawings.
B Install strips straight and level
C Install control-joint strips back to back with 1/4 inch gap between strips. Install black neoprene filler between
strips
34 APPLICATION - TERRAZZO
A Apply each component of system in accordance with manufacturer's written installation instructions and
NTMA guide Specification
B Grind terrazzo surfaces with power disc machine, sequence with course to fine grit abrasive, using wet or
dry method.
C Apply patch mix to match mortar over ground surface to fill honeycomb exposed during grinding
D Remove patch coat by grinding, using fine grit abrasive
E Hand grind base and cove similarly
F Delay final fine grinding until all construction traffic through area is restricted
3.5 CURING
A Cure terrazzo topping as recommended by manufacturer
B Close area to allow undisturbed curing
3 6 FINISHING
A Finish terrazzo to NTMA requirements
B Grind terrazzo surfaces with power disc machine, sequence'with coarse to fine grit abrasive, using a wet
method
C Produce terrazzo finish surface to match samples
D Apply patch mix to match mortar over ground surface to fill honeycomb exposed during grinding.
E Remove patch coat by grinding, using a fine grit abrasive
F Hand grind base and cove in similar manner
3 7 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES
A Maximum Variation from Flat Surface-1/8 inch in 10 feet
B Maximum Variation from Level 1/8 inch.
3 8 CLEANING
A Clean work under provisions of Section 01770.
B Remove grinding dust from installation and adjacent areas.
C Scrub and clean terrazzo surfaces with cleaner in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Let dry.
D. Immediately after terrazzo has dried, apply sealer in accordance with manufacturer's instructions
E Seal and polish surfaces, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
WLC/0414200 THIN-SET EPOXY TERRAZZO 09441
(3)
REV 06/04
3.9 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK
A Protect finish installation under provisions of Section 01600.
B Do not permit traffic over finished terrazzo surfaces.
END OF SECTION
WLC/0414200 THIN-SET EPOXY TERRAZZO 09441
(4)
REV 06/04
SECTION 09511
SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS
1. PART1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Suspended metal grid ceiling system
B Acoustical panels.
C Non-fire rated assembly
D. Perimeter trim
12 REFERENCES
A ASTM A513 - Electnc-Resistance-Welded Carbon and Alloy Steel Mechanical Tubing
B ASTM C635 - Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panel Ceilings
C ASTM C636 - Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panels
D ASTM A641 - Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Carbon Steel Wire
E. ASTM E580 - Application of Ceiling Suspension Systems from Acoustic Tile and Lay-in Panels in Areas
Requiring Seismic Restraint
F ASTM E1264 - Classification of Acoustical Ceiling Products
G CBC - California Building Code, (CCR) California Code of Regulations, Title 24, Part 2
H UL - Underwriters' Laboratories Building Material Directory
1 3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A Manufacturer Company specializing in manufacture of ceiling suspension system and ceiling panels with
five years minimum experience
B Installer Company with five years minimum documented experience, approved by manufacturer
1 4 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to CBC, California Building Code (CCR) Title 24, Part 2, Chapter 25A for suspension system
requirements
B. Conform to applicable UL and CBC combustibility requirements for materials
1 5 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit product data under provisions of Section 01330.
B Provide product data on metal grid system components and acoustic units
C.
C. Submit samples under provisions of Section 01330.
D. Submit two samples 6x6 inch in size, illustrating material and finish of acoustic units
E. Submit two samples each, 12 inches long, of suspension system main runner, cross runner, and edge trim
WLC/0414200 SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 09511
(D
REV 01/04 '
1 6 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Maintain uniform temperature of minimum 60 degrees F, and humidity of 20 to 40 percent prior to, during,
and after installation.
1 7 SEQUENCING/SCHEDULING
A Do not install acoustical ceilings until building is enclosed, sufficient heat is provided, dust generating
activities have terminated, and overhead work is completed, tested, and approved.
B. Schedule installation of acoustic units after interior wet work is dry
1.8 EXTRA STOCK
A Provide extra quantity of acoustic units to Owner under provisions of Section 01770
B Provide quantity equal to 2 percent of units installed
2 PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - SUSPENSION SYSTEM
A Armstrong Ceiling Systems, www.ceilmgs com.
B BPB Celotex, www bpb-na com.
C Chicago Metallic Corporation, www.chicago-metalhc com.
D USG Interior Systems, (DONN), www.usg com
E Substitutions Under provisions of Section 01630
2 2 SUSPENSION SYSTEM MATERIALS
A Grid ASTM C635, heavy duty, non-fire rated, exposed T, components die cut and interlocking Catalog
numbers of acceptable manufacturer are indicated on drawings
B Accessories Stabilizer bars, clips, splices, and edge moldings required for suspended grid system
C Grid Materials Commercial quality cold rolled steel with galvanized coating
D Grid Finish Off-White color, baked enamel
E. Support Channels and Hangers Galvanized steel, size and type to suit application, to rigidly secure
acoustic ceiling system including integral mechanical and electrical components, as detailed on drawings
F Compression Strut ASTM A513, telescoping tube design, galvanized 3/4 inch diameter 14 gage rigid steel
tubing with crimped end attached to roof framing and secured to 1/2 inch diameter 14 gage rigid steel tubing
with crimped end to mam runners. Equivalent pre-manufactured compression post supplied by ceiling grid
manufacturer
G. Hanger Wire ASTM A641, Class 1 coating (galvanized), soft temper, No. 12 gage
2.3 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - ACOUSTIC UNITS
A Armstrong Ceiling Systems, www.ceilmgs com.
B. BPB Celotex, www.bpb-na com.
C. USG Interiors, Inc , www usg.com.
D Substitutions Under provisions of Section 01630.
WLC/041420Q SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 09511
(2)
REV 01/04
2 4 ACOUSTIC UNIT MATERIALS
A Acoustic Panels ASTM E1264, conforming to the following-
1. Equivalent to Ultima H1 -LR ceiling panel, manufactured by Armstrong and conforming to the following
\
(a) Size : 24 x 24 inches
(b) Thickness • 3/4 inches
(c) Composition Mineral
(d) Light Reflectance • 89 percent
(e) Edge • Beveled Tegular
(f) Surface Color White
(g) Flame Spread (0-25) Class A, UL 25 or under
(h) Smoke Density Not to exceed 450 when tested in accordance with
CBC Standard No 8-1
3 PARTS EXECUTION
31 INSPECTION
A Verify that existing conditions are ready to receive work.
B Verify that layout of hangers will not interfere with other work.
C Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions.
3 2 INSTALLATION - GRID SYSTEM
A Install system in accordance with ASTM C636 and ASTM E580 as supplemented in this Section and with
notes on the drawing entitled Metal Suspension Systems for Lay In Panel Ceilings
B, Install after major above ceiling work is complete Coordinate the location of hangers with other work
C Hang system independent of columns, ducts, pipes and conduit Where carrying members are spliced,
avoid visible displacement of face plane of adjacent members
D Where ducts or other equipment prevent the regular spacing of hangers, reinforce the nearest effected
hangers and related carrying channels to span the extra distance
E Compression struts to be installed at each mam runner not exceeding 12'- 0" o c in both directions and not
more than 8 inches from end of mam runner. Insert main 3/4 inch tube over 1/2 inch tube with a minimum
6 inch lap Secure crimped end of mam 3/4 inch tube to structural framing with metal screws and 1/2 inch
tube to mam runner with metal screws Secure tube sections together with 2 set screws. Install prefabricated
compression post according to manufacturer's recommendations
F. Locate system on room axis according to reflected plan
G Do not eccentrically load system, or produce rotation of runners
H Install edge molding at intersection of ceiling and vertical surfaces, using longest practical lengths Miter
corners. Provide edge moldings at junctions with other interruptions
3 3 INSTALLATION - ACOUSTIC UNITS
A. Field rabbet cut edge of perimeter tiles to match factory rabbeted edge Paint cut surface if necessary to
match surface of tile
WLC/0414200 SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 09511
(3)
REV 01/04
B Fit acoustic units in place, free from damaged edges or other defects detrimental to appearance and
function.
C. Lay directional patterned units one way in room Fit border neatly against abutting surfaces
D Install acoustic units level, in uniform plane, and free from twist, warp and dents
34 TOLERANCES
A Maintain tolerances in accordance with Section 01450
B. Variation from flat and level surface: 1/8 inch in 10 feet
C. Variation from plumb of grid members caused by eccentric loads' Two degrees maximum.
END OF SECTION
WLC/0414200 SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 09511
(4)
REV 01/04
SECTION 09650
RESILIENT FLOORING
1 PART1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A Resilient top set base
B Resilient stair, nosings, treads, risers, and skirting
1 2 REFERENCES
A ADAAG - Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities
B CBC - California Building Code, (CCR) California Code of Regulations, Title 24, Part 2, California State
Accessibility Standards.
C ASTM D2047 - Static Coefficient of Friction of Polish-Coated Floor Surfaces as Measured by the James
Machine
D. ASTM E648 - Test Method for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor-Covering Systems using a Radiant Energy
Source
E ASTM E662 - Test Method for Specific Optical Density of Smoke Generated by Solid Materials
F ASTM F710 - Practice for Preparing Concrete Floors and other Monolithic Floors to Receive Resilient
Flooring
G ASTM F1861 - Standard Specification for Resilient Wall Base
H ASTM F1869 - Standard Test Method for Measuring Moisture Vapor Emission Rate of Concrete Subfloor
Using Anhydrous Calcium Chloride
I FS RR-T-650 - Treads, Metallic and Non-metallic, Non-skid
1 3 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A Resilient flooring to comply with the following fire performance characteristics as determined by testing
products per ASTM test method indicated below
1 Critical Radiant Flux 0 45 watts per sq cm or more per ASTM E648
2 Smoke Density: Less than 450 per ASTM E662
B Products supplied for tile installation shall comply with local regulations controlling use of volatile organic
compounds (VOC)
C Resilient flooring products shall have a coefficient of friction when tested according to ASTM D2047 of 0 60
for flat floors and 0 80 for ramped surfaces
D. Conform to CBC, California Building Code, (CCR) Title 24, Part 2, and ADAAG for accessibility
requirements.
1 4 SUBMITTALS
A Submit samples under provisions of Section 01330
B. Submit two samples 3x3 inches in size, illustrating color and pattern for each floor material specified.
C. Submit two 2 inch long samples of base and stair material for each material specified
WLC/0414200 RESILIENT FLOORING 09650
(1)
REV 06/04
1 5 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A Submit cleaning and maintenance data under provisions of Section 01770
B Include maintenance procedures, recommended maintenance materials, and suggested schedule for
cleaning, stripping, and re-waxing
1 6 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A Concrete subfloor to be allowed to cure for a minimum of 90 days to achieve acceptable dryness
B Store materials for three days prior to installation in area of installation to achieve temperature stability.
C Maintain ambient temperature required by adhesive manufacturer three days prior to, during, and 24 hours
after installation of materials.
D Subfloor Moisture Conditions Moisture emission rate of no more than 3 lb/1000 sq ft./24 hours when tested
by Quantitive Anhydrous Calcium Chloride Test, ASTM F1869, with subfloor temperature not less than
65 degrees F
E Subfloor Alkalinity Conditions A pH range of between 5 to 9 when subfloor is wetted with potable water and
pHdnon paper is applied
2 PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS - STAIR COVERING MATERIALS
A Roppe Corporation, www roppe com.
B Activa (Pirelli), www rubberfloormg.com
C Allstate Rubber Corporation, www.muchocolors com
D Burke Flooring Products, www burkemercer com.
E Endura, www endura-floormg com
F Flexco Company, www flexcofloors.com
G Freudenberg Building Systems, Inc., (Nora), www norarubber com
H Johnsonite, www johnsonite com
I R C Musson Rubber Co , Inc , www mussonrubber.com
J RCA Rubber Co , www rcarubber.com.
K Substitutions Under provisions of Section 01630
2 2 STAIR COVERING MATERIALS
A Stair Coverings Equivalent to the raised circular vantage with integral riser by Roppe Corporation.
B Stair Treads. FS RR-T-650, Type 2 raised circular pattern, Composition A Rubber, 1/4 inch thick, full width
and depth of stair tread in one piece; return down edge of tread 1-3/4 inch with tapered thickness. Two inch
visual warning strip of contrasting color and texture on top and bottom tread
C Stair Risers. Composition A, Rubber, maintain height and length in one piece.
D Stair Skirting. Sheet rubber; 100 inch thick, maintain width sufficient to provide 4 inches above stair nose,
measured perpendicular to stair slope.
WLC/0414200 RESILIENT FLOORING 09650
(2)
REV 06/04
E Landing Tiles Composition A rubber, 3/16 inch thick, pattern to match stair treads, 12x12 inches
F Color As selected by Architect from manufacturer's complete range
2 3 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - BASE MATERIALS
A Allstate Rubber Corporation, www muchocolors.com
B. Armstrong World Industries, www.armstrongfloors com.
C Burke Flooring Products, www burkemercer.com
D Flexco Company, www flexcofloors com
E. Johnsonite, www johnsonite com.
F. R C. Musson Rubber Co , Inc , www mussonrubber com
G Roppe Corporation, www roppe.com.
H VPI, LLC, www.vpifloonng com
I Substitutions. Under provisions of Section 01630
2 4 BASE MATERIALS
A Base: ASTM F1861, Type TS rubber; Group 1 solid; Style B coved, 4 inch high, 0 125 inch thick, top set,
in maximum practical lengths
B Color As selected by Architect from manufacturer's complete range Up to four different colors will be
selected for use in varying amounts at all base locations
25 ACCESSORIES
A Subfloor Filler White premix latex, type recommended by flooring material manufacturer
B Primers and Adhesives Waterproof; types recommended by flooring manufacturer Shall meet South Coast
Air Quality Management District ( SCAQMD) Rule #1168
C. Edge Strips Rubber .
D Sealer and Wax Types recommended by flooring manufacturer
3 PARTS EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A Verify that concrete slabs comply with ASTM F710 and are as specified herein
B Verify concrete floors exhibit acceptable moisture emission rate, exhibit negative alkalinity, carbonization,
or dusting.
C. Verify that surfaces are smooth and flat and are ready to receive Work
D Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing substrate and site conditions.
3 2 PREPARATION
A Remove sub-floor ridges and bumps Fill low spots, cracks, joints, holes, and other defects with subfloor
filler.
B Apply, trowel, and float filler to leave a smooth, flat, hard surface.
WLC/0414200 RESILIENT FLOORING 09650
(3)
REV 06/04
C Prohibit traffic from area until filler is cured
D. Vacuum clean substrate.
E Apply primer to concrete slab surfaces if recommended by flooring manufacturer
3 3 INSTALLATION - BASE MATERIAL
A Fit joints tight and vertical
B Install material in maximum practical lengths.
C Maintain minimum measurement of 18 inches between joints
D Miter internal corners.
E Field wrap external comers with longest practical lengths "V" cut back surface to 2/3 its thickness
F Install base on solid backing. Bond tight to wall and floor surfaces
G Scribe and fit to door frames and other interruptions
34 INSTALLATION - STAIR COVERING MATERIALS
A Install stair nosing, stair treads, and stair risers one piece for full width and depth of tread
B Install stair skirting configured tight to stair and stringer profile
C Adhere over entire surface. Fit accurately and securely
3.5 PROTECTION
A Prohibit traffic on floor finish for 48 hours after installation
3 6 CLEANING
A Remove excess adhesive from floor, base, and wall surfaces without damage
B Clean, seal, and wax floor and base surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's instructions
END OF SECTION
WLC/0414200 RESILIENT FLOORING 09650
(4)
REV 06/04
SECTION 09688
CARPET GLUE-DOWN
1 PART1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Carpeting installed by glue down method.
B Accessories
1.2 REFERENCES
A ASTM D1335 - Tuft Bind of Pile Floor Coverings '
- B ASTM E648 - Critical Radiant Flux of Floor Covering Systems Using a Radiant Heat Energy Source
C. ASTM E662 - Specific Optical Density of Smoke Generated by Solid Materials.
D ASTM F1869 - Standard Test Method for Measuring Moisture Vapor Emission Rate of Concrete Subfloor
Using Anhydrous Calcium Chloride.
E CBC - California Building Code (CCR) California Code of Regulations, Title 24, Part 9
F CR1104 - Carpet and Rug Institute Standard for Installation of Commercial Textile Floorcovermg Materials
G NFPA - National Fire Protection Association.
H FCIB - Floor Covering Installation Board
1 3 SUBMITTALS
A Provide product data on specified products, describing physical characteristics, sizes, patterns, colors
available, and method of installation
B Submit samples under provisions of Section 01330.
C Submit two samples 12x12 inch in size illustrating color and pattern for each carpet material specified
1 4 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A Submit maintenance data under provisions of Section,01770 J
B Include maintenance procedures, recommended maintenance materials, and suggested schedule for
cleaning and shampooing
1 5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A Perform work in accordance with CR1104
B. Maintain one copy of document on site
C Manufacturer: Company specializing in carpet manufacturing with ten years minimum experience
D Installer FCIB certified or demonstrate ability to comply with FCIB certification procedures
E Carpet shall have an average tuft bind of 20 pounds when tested in accordance with ASTM D1335.
F Carpet shall bear CRI Indoor Air Quality Carpet Testing Program label v,
WLC/0414200 CARPET GLUE-DOWN 09688
(1)
REV 06/04
1 6 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to CBC - California Building Code, (CCR) California Code of Regulations, Title 24, Part 9,
Appendix IV-A for Class 1 floor finish flammability requirements
B. Floor covering to have a NFPA Class I rating with a minimum radiant flux of 0 45 watt per square centimeter
when tested in accordance with ASTM E648
C Floor covering to have a smoke developed rating of less than 450 when tested in accordance with
ASTM C662
1 7 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, and protect products to site under provisions of Section 01600
B. Comply with requirements of CRI 104 Section 5
1.8 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS
A. Comply with requirements of CRI 104, Section 7.
B Concrete subfloor to be allowed to cure for a minimum of 90 days to achieve acceptable dryness.
C Store materials for three days prior to installation in area of installation to achieve temperature stability
D Maintain minimum 70 degrees F and maximum 95 degrees F ambient temperature with relative humidity
between 10 and 65 percent three days prior to, during, and after installation of materials
E Subfloor Moisture Conditions Moisture emission rate equal to or less than 3 Ib /1000 sq ft /24 hours when
tested by calcium chloride moisture test, ASTM F1869, in compliance with CRI 104, Section 7.10 1, with
subfloor temperature not less than 65 degrees F
F Subfloor Alkalinity Conditions A pH range of between 5 to 9 when subfloor is wetted with potable water and
pHdnon paper is applied
1 9 WARRANTY
A. Provide manufacturer's standard lifetime warranty under provisions of Section 01770
B. Performance Warranty Manufacturer's lifetime warranty covering delammation of secondary backing, edge
ravel and tuft bind of carpet under both wet and dry conditions
C 'Wear Warranty Manufacturer's lifetime warranty that carpet will lose no more than 10 percent by weight
of face yarn
2 PART 2 PRODUCTS
2 1 MANUFACTURERS
/
A Lees Commercial Carpet Co., Style Aspire with Unibond RE backing, www.leescarpet com.
Color 111 Desert Lily.
B Substitutions Under provisions of Section 01630
2.2 MATERIALS
A Tufted or woven carpet conforming to published specification characteristics of named manufacturer as
modified by requirements specified in this section
WLC/0414200 CARPET GLUE-DOWN 09688
(2)
REV 06/04
2 3 ACCESSORIES
A Sub-Floor Filler. White premix latex; type recommended by carpet manufacturer
B Primers and Adhesives Waterproof, of types recommended by carpet manufacturer Shall meet South
Coast Air Quality Management District (SCAQMD) Rule 1168
C. Edge Strips Vinyl type, color as selected by Architect from manufacturer's complete range
3 PART 3 EXECUTION
3 1 EXAMINATION
A 1 Examine subfloors and conditions for compliance with requirements for moisture content, alkalinity range
and other conditions affecting performance of carpet
B Verify that subfloor surfaces are smooth and flat and are ready to receive work.
C Beginning of installation means acceptance of subfloor and site conditions
3 2 PREPARATION
A Remove subfloor coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that are incompatible with
adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone.
B Remove subfloor ridges and bumps. Fill low spots, cracks, joints, holes, and other defects with sub-floor
filler.
C Apply, trowel, and float filler to leave smooth, flat, hard surface
D Prohibit traffic until filler is cured
E Apply subfloor primer compatible with adhesive where recommended by carpet manufacturer
F Vacuum floor surface
3 3 INSTALLATION
A Apply carpet and adhesive in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and CRI 104, Section 9
B Verify carpet match before cutting to ensure minimal variation between dye lots
C Double cut carpet, to allow intended seam and pattern match Make cuts straight, true, and unfrayed
D Locate seams in area of least traffic.
E At doorways, center seams under door in closed position
F Fit seams straight, not crowded or peaked, free of gaps.
G Lay carpet on floors with run of pile in same direction as anticipated traffic
H Do not change run of pile in any room where carpet is continuous through a wall opening into another room
I Locate change of color or pattern between rooms under door centerlme
J Extend carpet into toe spaces, door reveals, open-bottomed obstructions, alcoves and similar openings
K Cut and fit carpet around interruptions
L Fit carpet tight to intersection with vertical surfaces without gaps.
WLC/0414200 CARPET GLUE-DOWN 09688
(3)
3.4 CLEANING
A Remove excess adhesive from floor, base, and wall surfaces without damage
B. Vacuum carpet surfaces
3.5 PROTECTION
A Comply with requirements of CRI 104, Section 16
B. Prohibit traffic from carpet areas for 24 hours after installation.
END OF SECTION
WLC/0414200 CARPET GLUE-DOWN 09688
(4)
REV 06/04
SECTION 09900
PAINTING
1 PART1 GENERAL
1 1 SECTION INCLUDES
A Surface preparation.
B. Products and application
C Surface finish schedule
1 2 REFERENCES
A ASTM D16 - Definitions of Terms Relating to Paint, Varnish, Lacquer, and Related Products.
B. ASTM D2016 - Test Method for Moisture Content of Wood
1 3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A Preparation of all surfaces to receive final finish.
B. Painting and finishing work of this section using coating systems of materials including primers, sealers,
fillers, and other applied materials whether used as prime, intermediate, or finish coats
C Surface preparation, priming, and finish coats specified in this Section are in addition to shop-priming and
surface treatment specified under other Sections.
D Painting and finishing all exterior and interior surfaces of materials including structural, mechanical, and
electrical work on site, in building spaces, and above or on the roof
E Paint exposed surfaces except where a surface or material is specifically indicated not to be painted or is
to remain natural Where an item or surface is not specifically mentioned, paint the same as similar adjacent
materials or surfaces
1 4 DEFINITIONS
A Conform to ASTM D16 for interpretation of terms used in this Section
1 5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A Product Manufacturer* Company specializing in manufacturing quality paint and finish products with five
years experience
B Applicator: Company specializing in commercial painting and finishing with five years documented
experience
C Regulatory Requirements' Comply with applicable codes and regulations of governmental agencies having
jurisdiction including those having jurisdiction over airborne emissions and industrial waste disposal Where
those requirements conflict with this specification, comply with the more stringent provisions Comply with
the current applicable regulations of the California Air Resources Board (CARB) and the Environmental
Protection Agency (EPA).
D Coats' The number of coats specified is the minimum number acceptable If full coverage is not obtained
with the specified number of coats, apply such additional coats as are necessary to produce the required
finish.
E. Employ coats and undercoats for all types of finishes in strict accordance with the recommendations of the
paint manufacturer
WLC/041420Q PAINTING 09900
(D
F Provide primers and undercoat paint produced by the same manufacturer as the finish coat
1 6 SUBMITTALS
A Submit product data under provisions of Section 01330
B Provide manufacturer's technical information and instructions for application of each material proposed for
use by catalog number.
C List each material by catalog number and cross-reference specific coating with specified finish system
D Provide manufacturer's certificate that products proposed meet or exceed specified materials
E Submit samples under provisions of Section 01330
F Submit two samples 8-1/2x11 inch in size of each paint color applied to cardboard Resubmit samples until
acceptable color and sheen is obtained
G On same species and quality of wood to be installed, submit two 4x8 inch samples showing system to be
used.
1 7 FIELD SAMPLES
A. Provide field samples under provisions of Section 01330
B. On wall surfaces and other exterior and interior components, duplicate specified finishes on at least 100
sq.ft. of surface area
C Provide full-coat finishes until required coverage, sheen, color and texture are obtained.
D Simulate finished lighting conditions for review of field samples.
E After finishes are accepted, the accepted surface may remain as part of the work and will be used to
evaluate subsequent coating systems applications of a similar nature
1 8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver products to site and store and protect under provisions of Section 01600
B Deliver products to site in sealed and labelled containers, inspect to verify acceptance
C Container labelling to include manufacturer's name, type of paint, brand name, brand code, coverage,
surface preparation, drying time, cleanup, color designation, and instructions for mixing and reducing Paint
containers not displaying product identification will not be acceptable.
D. Store paint materials at minimum ambient temperature of 45 degrees F (7 degrees C) and a maximum of
90 degrees F (32 degrees C), in well ventilated area, unless required otherwise by manufacturer's
instructions.
E. Take precautionary measures to prevent fire hazards and spontaneous combustion
1 9 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A Provide continuous ventilation and heating facilities to maintain surface and ambient temperatures above
45 degrees F for 24 hours before, during, and 48 hours after application of finishes, unless required
otherwise by manufacturer's instructions.
B Do not apply exterior coatings during ram or snow, or when relative humidity is above 50 percent, unless
required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions
WLC/0414200 PAINTING 09900
(2)
REV 01/04
C. Minimum Application Temperatures for Latex Paints: 45 degrees F for interiors; 50 degrees F for exterior,
unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions.
D Minimum Application Temperature for Varnish and Urethane Finishes: 65 degrees F for interior or exterior,
unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions.
E. Provide lighting level of 80 feet candles measured mid-height at substrate surface.
1 10 EXTRA MATERIAL
A., Provide a one gallon unopened container of each color to Owner
B Label each container with color, texture, and room locations in addition to the manufacturer's label
1 11 WARRANTY
A. - All "Deep Tore" colors shall be warranted for 10-year color retention with a delta loss of no more than 75 cie
lab units.
2 PART 2 PRODUCTS
2 1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - PAINT
A. Unless specifically identified otherwise, product designations included at end of section are those of the
Dunn-Edwards Corporation, www.dunnedwards com and shall serve as the standard for kind, quality, and
function.
B Subject to compliance with requirements, other manufacturers offering equivalent products are
1. Benjamin Moore Paints, www.benjammmoore com.
2 Frazee Paint (McCloskey, Ameron), www.frazeepamt com
3. ICI Paint Stores, www iciduluxpamts com
4. Kelly-Moore Paint Company, www.kellymoore com
5. Pittsburgh Paints, www.ppg com
6. Sherwin Williams, www.sherwm-williams com
7 Spectra-Tone Paint Corp., www spectra-tone com
8. Tnemec Company, Inc, www tnemec.com - •
9. Vista Paint Corporation, www.vistapamt.com
C. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01630.
22 MATERIALS
A Ready mixed, except field catalyzed coatings Process pigments to a soft paste consistency, capable of
being readily and uniformly dispersed to a homogeneous coating.
B. Good flow and brushing properties; capable of drying or curing free of streaks or sags
C "Deep Tone" colors to be composed of 100 percent acrylic pigments, factory ground, with a colored base
D Accessory Materials Linseed oil, shellac, turpentine, paint thmners and other materials not specifically
indicated but required to achieve the finishes specified, of commercial quality
WLC/0414200 PAINTING 09900
(3)
REV 01/04
2 3 FINISHES
A Refer to schedule at end of Section for surface finish schedule
3. PARTS EXECUTION
31 INSPECTION
A. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work as instructed by the product manufacturer.
B Examine surfaces to be finished prior to commencement of work Report any condition that may potentially
affect proper application.
C Measure moisture content of surfaces using an electronic moisture meter Do not apply finishes unless
moisture content of surfaces are below the following maximums'
1 Plaster and Gypsum Wallboard . 12 percent
2 Interior Located Wood 15 percent, measured in accordance with ASTM D2016
3 Exterior Located Wood • 15 percent, measured m accordance with ASTM D2016
D. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing surfaces.
3.2 SURFACE PREPARATION
A Remove electrical plates, hardware, light fixture trim, and fittings prior to preparing surfaces or finishing
B Remove all finish hardware from doors and frames prior to preparing surfaces or finishing
C Correct minor defects and clean surfaces which affect work of this Section
D Shellac and seal marks which may bleed through surface finishes
E Gypsum Board" Repair all voids, nicks, cracks and dents with patching materials and finish flush with
adjacent surface Latex fill minor defects Spot prime defects after repair
F Galvanized Surfaces Remove surface contamination and oils and wash with solvent Pretreat with
phosphoric acid etch or vinyl wash. Apply coat of etching primer the same day as pretreatment is applied
G Uncoated Steel and Iron Remove grease, scale, dirt, and rust Where heavy coatings of scale are evident,
remove by wire brushing or sandblasting, clean by washing with solvent Apply a treatment of phosphoric
acid solution, ensuring weld joints, bolts, and nuts are similarly cleaned Prime paint after repairs
H Shop Primed Steel. Sand and scrape to remove loose primer and rust. Feather edges to make touch-up
patches inconspicuous Clean surfaces with solvent Prime paint steel surfaces.
I Interior Wood: Wipe off dust and grit prior to priming Seal knots, pitch streaks, and sappy sections with
sealer Fill nail holes and cracks after primer has dried; sand between coats
J Wood Doors- Seal top and bottom edges with 2 coats of Spar varnish sealer
K Exterior Wood. Remove dust, grit, and foreign matter. Seal knots, pitch streaks, and sappy sections. Fill nail
holes with tinted exterior caulking compound after prime coat has been applied
3 3 PROTECTION OF ADJACENT WORK
A. Protect elements surrounding the work of this Section from damage or disfiguration.
B Repair damage to other surfaces caused by work of this Section
WLC/0414200 PAINTING 09900
(4)
REV 01/04
C Furnish drop cloths, shields, and protective methods to prevent spray or droppings from disfiguring other
surfaces
D. Remove empty paint containers from site.
34 WORK NOT TO BE PAINTED
A Painting is not required on surfaces in concealed and inaccessible areas such as furred spaces, foundation
spaces, utility tunnels, pipe spaces and duct shafts
B Do not paint metal surfaces such as stainless steel, chromium plate, brass, bronze, and similar finished
metal surfaces
C. Do not paint anodized aluminum or other surfaces which are specified to be factory pre-fmished
D Do not paint sandblasted or architecturally finished concrete surfaces
E Do not paint prefmished acoustic materials or acoustic suspension systems.
F Do not paint over Underwriters Laboratories, Factory Mutual or other code-required labels or identifications
35 APPLICATION
A Apply products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions
B Do not apply finishes to surfaces that are not dry
C Apply prime coat to surfaces which are to be painted or finished
D. Apply each coat to uniform finish.
E Apply each coat of paint slightly darker than preceding coat unless otherwise approved
F Sand lightly between coats to achieve required finish
G Allow applied coat to dry before next coat is applied
H The number of coats specified is the minimum that shall be applied Apply additional coats when
undercoats, stains or other conditions show through final paint coat, until paint film is of uniform finish, color
and appearance
I Where clear finishes are required, tint fillers to match wood Work fillers into the gram before set. Wipe
excess from surface
J Prime back surfaces of interior and exterior woodwork with primer paint.
K Prime back surfaces of interior woodwork scheduled to receive stain or varnish finish with gloss varnish
reduced 25 percent with mineral spirits.
L Paint mill finished door seals to match door or frame
M Paint primed steel glazing stops in doors to match door or frame.
N Cloudiness, spotting, lap marks, brush marks, runs, sags, spikes and other surface imperfections will not
be acceptable
O Where spray application is used, apply each coat of the required thickness Do not double back to build up
film thickness of two coats in one pass. ^
P Where roller application is used, roll and redistribute paint to an even and fine texture. Leave no evidence
of roller laps, irregularity of texture, skid marks, or other surface imperfections.
WLC/0414200 PAINTING 09900
(5)
REV 01/04
3 6 FINISHING MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
A Refer to Division 15 and Division 16 for schedule of color coding and identification banding of equipment,
ductwork, piping, and conduit.
B Paint shop primed equipment Do not paint shop prefmished items unless noted otherwise
C Remove unfinished louvers, grilles, covers, and access panels on mechanical and electrical components
and paint separately.
D. Prime and paint insulated and exposed pipes, conduit, boxes, insulated and exposed ducts, hangers,
brackets, collars and supports, except where items are prefmished
E Replace identification markings on mechanical or electrical equipment when painted accidentally
F. Paint interior surfaces of air ducts, and connector and baseboard heating cabinets that are visible through
grilles and louvers with one coat of flat black paint, to limit of sight line Paint dampers exposed behind
louvers, grilles, and connector and baseboard cabinets to match face panels.
G Paint exposed conduit and electrical equipment occurring in finished areas.
H Paint both sides and edges of plywood backboards for electrical and telephone equipment before installing
equipment
I. Replace electrical plates, hardware, light fixture trim, and fittings removed prior to finishing
J Paint grilles, registers, and diffusers which do not match color of adjacent surface
K Paint all mechanical and electrical equipment, vents, fans, and the like occurring on roof
L Do not paint moving parts of operating units, mechanical or electrical parts such as valve operators,
linkages, sensing devices, and motor shafts
M Do not paint over labels or equipment identification markings
N Do not paint mechanical room specialties such as compressors, boilers, pumps, control panels, etc
O Do not paint switch plates, light fixtures, and fixture lenses
3 7 CLEANING
A As Work proceeds, promptly remove paint where spilled, splashed, or spattered
B During progress of Work maintain premises free of unnecessary accumulation of tools, equipment, surplus
materials, and debris
C Collect cotton waste, cloths, and material which may constitute a fire hazard, place in closed metal
containers and remove daily from site
3 8 PROTECTION OF COMPLETED WORK
A Protect finished installation under provisions of Section 01600
B Erect barriers and post warning signs. Maintain in place until coatings are fully dry.
C Confirm that no dust generating activities will occur following application of coatings
3 9 PATCHING
A. After completion of painting in any one room or area, repair surfaces damaged by other trades.
B Touch-up or re-finish as required to produce intended appearance
WLC/0414200 PAINTING 09900
(6)
REV 01/04
3 10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A Field inspection and testing will be performed under provisions of Section 01458
B. The Owner reserves the right to invoke the following test procedure at any time and as often as the Owner
deems necessary
C The Owner will engage the services of an independent testing agency to sample paint material being used.
D Samples of material delivered to the Project will be taken, identified, sealed, and certified in the presence
of the Contractor
E. The testing agency will perform appropriate quantitive materials analysis and other characteristic testing
of materials as required by the Owner.
F If test results show materials being used and their installation do not comply with specified requirements
or manufacturer's recommendations, the Contractor may be directed to stop painting, remove noncomplymg
paint, pay for testing and repaint surfaces to acceptable condition
3 11 COLOR SCHEDULE
A Paint and finish colors shall be selected by the Architect from manufacturer's entire range of standard and
custom color selections and special colors selected to match or compliment the colors of other materials,
equipment, or components which comprise the work
B Access doors, registers, exposed piping, electrical conduit and mechanical/electrical panels. Generally the
same color as adjacent walls.
C. Exterior and interior steel doors, frames and trim Generally a contrasting color to adjacent walls.
D Doors generally are all the same color, but of a contrasting color from frame and trim
E. Exterior and interior steel fabrications- Generally a contrasting color to adjacent walls
F Exposed interior mechanical/ductwork Generally a contrasting color to adjacent walls or ceiling.
G Ceilings are generally to be painted a different color than walls
H Ten (10) different color schemes for painting of walls at each station
I Approximately 20 percent of overall painting work will be required to be "Deep Tone" colors. This work will
require one additional coat of paint beyond that as specified
J Finish of interior wood trim, wood doors and custom wood casework shall match
3 12 SCHEDULE - EXTERIOR SURFACES
A Steel - Primed or Unpnmed (Semi-Gloss Acrylic)
1 st coat: 43-5 Corrobar
2nd coat' " W901 Permasheen
3rd coat W901 Permasheen
B. Steel - Primed or Unpnmed (Gloss-Acrylic)
1st coat 43-5 Corrobar
2nd coaf W960 Permagloss
3rd coat: W960 Permagloss
WLC/0414200 PAINTING 09900
(7)
REV 01/04
C. Steel - Galvanized (Semi-Gloss - Acrylic)
1st coat GE 123 Galva Etch, Etching Liquid
2nd coat Galv-Alum 43-7
3rd coat W901 Permasheen
4th coat W901 Permasheen
D Steel - Galvanized (Gloss - Acrylic)
1st coat GE 123 Galva Etch, Etching Liquid
2nd coat. Galv-Alum 43-7
3rd coat. W960 Permagloss
4th coat W960 Permagloss
3 13 SCHEDULE - INTERIOR SURFACES
A Wood-Transparent (Stam-Semi-Gloss Lacquer)
1 st coat: LQ122 Decolac (Laquer Stain)
2nd coat LQ140 Decolac (Sanding Sealer)
3rd coat: LQ142 Decolac (Lacquer)
4th coat. LQ142 Decolac (Lacquer)
B Steel - Primed or Unpnmed (Semi-Gloss-Acrylic)
1 st coat 43-5 Corrobar
2nd coat W901 Permasheen
3rd coat W901 Permasheen
C Steel - Galvanized (Semi-Gloss - Acrylic)
1st coat Galv-Alum 43-7
2nd coat W901 Permasheen
3rd coat W901 Permasheen
D Gypsum Board (Eggshell-Acrylic)
1st coat W101 Vmylastic
2nd coat W440 Decosheen
3rd coat W440 Decosheen
E Gypsum Board (Semi-Gloss - Acrylic)
1 st coat W101 Vmylastic
2nd coat W901 Permasheen
3rd coat W901 Permasheen
END OF SECTION
WLC/0414200 PAINTING 09900
(8)
REV 01/04
SECTION 10165
PLASTIC LAMINATE TOILET COMPARTMENTS
1. PART1 GENERAL
1 1 SECTION INCLUDES
A Plastic laminate toilet partitions, floor mounted with floor to ceiling pilaster brace
B Hardware.
C Attachments, screws and bolts
1 2 REFERENCES
A ADAAG - Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities
B CBC - California Building Code, (CCR), California Code of Regulations, Title 24, Part 2, California State
Accessibility Standards
C. ANSI A208 1 - Mat Formed Wood Particleboard.
D ASTM A167 - Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip
E. NEMA LD-3 - High Pressure Decorative Laminates
1 3 SUBMITTALS
A Submit shop drawings under provisions of Section 01330
B Submit shop drawings indicating partition layout and dimensions, panel and door sizes, door swings,
elevations, anchorage and mounting details, and finishes
C Submit product data under provisions of Section 01330
D /Submit product data for components, hardware, and accessories
E Submit samples under provisions of Section 01330
F Submit two samples 4x4 inch in size illustrating panel colors
G Provide a sample of each type of hardware
H Submit manufacturer's installation instructions under provisions of Section 01330
1 4 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A Conform to CBC - California Building Code (CCR), Title 24, Part 2, and ADAAG for accessibility
requirements.
1 5 COORDINATION
A Coordinate work under provisions of Section 01310.
B Coordinate work with support framing, anchors, and blocking
C Coordinate work with placement of plumbing fixtures and floor drains
D. Coordinate work with placement of electrical fixtures and equipment.
WLC/0414200 PLASTIC LAMINATE TOILET COMPARTMENTS 10165
(1)
REV 01/04
E. Coordinate work with toilet accessories.
2 PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Accurate Partition Corp., www accuratepartitions com
B. Bobnck Washroom Equipment, Inc., www.bobrick.com
C Designnte Partitions, (314) 771-3080 No URL available
D. Global Steel Products Corp , www.globalpartitions com
E. Sanymetal Products Co., www.sanymetal com
F Substitutions Under provisions of Section 01630
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Wood Particle Board Core' ANSI A208.1, composed of wood shavings set with waterproof resin binder,
manufacturers standard grade, sanded faces.
B. Plastic Laminate NEMA LD-3, General Purpose Type 0.050 inch thick
C. Stainless Steel ASTM A167, Type 304
D. Adhesive' Contact type.
23 ACCESSORIES
A. Pilaster Shoe ASTM A167, Type 304 stainless steel, with adjustable screw jack
B Attachments, Screws, and Bolts Stainless steel, tamperproof type
C Through Bolts and Nuts Stainless steel with tamperproof heads
D Steel Plate Reinforcement Carbon steel, prepared for fasteners, 1/8 inch thick
2 4 HARDWARE
A Hinges Non-ferrous cast pivot hinges, gravity type, adjustable for door close positioning, nylon bearings
B Latch and Keeper, Standard Doors Slide bolt door latch, door strike and keeper with rubber bumper.
C. Latch and Keeper, Accessible Stall Doors. Lever handle with concealed latch
D. Coat Hook Cast alloy hook with rubber bumper tip.
E. Door Pull Heavy-duty chrome-plated U-shaped door pull
F. Panel Brackets: Heavy duty extruded aluminum brackets.
2.5 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate partitions by applying single sheet plastic laminate finish to faces and edges of core material using
adhesive and pressure bonding. Seal edges of cut-outs. Bevel corners and edges.
B Thickness of Partition Panels and Doors' One inch.
C. Thickness of Pilasters' 1-1/4 inch
WLC/0414200 PLASTIC LAMINATE TOILET COMPARTMENTS 10165
(2)
REV 01/04
D. Door Width 24 inch.
E. Door Width for Accessible Stalls- 32 inch front entry, 34 inch side entry.
F. Height. 58 inch.
G. Height from Floor. 12 inches
2 6 FINISHES
A Plastic Laminate: Finish color and pattern as selected by Architect from the Formica Laminate series
Laminate to match plastic faced wood doors specified in Section 08214
B Stainless Steel Surfaces. No 4 finish.
C Exposed Steel Surfaces: Polished chrome plated
D Aluminum Clear anodized
E Non-ferrous Surfaces' Polished chrome plated
3. PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A Verify that openings are ready to receive work.
B Verify field measurements are as shown on Drawings.
C Verify correct location of built-in framing, anchorage, bracing, electrical and plumbing fixtures
D Beginning of installation means installer accepts existing conditions
3 2 ERECTION
A Erect in accordance with manufacturer's instructions
B Install partition components secure, plumb and level
C Attach panel brackets securely to walls, floors and ceilings using appropriate anchor devices
D Attach panels and pilasters to brackets with through bolts and nuts
E Provide 1/2 inch space between wall surface and panels or pilasters
F Provide for adjustment of floor variations with screw jack through steel saddles integral with pilaster
Conceal floor fastenings with pilaster shoes.
G. Equip each toilet stall door with top and bottom hinges, door latch, and pull
H Equip each accessible toilet stall door with two pulls, one each side. Mount at a height of 3'-4" from floor
line to center of pull
I Install door strike keeper on each pilaster in alignment with door latch
J Equip each toilet stall door with one coat hook and bumper Mount at a height of 4'-0" from floor line to top
of hook
3.3 ERECTION TOLERANCES
A Maximum Variation From Plumb or Level 1/8 inch.
WLC/0414200 PLASTIC LAMINATE TOILET COMPARTMENTS 10165
(3)
REV 01/04
B Maximum Misplacement From Intended Position-1/8 inch
34 ADJUSTING
A Adjust work under provisions of Section 01770
B Adjust and align door hardware to uniform clearance at vertical edges of doors Clearance space not to
exceed 3/16 inch
C Adjust door hinges so that free movement is attained and will locate in-swinging doors in partial open
position when unlatched and will return out-swinging doors to closed position
3.5 CLEANING
A Clean work under provisions of Section 01770
B Remove protective coverings
C Clean surfaces and hardware.
3 6 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK
A Protect finished installation under provisions of Section 01600
B. Field touch-up of finished surfaces will not be permitted
i C Replace damaged or scratched materials with new materials
END OF SECTION
WLC/0414200 PLASTIC LAMINATE TOILET COMPARTMENTS 10165
(4)
REV 01/04
SECTION 10350
FLAGPOLES
1 PART1 GENERAL
1 1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Aluminum flagpoles.
B. Ground mount.
C. Halyards, accessories and flag(s).
12 REFERENCES
A AASHTO M-36 - Corrugated Metal Culvert Pipe
B ASTM B241 - Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Seamless Pipe and Seamless Extruded Tube.
1 3 PERFORMANCE
A. Pole With Flag Flying: Resistant without permanent deformation, 80 miles/hr wind velocity, non-resonant,
safety design factor of 2 5
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of Section 01330
B. Indicate on shop drawings, detailed dimensions, base details, anchor requirements, and imposed loads.
C. Provide product data on pole, accessories, and configurations
D Submit samples under provisions of Section 01330
E Submit two samples illustrating material, color, and finish
F Submit manufacturer's installation instructions under provisions of Section 01330
G Submit structural calculations, signed by a currently licensed California Structural Engineer, verifying wind
load requirements
1 5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A Deliver, store, and protect products under provisions of Section 01600
B Spiral wrap flagpole with protective covenng and pack in protective shipping tubes or containers.
C Protect flagpole and accessories on site from damage or moisture.
2 PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A Aabec Pole Division, Morgan Francis Co , www morganfrancis com
B. American Flagpole, www amencanflagpole com.
C. Concord Industries, Inc , www.flagpoles com
D. Flags and Banners Unlimited, (818) 348-9880 No URL available.
WLG/0414200 FLAGPOLES 10350
(D -
REV 01/04
E Substitutions Under provisions of Section 01630
22 POLE MATERIALS
A Aluminum. ASTM B241, 6063 alloy, T6 temper
23 POLE FABRICATION
A. Outside Butt Diameter: 7 inches
B Outside Top Diameter 3-1/2 inches
C. Type. Ground set, fixed type.
D Pole Design Cone tapered.
E. "Nominal Height 35 ft measured from ground
F Halyard External type
2 4 COMPONENTS AND ACCESSORIES
A Fmial Ball: Aluminum; 6 inch diameter
B. Truck Assembly. Cast aluminum, revolving, stainless steel ball-bearings, non-fouling
C Flag United States design, 5x8 feet standard size, 100 percent woven, two ply, spun polyester bunting.
D Cleats 9 inch size, cast aluminum with stainless steel fastenings, one per halyard
E Halyard. 5/16 inch diameter polypropylene, braided, white, with 1/16 inch diameter galvanized steel core
F Cleat Cover Cast aluminum with cylinder lock, one per cleat
G Halyard Cover Cast aluminum with cylinder lock, minimum 5'-0" in length.
H Connecting Sleeves For Multiple Section Poles Same material as pole, precision fit for field assembly of
pole, concealed fasteners
2.5 MOUNTING COMPONENTS
A Foundation Tube Sleeve. AASHTO M-36, corrugated 16 gage steel, galvanized
B. Pole Base Attachment Sleeve, with base cover
C Lightning Ground Rod 18 inch long copper rod, 3/4 inch diameter.
26 FINISHES
A. Metal Surfaces in Contact With Concrete: Asphaltic paint
B. Aluminum' Mill finish
C. Fmial. Mill finish.
WLC/0414200 FLAGPOLES 10350
(2)
REV 01/04
3 PARTS EXECUTION
3 1 INSPECTION
A. Verify that concrete foundation is ready to receive work and dimensions are as indicated on shop drawings
B. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Coat metal sleeve surfaces below grade and surfaces in contact with dissimilar materials with asphaltic
paint.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A Install flagpole, base assembly, and fittings in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B Electrically ground flagpole installation
34 TOLERANCES
A Maximum Variation From Plumb' One inch
3 5 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A Clean surfaces
B Adjust operating devices so that halyard and flag(s) function smoothly
END OF SECTION
WLC/0414200 FLAGPOLES 10350
(3)
REV 01/04
SECTION 10400
IDENTIFYING DEVICES
1 PART1 GENERAL
1 1 SECTION INCLUDES
A Plastic/acrylic signs
B Metal signs
C Metal letters and numbers
D Cast metal plaques
1.2 REFERENCES
A CBC - California Building Code, (CCR) California Code of Regulations, Title 24, Part 2
B ADAAG - Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities.
1 3 SUBMITTALS
A Submit shop drawings under provisions of Section 01330
B Submit shop drawings listing sign styles, lettering and locations, spacing and installation method
C Submit samples under provisions of Section 01330
D Submit two samples illustrating full size sample sign, of type, style and color specified including method of
attachment
E Submit manufacturer's installation instructions under provisions of Section 01330
F Include installation templates
1 4 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A Conform to CBC - California Building Code, (CCR), Title 24, Part 2 and ADAAG for accessibility
requirements
1 5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A Deliver, store, and protect products to site under provisions of Section 01600
B. Package signs, labelled in name groups.
1 6 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Do not install adhesive mounted signs when ambient temperature is below 70 degrees F Maintain this
minimum during and after installation of signs
2 PART 2 PRODUCTS
21 MANUFACTURERS
A Plastic Acrylic Signs.
1 Architectural Sign Identity, (909) 654-4350. No URL available.
)
WLC/0414200 IDENTIFYING DEVICES 10400
(1)
REV 01/04
2 ASI - Modulex, www.asimodulex.com
3 Best Manufacturing, www.bestsigns com
4. Bravo Sign and Design, www.bravosign com
5 CA Signs, www casigns.com
6 Mohawk Sign Systems, www mohawksign com
7 Neiman and Company, (818)764-3660 No URL available
8. Southwell Company, www southwellco.com
9. Vomar Products, Inc., www vomarproducts com
10. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01630.
B Metal Signs'
1 Flags and Banners Unlimited, (818)348-9880 No URL available
2 Four S Company, (877) 597-1288 No URL available
3. Traffic Control Service Inc , (800) 222-8274, www tci biz
4. Substitutions- Under provisions of Section 01630
C Metal Letters and Numbers
1 ARK Ramos, www arkramos com
2 ASI - Modulex, www asimodulex com.
3 Bravo Sign and Design, www bravosign com
4 Matthews, (800) 628-8439 No URL available
5. Metal Arts, Inc., www metalartslettersandplaques com
6. Nelson-Harkins Ind., www.nelson-harkms com
7 Neiman and Company, (818) 764-3660 No URL available.
8 Southwell Company, www southwellco.com
9. Vomar Products, Inc , www vomarproducts com
10. Substitutions Under provisions of Section 01630.
D. Cast Metal Plaques'
1 ARK Ramos, www.arkramos com
2 Bravo Sign and Design, www.bravosign com
3. Matthews, www matthewsbronze net
4. Metal Arts, Inc , www.metalartslettersandplaques.com
5 Metallic Arts, Inc , (562) 941-5340 No URL available.
WLC/0414200 IDENTIFYING DEVICES 10400
(2)
REV 01/04
6 Southwell Company, www southwellco com.
7. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01630
2.2 MANUFACTURED UNITS
A Plastic/Acrylic Signs
1 Restroom Doors. Acrylic plastic signs equivalent to that as detailed on the drawings, 12 inch circle and
triangle with international symbol of accessibility in accordance with CBC, California Building Code,
(CCR), Title 24, Part 2, Section 1115B.5 and 1117B.5.7
2 Building Entrance: Equivalent to Model No RFH55D, 5 inch square, reflective decal accessible sign
in accordance with CBC, California Building Code (CCR), Title 24, Part 2, Section 1127B3, as
manufactured by Flags and Banners Unlimited.
B Metal Signs
1. Van Parking Stall: Equivalent to Model No. RFH1218PB, 12 inch x 18 inch porcelain accessible sign
in accordance with CBC, California Building Code, (CCR), Title 24, Part 2, Section 1129B.5 and
separate 12 inch wide x 4 inch high porcelain sign with "Van-Accessible" wording in accordance with
ADAAG Article 4.6.4 with 2 inch diameter standard weight galvanized steel pipe post, as manufactured
by Flags and Banners Unlimited.
2. Auto Parking Stall: Equivalent to Model No RFH1218 PB, 12 inch x 18 inch porcelain accessible sign
in accordance with CBC, California Building Code, (CCR), Title 24, Part 2, Section 1129B.5, with
2 inch diameter standard weight galvanized steel pipe post, as manufactured by Flags and Banners
Unlimited
3 Drive Approach. Equivalent to Model No. RFH1824P, 18 x 24 inch porcelain tow-away sign with local
address and police phone number in accordance with CBC, California Building Code, (CCR), Title 24,
Part 2, Section 1129B.5 with 2 inch diameter standard weight galvanized steel pipe post, as
manufactured by Flags and Banners Unlimited
C Metal Letters and Numbers
1 Wall Mounted- Equivalent to the cast aluminum letters and numbers by Matthews Typeface as
selected by Architect, sizes and locations as indicated on the drawings. Projected mounting, 1/4 inch
clear. Acrylic urethane, low luster finish in custom color as selected by Architect
D Cast Metal Plaque:
1 Equivalent to the cast aluminum plaque by Matthews Optima typeface with leatherette background
and single line edge border style Text and plaque size as indicated on the drawings Invisible
mounting method. Baked enamel background finish in custom color as selected by the Architect. Fine
satin finish on border and letter faces
E Accessories: Provide all anchors, adhesives, and accessories for a complete installation
3 PART 3 EXECUTION
3 1 EXAMINATION
A Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work
B. Beginning of installation means installer accepts existing surfaces.
WLC/0414200 IDENTIFYING DEVICES 10400
(3)
REV 01/04
3.2 INSTALLATION
A Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. V ^/
B. Install true, plumb, level and adequately secured to substrate
C Clean and polish
END OF SECTION
WLC/0414200 IDENTIFYING DEVICES 10400
(4)
REV 01/04
SECTION 10503
METAL WARDROBE LOCKERS
1 PART 1 GENERAL
1 1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Locker units with hinged doors
B. Recess trim and filler panels.
C. Hooks, latches, and hardware
D. Attachment hardware.
1.2 REFERENCES
A ASTM A653 - Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-
Dip Process
B. ASTM A924 - General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot-Dip Process.
1 3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
^
A Lockers Recessed and surface mounted single tier lockers; on concrete base; with padlock hasps
1 4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of Section 01330.
B Include locker types, sizes, configurations, layout of groups of lockers, accessories, and numbering plan.
C Submit manufacturer's installation instructions under provisions of Section 01330.
D Submit samples under provisions of Section 01330
E Provide two samples 3x6 inches of each color selected on actual base material
1 5 PROTECTION
A Store and protect lockers under provisions of Section 01600
B. Protect locker finishes and adjacent surfaces from damage during installation
2 PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A DeBourgh Mfg Co , www all-amencan-lockers.com.
B List Industries, www listmdustnes com.
C Lyon Metal Products, www.lyon com.
D. Penco Products, www.pencoproducts com
E Republic Storage Systems, Co , www republicstorage com
F. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01630
WLC/0414200 METAL WARDROBE LOCKERS 10503
(D
REV 01/04
2 2 MATERIALS
A. Sheet Steel" ASTM A653, Grade 33, G60 galvanized coating according to ASTM A924; of the following
minimum thicknesses
1. Body • 16 gage with small diamond perforations
2. Doors • 14 gage with small diamond perforations
3 Door Frames 16 gage with small diamond perforations
4. Hinges • 14 gage with small diamond perforations
5. End Panels 16 gage with small diamond perforations
2.3 ACCESSORIES
A. Provide hat shelf and hanger bar
B. Provide metal number plates
C. Provide each locker with four double prong wall hooks, two at back and one at each side
D Provide recessed single point locking handle for padlock Locking device supplied by Owner
2.4 FABRICATION
A Locker Unit 18 inches wide x 24 inches deep x 72 inches high in size, single tier Total overall height of 72
inches
B Bodies Formed and flanged with stiffener ribs, electrically spot welded
C Door Frame Formed channel shape, welded and ground flush, welded to body
D Doors 1-3/16 inch thickness, channel reinforced top and bottom with intermediate stiffener ribs Finish
edges smooth
E. Hinges Three for doors 42 inches and higher, two for doors under 42 inches high Weld securely to unit
body and rivet to unit door
F Provide perforated end panels, filler panels, and recess trim to close off all openings.
G Finish edges smooth without burrs
25 FINISHES
A. Clean, degrease, and neutralize metal, prime and finish with two coats of electrostatic baked on
polyester/epoxy enamel
B Paint locker doors and bodies in one color throughout
C. Color: As selected from manufacturer's complete range
3 PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A Verify concrete bases are properly sized and located
3.2 INSTALLATION
A Install lockers secure, plumb, square, and in line Set on prepared concrete base provided
B. Anchor lockers with appropriate anchor devices to suit materials encountered. ' ^
WLC/0414200 METAL WARDROBE LOCKERS 10503
(2)
REV 01/04
C Bolt adjoining locker units together to provide rigid installation
D Install end panels, filler panels, and recess trim to completely close off openings
E. Install accessories as specified for each locker
END OF SECTION
WLC/0414200 METAL WARDROBE LOCKERS 10503
(3)
REV 01/04
SECTION 10520
FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES
1 PART1 GENERAL
1 1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Fire extinguishers
B Non-rated cabinets.
C Accessories.
1 2 REFERENCES
A NFPA 10 - Portable Fire Extinguishers.
B CFC - California Fire Code, (CCR) California Code of Regulations, Title 24, Part 9.
C Title 19, State Fire Marshal Regulations.
1 3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A Conform to NFPA 10 requirements.
1 4 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A Conform to requirements of the CFC and Title 19 - State Fire Marshal Regulations, Chapter 3
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit product data under provisions of Section 01330
B Include physical dimensions, operational features, color and finish, mounting and anchorage details, rough-
in measurements, location, and details.
C Submit manufacturer's installation instructions under provisions of Section 01330
1 6 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A Submit manufacturer's operation and maintenance data under provisions of Section 01770
B Include test, refill or recharge schedules, procedures, and re-certification requirements
1 7 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A Do not install extinguishers when ambient temperatures may cause freezing.
2 PART2 PRODUCTS
2 1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A Amerex Corporation, www.amerex-fire com.
B. J. L Industries, wwwjlmdustnes.com.
C Larsen's Mfg Co., www larsensmfg.com.
D Potter-Roemer, Inc., www potterroemer com.
WLC/0414200 FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES 10520
(D
REV 01/04 i
E. Substitutions Under provisions of Section 01630.
2.2 EXTINGUISHERS
A Dry Chemical Type EquivalenttoJ.L Industries Cosmic Model 5E, UL2A.1 OB C nominal capacity with HFC
blend agent and inert material in enameled-steel container, with pressure-indicating gage.
2.3 CABINETS
v A Non-ratedcabmetsequivalenttoJ.L Industries Embassy Model 5614521 with prime coated cold-rolled steel
door and epoxy coated tub
2 4 FABRICATION
A Form body of cabinet with tight inside corners and seams
B Fabricate body of fire rated cabinet of double wall construction filled with a 5/8 inch thick layer of protective
fire barrier insulation.
C Prednll holes for anchorage
D Form perimeter trim by welding, filling, and grinding smooth
E. Hinge doors for 180 degree opening with continuous piano hinge Provide nylon catch
2.5 FINISHES
A Extinguisher Red enamel
/
B Cabinet Trim and Door Primed Site paint under provisions of Section 09900
3 PART 3 EXECUTION
3 1 INSPECTION
A Verify rough openings for cabinet are correctly sized and located
B Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions
3.2 INSTALLATION i
A Install cabinets plumb and level in wall openings.
B Secure rigidly in place in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
END OF SECTION
WLC/0414200 FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES 10520
(2)
REV 01/04
SECTION 10810
TOILET ACCESSORIES
1 PART1 GENERAL
1 1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Toilet, shower, and washroom accessories.
B Framed mirror units
C Concealed anchor devices and backing plate reinforcements furnished to other Sections.
D. Attachment hardware
1 2 REFERENCES
j
A ADAAG - Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities
B CBC - California Building Code, (CCR) California Code of Regulations, Title 24, Part 2, California State
Accessibility Standards
C ASTM A123 - Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Products Fabricated from Rolled, Pressed, and Forged
Steel Shapes, Plates, Bars and Strips
D. ASTM A167 - Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet and Strip
E ASTM A366 - Steel, Carbon, Cold-Rolled Sheet, Commercial Quality.
F ASTM A386 - Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Assembled Steel Products
G ASTM B456 - Electrodeposited Coatings of Copper Plus Nickel Plus Chromium and Nickel Plus Chromium
H ASTM A269,- Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Tubing for General Service.
1 3 SUBMITTALS
A Submit product data under provisions of Section 01330
B Provide product data on accessories describing size, finish, details of function, attachment methods
C Submit manufacturer's installation instructions under provisions of Section 01330
1 4 KEYING
A. Supply two keys for each accessory to Owner.
B Master key all accessories
1.5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A Conform to CBC, California Building Code, (CCR) Title 24, Part 2, and ADAAG for accessibility
requirements
1.6 COORDINATION
A Coordinate the work of this Section under provisions of Section 01310
B Coordinate the work of this Section with the placement of internal wall reinforcement and reinforcement of
toilet partitions to receive anchor attachments.
WLC/0414200 TOILET ACCESSORIES 10810
(D
REV 01/04
2 PART 2 PRODUCTS
2 1 MANUFACTURERS
A Bobnck Washroom Equipment, Inc , www bobnck com
B American Specialties, Inc (ASI), www amencanspecialties com
C Bradley Corporation, www bradleycorp.com.
D Substitutions' Under provisions of Section 01630
2.2 MATERIALS
A Sheet Steel ASTM A366.
B. Stainless Steel Sheet- ASTM A167, Type 304.
C Tubing ASTM A269, stainless steel, Type 304
D Adhesive: Two component epoxy type waterproof
E Fasteners, Screws, and Bolts- Hot dip galvanized, tamperproof
F Expansion Shields- Fiber, lead, or rubber as recommended by accessory manufacturer for component and
substrate
2.3 FABRICATION
A Weld and grind smooth joints of fabricated components
B Form exposed surfaces from single sheet of stock, free of joints
C Form surfaces flat without distortion Maintain flat surfaces without scratches or dents
D Back paint components where contact is made with building finishes to prevent electrolysis
E j Shop assemble components and package complete with anchors and fittings
F Provide steel anchor plates, adapters, and anchor components for installation.
G Hot dip galvanize exposed and painted ferrous metal and fastening devices.
2 4 FACTORY FINISHING
A Galvanizing. ASTM A123 to 1.25 oz/sq yd.
B Shop Primed Ferrous Metals. Pretreat and clean, spray apply one coat primer and bake.
C Enamel Pretreat to clean condition, apply one coat primer and minimum two coats electrostatic baked
enamel
D Chrome/Nickel Plating: ASTM B456, Type SC 2 polished finish
E. Stainless Steel' No 4 satin luster finish.
F Mirror Glass FSDD-G-451 Type I, Class 1, Quality of 2,1/4 inch thick with silver coating, copper protective
coating and non metallic paint coating complying with FS DD-M-411
G. "> Stainless Steel Mirror: Type 430, 20 gage, bright annealed stainless steel.
WLC/0414200 TOILET ACCESSORIES 10810
(2)
REV 01/04
3 PARTS EXECUTION
3 1 EXAMINATION
A Verify that site conditions are ready to receive work and dimensions are as instructed by the manufacturer
B. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions
3.2 PREPARATION
A Deliver inserts and rough-in frames to site at appropriate time for buildmg-m
B Provide templates and rough-in measurements as required
C Verify exact location of accessories for installation
33 INSTALLATION
A Install fixtures, accessories and items in accordance with manufacturers' instructions
B Install plumb and level, securely and rigidly anchored to substrate
END OF SECTION
WLC/0414200 TOILET ACCESSORIES 10810
(3)
REV 01/04
SECTION 11005
MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT
1 PART1 GENERAL
1 1 SECTION INCLUDES
A Range and accessories.
B. Range hood and accessories.
C. Refrigerators
D Dishwashers.
E. Automatic icemaker.
F. Microwave ovens
G. Washer and dryer.
H. Ceiling fans
I. Access panel
J Television brackets.
K Barbeque
L. Air tank straps.
M. Steel shelving system
N. Shower doors
O Wall guards
P. Resilient athletic flooring.
1 2 REFERENCES
A. ADAAG - Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities
B CBC - California Building Code, (CCR) California Code of Regulations, Title 24, Part 2
1 3 SUBMITTALS
A Submit product data and manufacturer's installation instructions for each item under provisions of
Section 01330
1 4 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to CBC, California Building Code, (CCR), Title 24, Part 2 and ADAAG for access for the
handicapped
1 5 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A Submit operation and maintenance data under provisions of Section 01770.
WLC/0414200 MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT 11005
(D
REV 01/04
2 PART 2 PRODUCTS
21 PRODUCTS
A Range and Accessories Wolf Appliance Company, LLC, (800) 332-9513, Model R486G gas range with six
dual burners and infrared griddle, stainless steel finish. Accessories: Full side panels and skirt, 20 inch riser
with shelf, griddle cover, cutting board and black knobs. One required in Room 202.
B. Range Hood and Accessories: Wolf Appliance Company, LLC, (800) 332-9513, Model W482418 with
stainless steel finish. Accessories. Provide stainless steel hood rail and backsplash Model 48BAK/DF. One
required in Room 202.
C Refrigerators. Sub-Zero Freezer Company, (800) 222-7820, Model 661 combination refrigerator/freezer,
stainless steel finish. Accessones Automatic ice maker, stainless steel grill, stainless steel toe kick, 1 inch
diameter stainless steel handle, gallon door shelf, and dozen egg container with lid One complete required
in Room 202
D. Dishwashers- Bosch Home Appliances Corp , (800) 944-2904, Model SHX46A05 with glass rack insert and
extra large knife rack One equired in Room 202.
E. Microwave Ovens G E. Appliances, (800)626-2000, Model JE2160SF Model JX2130SH. One required in
Room 202.
F. Washer and Dryer: Maytag Corporation, Inc, (888) 462-9824 Washer Neptune Series MAH5500B
Dryer. Neptune Series MDG5500A White color One of each required in Room No. 117.
G Access Panel: J L. Industries, (213) 582-2732. At exterior barbecue, provide Model TMS. Stainless steel
finish. Size as indicated on the drawings
H Television Brackets: Peerless Industries, Inc., (800) 729-0307 Jumbo Model JMC 2650 with VCR mount
Model VPM 081 -J. Provide manufacturer's recommended mounting plate for attachment to structural roof
framing. Provide extension columns in lengths required. Provide chrome escutcheon ring at penetration of
extension column and finish ceiling material Provide safety strap. Two complete assemblies required, one
each in Rooms 203 and 207.
I. Barbeque. Barbeques Galore, (800) 752-3085, Model 142239, Turbo Elite, 4-burner built-in natural gas
barbeque with stainless steel finish Accessories Vinyl cover and "Fire Chief apron" Model 188953 One
complete assembly required Locate as indicated on the drawings
J. Shower Doors. American Shower Door, (323) 726-2478, Crystal model with 1/2 inch obscure tempered
glass, wall mounted self centering hinges and through glass handle. Hardware Finish- Solid brass with
chrome plated finish. Height 5'-6" Width: Verify width required for final opening width Three assemblies
required, locations as indicated on the drawings
K Wall Guards: Construction Specialties, Inc., (800) 233-8493, Acrovyn Model BCR-40, color as selected by
Architect from manufacturer's complete range Provide color matched end caps and corners. Provide
continuous lengths at north, south, and west walls of Rooms 104 and 105
L Resilient Athletic Flooring Mondo USA, (888) 966-6369, Sport Impact flooring installed in roll application
Color- Black. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions over entire area of Room 207
M Substitutions- Under provisions of Section 01630
WLC/0414200 MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT 11005
(2)
REV 01/04
3 PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A Install equipment in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions and as indicated on the drawings.
B. Furnish all necessary hardware, anchors, inserts, connections, and embedded items necessary for proper
installation Coordinate with work of other sections.
END OF SECTION
WLC/0414200 MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT 11005
(3)
REV 01/04
SECTION 11146
VEHICLE EXHAUST REMOVAL SYSTEM
1 PART1 GENERAL
1 1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Vehicle exhaust capture system
B. Accessories
12 REFERENCES
A CCR - California Code of Regulations
B UBC - Uniform Building Code
C UL - Underwriter's Laboratories
D NFPA - National Fire Protection Agency
E AMCA - Air Movement and Control Association
1 3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A The system shall provide 100% complete evacuation of all diesel fumes at source from start up of vehicle
to point of exit The system must provide complete coverage over entire length of bay and accommodate
drive-through and back-in configurations.
B The system must not affect personnel access to the vehicle and shall not block any doorways, exits, or
aisles The hose assembly shall not touch or drag on the bay floor
C The system shall not come into contact with the vehicle other than at the connection point and must not
utilize the vehicle for any electrical or mechanical operation.
D The system must continue to operate during a complete power failure System shall discharge exhaust
outside the station through a filter/scubber even in the event of a power failure
E The system shall under no circumstance allow exhaust leakage or bypass the nozzle
1 4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A Manufacturer. Company specializing in the manufacture of vehicle exhaust removal systems with minimum
ten years documented experience
B Erector Company authorized by manufacturer and specializing in installing vehicle exhaust removal
systems with minimum ten years documented experience.
1 5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A Conform to UBC and CCR for loads, seismic zoning and other governing criteria.
B Product must be UL certified ,v
1 6 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of Section 01330
B Indicate on shop drawings, system and component dimensions, components within assembly, system
layout, anchorage and fasteners, and affected related work
C Submit substantiating engineering data, test results of previous testing meeting performance criteria, and
other supportive data
D Provide product data on standard manufactured components including structural and performancecharacteristics
E Submit manufacturer's certificate under provisions of Section 01330 that products meet or exceed specified
requirements.
WLC/0414200 VEHICLE EXHAUST REMOVAL SYSTEM 11146
(1)
1 7 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A Coordinate work of this Section with structural supports and mechanical systems shown on the drawings
1 8 WARRANTY
A Provide manufacturer's warranty under provisions of Section 01770 for five years against defective materials
or workmanship
1 9 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A Deliver, store and protect products under provisions of Section 01600
2 PART 2 PRODUCTS
2 1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A PlymoVent, (800) 998-1974
B Substitution Under provisions of Section 01630
2 2 REMOVAL SYSTEM
A At Each Bay Provide Model STRA-70 straight rail with two drops each Includes the following 72 feet of
extruded aluminum rail for each system, hydraulic end shock, each complete with crab assembly, magazine
pack, 100 feet of coiled air line and 25 feet of 4 inch diameter yellow and black hose, grabber nozzle, swivel
safety disconnect, manual fill valve, and complete pneumatic circuit for passive release Also includes all
necessary support legs, braces, brackets, filter/dryer regulator, and four (4) tail pipe adaptors for tail pipes
B Provide Model 67008T, 7.5 hp, three phase radial exhaust fan rated at 2,500 CFM
C Provide Model 05-3 706043, engine sensor control box, 208-230 volt, three phase for 7 5 hp fan Include
pressure sensors for fan activation by vehicle exhaust and all necessary motor starters and timer
D Provide all necessary controls, motors, fittings, ductwork, blowers and structural supports required for a
complete system Provide all manufacturer's standard features. Verify exact location for control panel with
Architect Contractor to coordinate with mechanical and electrical components prior to installation.
3 PART 3 EXECUTION
3 1 INSTALLATION
A Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and approved shop drawings.
3 2 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES
A Provide manufacturer's field services under provisions of Section 01458
B Include services of certified technician to supervise installation, adjustments, final connections, and system
testing.
C Provide operation, maintenance instructions, and crew training to Owner as required
END OF SECTION
WLC/04142QO : VEHICLE EXHAUST REMOVAL SYSTEM 11146
(2)
REV 02/02
; SECTION 15041
DISINFECTION OF PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1 1 DESCRIPTION
This section describes requirements for disinfection by chlormation of potable and recycled water mams,
services, pipe appurtenances and connections.
12 REFERENCED STANDARDS
The publications listed below form part of this specification to the extent referenced and are referred to in the
text by the basic designation only Reference shall be made to the latest edition of said standards unless
otherwise called for
A American Water Works Association (AWWA)
B300 Standard for Hypochlontes
B301 Standard for Liquid Chlorine
C651 Disinfecting Water Mains
1 3 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE v
Section 15064 - PVC Pressure Pipe (AWWA C900) and Fittings
1 4 SERVICE APPLICATION
A All water mams and appurtenances taken out of service for inspection, repairs, or other activity that might
lead to contamination shall be disinfected before they are returned to service.
B All new water mains and temporary high lines shall be disinfected prior to connection to the District's existing
system
C All components incorporated into a connection to the District's existing system shall be disinfected prior to
installation
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. A written disinfection and dechlorination plan signed by a certified chlonnator shall be submitted to the
Engineer for review and approval prior to starting disinfection or dechlonnation operations. Plan for
disinfection method and procedure shall include equipment used to inject the chlorine solution, gauges or
scales to measure the rate at which chlorine is injected, qualifications of personnel, testing location and
schedule, source of water and water disposal locations Personnel performing the disinfection shall
demonstrate a minimum of five years experience in the chlormation and dechlorination of pipelines
B Qualification of certified testing laboratory.
C Emergency Response Plan
1 6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
Chlormation and dechlorination shall be performed by competent individuals knowledgeable and
experienced in the operation of the necessary application and safety equipment in accordance with
applicable Federal, State and Local laws and regulations The transport, storage and handling of these
materials shall be performed in accordance with Code of Federal Regulations (CFR) 1910 120 Hazardous
Waste Operations and Emergency Response, CFR 49 172 Hazardous Materials Regulations, and the
General Industry Safety Orders of the California Code of Regulations, Title 8, Section 5194
1 7 CONCURRENT DISINFECTION AND HYDROSTATIC TESTING
The specified disinfection of the pipelines may be performed concurrently with the hydrostatic testing in
accordance with Section 15044 In the event repairs are necessary, as indicated by the hydrostatic test,
additional disinfection may be required by the Engineer in accordance with this specification
WLC/0414200 DISINFECTION OF PIPING
(Consultant 1 /31 /07) 15041 -1
1 8 CONNECTION TO EXISTING MAINS
Prior to connection to existing mams, disinfection and bacteriological testing shall be performed in
accordance with this specification, and hydrostatic testing shall be performed per Section 15044 A District
Connection Permit is required authorizing connection to an existing system shall and be given only on the
basis of acceptable hydrostatic, disinfection and bacteriological test results
PART 2 - MATERIALS
2 1 CHLORINE (GAS)
A Liquid chlorine contains 100-percent available chlorine and is packaged in steel containers in net weights of
68 1kg (150 Ib.) or 907.2kg (1 ton).
B. Liquid chlorine shall be used with appropriate gas flow chlonnators, heaters, and injectors to provide a
controlled, high-concentration solution feed to the water. The chlonnators and injectors shall be the vacuum-
operated type.
2 2 SODIUM HYPOCHLORITE (LIQUID)
Sodium hypochlorrte is available in liquid form in glass or plastic containers, ranging in size from 0.95 L (1
Qt.) to 18 93 L (5 Gal). The solution contains approximately 10% to 15% available chlorine.
2 3 TABLET OR GRANULAR HYPOCHLORITE
Tablet or granular hypochlonte may be used if a solution container is utilized to provide a continuous feed
method.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
31 GENERAL
A Disinfection of pipelines shall not proceed until all appurtenances and any necessary sample ports have
been installed and the Engineer provides authorization
B Every effort shall be made to keep the water mam and its appurtenances clean and dry during the
installation process
C. All piping, valves, fittings, and appurtenances which become contaminated during installation shall be
cleaned, rinsed with potable water, and then sprayed or swabbed with a 5 percent sodium hypochlonte
disinfecting solution prior to installation.
D. Water mams under construction that become flooded by storm water, runoff, or groundwater shall be
cleaned by draining and flushing with metered potable water until clear water is evident Upon completion,
the entire main shall be disinfected using a method approved by the Engineer.
3 2 METHODS
A Chlorine (Gas)
1 Only vacuum-operated equipment shall be used Direct-feed chlormators, which operate solely from
gas pressure in the chlorine cylinder, shall not be permitted The equipment shall incorporate a
backflow prevention device at the point of connection to the potable water source used to fill the
line being tested
2 The chlorinating agent shall be applied at the beginning of the system to be chlorinated and shall
be injected through a corporation stop, a hydrant, or other approved connection to ensure treatment
of the entire system being disinfected.
3 Only a certified, licensed chlormation and testing contractor shall perform gas chlormation work.
The chlormation contractor must also possess a Grade II Treatment Plant Operator Certification
from the State of California if required by the Engineer
WLC/0414200 DISINFECTION OF PIPING
(Consultant 1/31/07) 15041-2
B. Sodium Hypochlonte Solution (Liquid)
1 Sodium hypochlonte solution shall be used for cleaning and swabbing piping and appurtenances
immediately prior to installation and for disinfecting all components of connections to the District's
existing system
2 Sodium hypochlonte solution may be used for the initial disinfection of newly installed water mams.
The solution shall be applied at a terminus of the system to be chlorinated using an injector which
can adjust the amount of solution being injected into the piping system. The solution shall be
injected in the appropriate concentration to achieve the specified concentration range of chlorine
throughout the entire piping system. Where pumping equipment is used in conjunction with an
injector, an integral backflow prevention device shall be used and connected to the potable water
supply.
3 Water trucks, pumping equipment, piping, appurtenances and all other equipment in contact with
potable water shall be disinfected prior to use
4 Sodium hypochlonte solution may also be used to increase the total chlorine residual if the
\ concentration from the initial chlonnation of the system is found to be low. The solution shall be
added to the system in sufficient amounts at appropriate locations to ensure that the disinfecting
solution is present at a concentration within the specified range throughout the piping system.
3.3 PROCEDURE FOR DISINFECTING WATER MAINS AND APPURTENANCES
A The pipeline shall be filled at a rate not to exceed 1,135 liters per minute (300 GPM) or a velocity of 0.3m
per second (1 foot per second), whichever is less
B Disinfection shall result in a total chlorine concentration of not less than 25-mg/l. This concentration shall be
evenly distributed throughout the system to be disinfected, using a continuous feed method of chlormation.
C. All valves shall be operated with the disinfection solution present in the pipeline. All appurtenances such as
air-vacuum relief valves, blowoffs, hydrants, backflow prevention devices, and water service laterals shall be
flushed with the treated water a sufficient length of time to ensure a chlorine concentration within the
specified range in all components of each appurtenance (Note the limitations for discharge of chlorinated
water outlined below)
D The Engineer will verify the presence of the disinfection solution throughout the system by sampling and
testing for acceptable chlorine concentrations at the various appurtenances and/or at the test ports provided
by the Contractor. Areas of the system found to be below the specified chlorine concentration level shall
receive additional flushing as noted above and/or additional disinfection solution as necessary. (Note the
limitations for discharge of chlorinated water outlined below.) Addition of disinfection solution after the initial
charging of the line shall be made by either the liquid chlorine (gas) method, or the sodium hypochlonte
method as directed by the Engineer.
E The chlorinated water shall be retained in the system for a minimum of 24 hours The District Engineer will
test the total chlorine residual The system shall contain a total chlorine residual of not less than 80% of the
initial total chlorine residual before the 24-hour soaking period began If the total chlorine residual has
decreased more than 20%, the system shall be soaked for an additional 24-hour period. If the total chlorine
residual has not deceased after this additional 24-hour period, the system shall be flushed in accordance
with the procedure detailed herein If the total chlonne residual has decreased, the system shall be flushed
in accordance with the procedure detailed herein, and shall be re-disinfected.
F Following a successful retention period as determined by the District Engineer, the chlorinated water shall
be flushed from the system at its extremities and at each appurtenance, using potable water from a source
designated by the District Engineer. The minimum water velocity during flushing shall be 0.9 meters per
second (3 feet per second) or as directed by the Engineer. Flushing shall continue until the replacement
water in the new system is equal in chlorine residual to the potable source of supply as verified by the
District (Note the limitations for discharge of chlorinated water outlined below )
G The Contractor shall contract with a State certified sampling laboratory to perform sampling, transport
samples and perform bacteriological sampling and testing as specified herein
WLC/0414200 DISINFECTION OF PIPING
(Consultant 1/31/07) 15041-3
3 4 DISCHARGE OF CHLORINATED WATER
A Indiscriminate onsite disposal or discharge to sewer systems, storm drains, drainage courses or surface
waters of chlonnated water is prohibited
In locations where chlorine neutralization is required, the reducing agent shall be applied to the water as it
exits the piping system. The Developer shall monitor the chlorine residual during the discharge operations.
Total residual chlorine limits in these locations, and for the discharge of chlorinated water from the testing of
pipelines to surface waters of the San Diego Region are as follows
Total Residual Chlorine Effluent Limitations
30-Day Average - 0.002 mg/l
Average Daily Maximum - 0 008 mg/l
Instantaneous Maximum - 0 02 mg/l
The various methods of dechlormation available can remove residual chlorine to concentrations below
standard analytical methods of detection, 0.02 mg/l, which will assure compliance with the effluent limit. The
Developer will perform all necessary tests, keeping and providing records to the Engineer to ensure that the
total residual chlorine effluent limitations listed above are met.
B. In locations where no hazard to the environment is evident based on the joint examination described above,
the chlorinated water may be broadcast for dust control on the surface of the immediate site. Care shall be
exercised in broadcasting the water to prevent runoff.
3.5 BACTERIOLOGICAL TESTING
The Contractor shall employ a State certified laboratory to perform bacteriological sampling and testing of all
new system installations The testing methodology employed by the District shall be as set forth in "Standard
Methods for the Examination of Water and Waste Water" (current edition). Testing requirements are as set
forth in the California Domestic Water Quality and Monitoring Regulations and commensurate with current
requirements for surface water testing The testing laboratory will analyze the samples for the presence of
coliform bacteria and heterotrophic-type bacteria (heterotrophic plate count). The evaluation criteria
~~ employed by the District for a passing test sample is as follows
A Coliform bacteria- no positive sample, and
B. Heterotrophic plate count (HPC) 500 colony forming units/ml or less
3 6 REDISINFECTION
If the initial disinfection fails to produce satisfactory bacteriological test results, the pipeline system shall be
re-flushed and re-sampled If the second set of samples does not produce satisfactory results, the pipeline
system shall be re-chlorinated, flushed, and re-stamped. The chlormation, flushing, and sampling procedure
shall continue until satisfactory results are obtained Re-disinfection and retestmg shall be at the Contractor's
expense
3.7 DISINFECTING TIE-INS AND CONNECTIONS
U i /
Pipes, fittings, valves and all other components incorporated into connections with the District's existing
system shall be spray disinfected or swabbed with a liquid chlorine solution in accordance with AWWA C651
and as specified herein Upon connection to the mam, the line shall be flushed as directed by the District
Engineer Disinfection by this method is generally limited to assemblies of 6m (20') or less in length
Alternate methods such as "predismfection" prior to installation in accordance with AWWA C651 may be
required at the discretion of the District Engineer.
END OF SECTION
WLC/0414200 DISINFECTION OF PIPING
(Consultant 1/31/07) 15041-4
SECTION 15044
HYDROSTATIC TESTING OF PRESSURE PIPELINES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
This section describes the requirements and procedures for pressure and leakage testing of all pressure
mains
1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
Section 15064 - PVC Pressure Pipe (AWWA C900) And Fittings
1.3 REQUIREMENTS PRIOR TO TESTING
A Provide testing procedure submittal including testing pressure, testing schedule, test bulkhead locations,
and water supply details.
B. All piping, valves, fire hydrants, services, and related appurtenances shall be installed pnor to testing
C The pipe trench shall have trench zone backfill placed and compacted with a minimum of 0 76m (2 5') of
material over the pipe.
D All concrete anchor blocks shall be allowed to cure a sufficient time to develop a minimum strength of 13.79
MPa (2,000 psi) before testing
E Pressure tests on exposed and aboveground piping shall be conducted only after the entire piping system
has been installed and attached to pipe supports, hangers or anchors as shown on the Approved Plans
F. Steel pipelines shall not be tested before the mortar lining and coating on all pipe lengths within the line
have been in place for a minimum of fourteen (14) days Cement-mortar lined pipe shall not be filled with
water until a minimum of eight hours has elapsed after the last joint has been mortared.
1.4 CONCURRENT HYDROSTATIC TESTING AND DISINFECTION OF PIPELINES
Hydrostatic testing of pipelines shall be performed prior to or concurrently with the disinfection operations in
accordance with Section 15041 In the event repairs are necessary, as indicated by the hydrostatic test, the
District may require additional disinfection in accordance with Section 15041.
1.5 CONNECTION TO EXISTING MAINS
Hydrostatic testing shall be performed prior to connections to existing mains. A District Connection Permit
authorizing connection to the existing system shall be given only on the basis of acceptable hydrostatic,
disinfection and bacteriological test results
PART 2 - MATERIALS
2.1 WATER
A Potable water shall be used for hydrostatic testing of potable and recycled water mams.
B Potable water shall be supplied by a District-approved source Make-up water for testing shall also be
potable water
C. A chlorinated water solution, in accordance with Section 15041, shall be used to charge the line and for
make-up water when hydrostatic testing and disinfection operations are combined.
D Meet all applicable state and local requirements for disposal of testing water.
2 2 CONNECTIONS
A Testing water shall be supplied through a metered connection equipped with a backflow prevention device at
the point of connection to the potable water source used
WLC/0414200 HYDROSTATIC TESTING OF PRESSURE PIPELINES
(Consultant 1/31/07) , 15044-1
B. The Contractor shall provide any temporary piping needed to deliver potable water to the piping that is to be
tested.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
31 GENERAL
A. All water systems shall be pre-tested to insure passage of test prior to scheduling official test with inspector.
B The Contractor shall provide the District with a minimum of 48 hours' notice prior to the requested date and
time for hydrostatic tests
C The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, tools, and equipment for testing.
D Temporary blocking during the tests will be permitted only at temporary plugs, caps or where otherwise
directed by the District
E All valves and appurtenances shall be operated during the test period. The test shall be conducted with
valves in the open position. The Contractor is not permitted to operate any valves on the Distnct's system.
F At the onset of testing, all valves, air vacuum assemblies, blowoffs, and services shall be monitored for
possible leakage and repairs made, if necessary, before the test proceeds. The appurtenances shall be
monitored through the duration of the testing.
G. For pipe with porous lining, such as cement mortar, the pipe shall be filled with water and placed under a
slight pressure for a minimum of forty-eight (48) hours prior to the actual hydrostatic test.
H Testing shall be made before connecting the new line with the existing District pipes and mains
I The pipeline should be filled at a rate such that the velocity of flow is less than 1 fps.
J. Maximum length of pipe to be included in any one (1) test shall not exceed 2,500 linear feet or vertical
elevation difference of 58 feet.
3 2 FIELD TEST PROCEDURE
A. Before applying the specified test pressure, care shall be taken to release all air within the pipe and
appurtenances to be tested. Air shall be released through services, fire hydrants, air release valves, or other
approved locations.
B The leakage shall be considered as the total amount of water pumped into the pipeline during the test
period.
C Apply and maintain the test pressure by means of a hydraulic force pump
D Maintain the test pressure for the following duration by restoring it whenever it falls an amount of 5 psr
Pipe Diameter
(inches) Hours
18 and less 4
20 to 36 8
Greater than 36 24
E After the test pressure is reached, use a meter to measure the additional water added to maintain the
pressure. This amount of water is the loss due to leakage in the piping system. The allowable leakage for
various sizes of PUC & DIP with rubber gaskets are shown in the following table:
WLC/0414200 HYDROSTATIC TESTING OF PRESSURE PIPELINES
(Consultant 1/31/07) 15044-2
TYPE OF PIPE PVC &DIP
CLASSES 150&200
Pipe Sizes Allowable Leakage
(inches) Gals/4 hrs/1000' of pipe
4" 33 Gals
6" 50 Gals
8" .66 Gals
10" 83 Gals
12" 99 Gals.
14" 1.16 Gals.
16" 1.32 Gals.
18" 149 Gals.
20" N 1.66 Gals
24" 1 98 Gals
F. The allowable leakage for welded steel pipe shall be zero gallons.
G The allowable leakage for piping having threaded, brazed, or welded (including solvent welded) joints shall
be zero gallons
H Repair and retest any pipes showing leakage rates greater than that allowed in the above criteria
3 3 TEST PRESSURE
Pipe sizes in excess of 16" diameter shall be tested at a pressure based on hydraulic gradient elevation
(H.G L) as shown on the drawings If no test H G.L. is shown, the pipeline at the low point in test section
shall be pumped to a hydrostatic test pressure of 75 p s.i. in excess of the pressure class of pipe Pressure
shall be maintained for a duration shown in section 3.2 and shall be repumped when it falls an amount of 5
p.s.i.
Pipe sizes 16" diameter and less shall be tested at 75 p s.i in excess to the pressure class of the pipeline
Pressure shall be maintained for a duration shown in section 3 2 and shall be repumped when it falls an
amount of 5 p.s i
The test pump gauge and meter shall be connected to the water mam at a location other than the highest
point in the line, in order to allow release of air from the high point. Means shall be provided for accurately
measuring the quantity of water pumped through a meter and pumped into the pipe immediately, during and
after the test period in order to maintain or restore the initial test pressure All pipe, fittings, valves, services
and appurtenances shall be subjected to the hydrostatic test and irrespective of the measured quantity of
leakage, all detectable leaks shall be repaired by the Contractor at the contractor's expense and no cost to
Carlsbad Municipal Water district.
If a tested system is damaged or a leak occurs after official test the entire system or portion of system will be
retested as directed by Inspector
END OF SECTION
WLC/0414200 HYDROSTATIC TESTING OF PRESSURE PIPELINES
(Consultant 1/31/07) 15044-3
SECTION 15064
PVC PRESSURE PIPE (AWWA C90CM AND FITTINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1 1 DESCRIPTION
A This section designates the requirements for the manufacture and installation of polyvmyl chloride,
abbreviated PVC, pressure pipe, to be furnished and installed by the Contractor, at the location and to the
x lines and grades shown on the Plans as herein specified.
1.2 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES, AND STANDARDS
A Commercial Standards
ANSI/AWWAC104/A21.5 Cement-Mortar Lining for Ductile-Iron Pipe and Fittings for
Water
ANSI/AWWA C110/A21 10 Ductile-Iron and Gray-Iron Fittings 3-m Through 48-m for Water
and Other Liquids
ANSI/AWWA C111/A21.11 Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile-Iron Pressure Pipe and
Fittings
ANSI/AWWA C600 Installation of Ductile-Iron Water Mams and Appurtenances
ANSI/AWWA C900 Polyvmyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Pipe 4-m Through 12-m for
Water Distribution
ASTM D 2584 Test Method for Ignition Loss of Cured Reinforced Resins
PPI Technical Report TR 3/4 Policies and Procedures for Developing Recommended
Hydrostatic Design Stresses for Thermoplastic Pipe Materials
AWWA Manual M23 PVC Pipe - Design and Installation
1.3 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS
A Furnish submittals in accordance with Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures
B Shop Drawings: Drawings of pipe, fittings, and appurtenances. Design calculations to demonstrate
compliance of pipe and fittings with this Section Manufacturer's literature for metallic locating tape.
C Certificates: A certified affidavit of compliance for pipe and other products or materials under this Section
and the following supplemental requirements.
1 Hydrostatic proof test reports.
2. Sustained pressure test reports
3 Burst strength test reports.
D The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for performing and paying for sampling and testing as necessary
for the certifications
E Permits: The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining a connection permit from OMWD and complying
with all terms and conditions. Contractor shall pay to OMWD all water connection and meter fees.
WLC/0414200 PVC PRESSURE PIPE (AWWA C900) AND FITTINGS
(Consultant 1/31/07) 15064-1
PART 2-PRODUCTS
21 GENERAL
A PVC pressure pipe (4-inch through 12-inch) shall conform to the applicable requirements of ANSI/AWWA
C900 subject to additional requirements herein.
22 PIPE
A The pipe shall be of the diameter and pressure class indicated, shall be furnished complete with rubber
gaskets, and all specials and fittings shall be provided as required in the Contract Documents. The
dimensions and pressure classes for Dimension Ratios for large PVC pressure pipe with Cast-iron Pipe
Equivalent O D 's shall conform to the requirements of AWWA C900.
B Additives and Fillers: Unless otherwise allowed in alternate qualification procedures of PPI-TR3,
compounds which have a Hydrostatic Design Basis (HDB) of 4000 psi at 73 4 degrees F and for water shall
not contain additives and fillers that exceed the recommended values in Table 1, Part Y of PPI-TR3 (e g.,
allowable content range for calcium carbonate is 0 0-5.0 parts per hundred of resin) If requested by the
ENGINEER, the additive and filler content shall be determined using the pyrolysis method as specified in
ASTM D 2584
C. Joints: Joints for the buned PVC pipe shall be either an integral bell manufactured on the pipe or a separate
coupling both employing a rubber ring joint. The bell and coupling shall be the same thickness as of the pipe
barrel, or greater thickness. The sealing ring groove in the coupling shall be of the same design as the
groove in cast iron fittings and valves available from local water works supply distributors. Where indicated,
restrained joint pipe shall be ductile iron pipe. No restrained joint PVC pipe will be allowed.
D Joint Deflection: Deflection at the joint shall not exceed 1.5 degrees or the maximum deflection
recommended by the manufacturer No deflection of the joint shall be allowed for joints that are over-belled
or not belled to the stop mark.
2 3 FITTINGS
A Fittings shall be ductile iron and shall conform to the requirements of AWWA C110, Class 250 PVC pipe
fittings shall be mechanical joint.
B All fittings shall be lined and coated in accordance witrrAWWA C110. Cement lining shall be double
thickness conforming to AWWA C104. All ductile iron pipe fittings shall be encased in polyethylene sleeves
conforming to AWWA C151, Modified
C Each fitting shall be clearly labeled to identify its size and pressure class.
2 4 HIGH DEFLECTION COUPLINGS
A Use high deflection couplings and plain end pipe for curved alignments in both horizontal and-vertical
directions Do not bend pipe between couplings. Saw cut integral bell end of standard pipe and bevel end for
use with couplings Use 19-foot plain end pipe lengths with deflection couplings for all radii between 270 feet
to 560 feet For radii greater than 560 feet, use an integral bell end pipe length joined together with a 19-foot
plain end pipe length to form a chord Use deflection couplings on each end of the chord and continue this
combination through the curved alignment Joint lengths shorter than 9 feet will not be used on projects
unless specifically authorized by the Engineer High deflection couplings shall be
1 Certamteed or
2 An approved equivalent product
2 5 POLYETHYLENE ENCASEMENT
Polyethylene encasement shall be as indicated below and shall be selected from the Approved Materials
List Polyethylene materials shall be kept out of direct sunlight exposure
A Polyethylene sleeves shall be a minimum 0305mm (0012" or 12 mil) thick polyethylene plastic in
accordance with AWWA C105
WLC/0414200 PVC PRESSURE PIPE (AWWA C900) AND FITTINGS
(Consultant 1731/07) 15064-2
B Polyethylene wrap shall be a minimum 0 203mm (0.008" or 8 mil) thick polyethylene plastic in accordance
withAWWAC105
C Polyethylene wrap and sleeves shall be clear for use with potable water and purple for use with recycled
water.
D. Polyethylene or vinyl adhesive tape a minimum of 50mm (2") wide or plastic tie straps shall be used to
secure polyethylene encasement.
PART 3-EXECUTION
31 GENERAL
A Laying, jointing, testing for defects and for leakage shall be performed in the presence of the ENGINEER,
and shall be subject to approval before acceptance. Material found to have defects will be rejected and the
CONTRACTOR shall promptly remove such defective materials from the Site.
B Installation shall conform to the requirements of AWWA M23, instructions furnished by the pipe
manufacturer, and to the supplementary requirements herein Wherever the provisions of this Section and
the aforementioned requirements are in conflict, the more stringent provision shall apply.
3 2 HANDLING AND STORAGE
A Handling: Pipe, fittings and accessories shall be carefully inspected before and after installation and those
found defective shall be rejected. Pipe and fittings shall be free from fins and burrs. Before being placed in
position, pipe, fittings, and accessories shall be cleaned, and shall be maintained in a clean condition
Proper facilities shall be provided for lowering sections of pipe into trenches Under no circumstances shall
pipe, fittings or any other material be dropped or dumped into trenches.
B Storage: Pipe should be stored, if possible, at the Site in unit packages provided by the manufacturer.
Caution should be exercised to avoid compression damage or deformation to bell ends of the pipe. Pipe
should be stored in such a way as to prevent sagging or bending and be protected from exposure to direct
sunlight by covering with an opaque material while permitting adequate air circulation above and around the
pipe Gaskets should be stored in a cool, dark place out of the direct rays of the sun, preferably in original
cartons.
3 3 TRENCHING AND BACKFILL
A. Trench excavation and backfill shall conform to the requirements of Section 02300 - Earthwork
3 4 INSTALLATION
A Bell-and-spigot pipe shall be laid with the bell end pointing in the direction of laying Pipe shall be graded in
straight lines, taking care to avoid the formation of any dips or low points. Pipe shall not be laid when the
conditions of trench or weather are unsuitable At the end of each day's work, open ends of pipe shall be
closed temporarily with wood blocks or bulkheads.
B Pipe shall be supported at its proper elevation and grade, care being taken to secure firm and uniform
support Wood support blocking will not be permitted The full length of each section of pipe and fittings shall
rest solidly on the pipe bed, with recessed excavation to accommodate bells, joints, and couplings. Anchors
and supports shall be provided where indicated and where necessary for fastening work into place
Fittings shall be independently supported.
C Short lengths of pipe shall be used in and out of each rigid joint or rigid structure. Piping that does not allow
sufficient space for proper installation of jointing material shall be replaced by one of proper dimensions
Blocking or wedging between bells and spigots will not be permitted.
D Joints shall be installed according to manufacturer's recommendations Trenches shall be kept free of water
until joints have been properly made The maximum combined deflection at any coupling shall be in
accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations
WLC/0414200 PVC PRESSURE PIPE (AWWA C900) AND FITTINGS
(Consultant 1/31/07) 15064-3
E No longitudinal bending shall be allowed in the installation of PVC pressure pipe All definitions shall be
accomplished by the use of deflection collars or couplings specifically designed for use with PVC C900 pipe
and the definitions as installed shall not exceed the manufacturers written recommendations
F Pipe shall be cut by means of saws, power driven abrasive wheels, or pipe cutters, which will produce a
square cut No wedge-type roller cutters will be permitted After cutting, the end of the pipe shall be beveled
using a beveling tool, portable type sander, or abrasive disc
3 5 INSTALLATION OF COPPER WIRE
A. Polyvmyl chlonde pipelines shall be provided with No. 10 AWG bare copper wire laid along the top of the
pipe and held in place with ties or hitches of the same kind of wire spaced not more than 13-feet apart, or
metallic locating tape laid along the centerlme of the pipe trench at a depth of 18-mches below finish grade.
In such case, the CONTRACTOR shall furnish manufacturer's literature, completely describing the tape
proposed to be furnished. No tape shall be used prior to receipt of written approval of the ENGINEER.
3 6 SERVICE CONNECTIONS
A Service Connections: Direct tapping will not be permitted. Double strap bronze service clamps shall be
used for all service connections Service clamps shall have a bearing area of sufficient width along the axis
of the pipe, so that the pipe will not be distorted when the saddle is made tight An internal shell cutter shall
be used to drill through the corporation stop to minimize PVC shavings, retain the coupon, and reduce
stress Single fluted shell cutters or twist drills are not acceptable. Lubricate the cutting and tapping edges of
the tool with cutting lubricant. Make the cuts slowly and use the follower very lightly - do not force cutter
through pipe wall. Shell cutter shall have sufficient throat depth to handle the heavy wall PVC pipe.
Maximum outlet size permitted with service clamps or saddle is 2-mches
B Tapping sleeves and valves shall be used for all outlet sizes greater than 2-mches in diameter Tapping
sleeves shall be assembled and installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
3 7 CONCRETE THRUST BLOCKS
Concrete thrust blocks shall be placed as shown on the Plans and shall consist of Class B Portland cement
concrete containing not less than five sacks of Portland cement per cubic yard and shall conform to
SSPWC Concrete blocks shall be placed between the undisturbed ground and the fittings to be anchored
Quantity of concrete and the bearing area of the pipe and undisturbed soil shall be as shown on the Plans,
unless otherwise determined by the Owner's Representative The concrete shall be placed, unless
specifically shown otherwise on the Plans, so that the pipe joints and fittings will be accessible to repairs
38 POLYETHYLENE ENCASEMENT
A Polyethylene encasement shall completely encase and cover all metal surfaces
Pipe All ductile-iron pipe shall be encased with polyethylene sleeves in accordance with Method A
described in AWWA C105, or with polyethylene wrap in accordance with Method C described in AWWA
C105
Fittings Fittings such as tees, bends and reducers shall be encased with polyethylene wrap in accordance
with AWWA C105.
Valves' Valves shall have only the stem and operating nut exposed and the wrap shall be attached so that
valve operation will not disturb the wrapping or break the seal
B. Polyethylene sleeves shall be secured with polyethylene or vinyl adhesive tape or plastic tie straps at the
ends and quarter points along the sleeve in a manner that will hold the sleeve securely in place during
backfill Polyethylene wrap shall be secured with polyethylene or vinyl adhesive tape in a manner that will
hold the wrap securely in place during backfill
WLC/0414200 PVC PRESSURE PIPE (AWWA C900) AND FITTINGS
(Consultant 1/31/07) 15064-4
3 9 CONNECTIONS TO EXISTING FACILITIES (WET TAPS AND CUT-IN INSTALLATIONS)
The Contractor shall furnish the tapping sleeve or tee, valves and all other matenals as called for in the
Standard Specifications in accordance with the Approved Matenals List. The Contractor shall provide all
equipment and labor required for the excavation and installation of the connection including, but not limited
to, backfill and pavement replacement In certain circumstances the Contractor may be required to provide
a water truck, high line, and fittings as part of the equipment for making the connections In addition, the
Contractor shall assist the District in alleviating any hardship incurred during a shutdown for connections.
Emergency standby equipment or materials may be required of the Contractor by the District Engineer.
Connection to the existing 16" water mam may require night and/or weekend work.
Wet taps or cut-in tee and valve installations shall be performed as follows:
A. Prior to construction, Contractor shall pothole the existing pipe at the location of the proposed connection
The District shall inspect the pothole prior to Contractor's repair of trench. Contractor shall record the
following information on as-built drawings.
1. Pipe size, outside diameter.
2 Pipe type such as ACP, PVC, Ductile-Iron or Steel
3 Pipe class and/or pressure rating.
4 Elevation, grade, and alignment
5 Location of collars, pipe bells, fittings or couplings, if found. Note- Collars, bells, fittings, or
couplings shall not be within 18-mches of the outer dimension of the tapping saddle
6. Potential conflicts with existing utilities.
B. To facilitate the proposed connection and allow for slight adjustments in alignment, the Contractor shall
leave a minimum 3 Om (10') gap between the new pipe installation and the proposed connection point at the
existing water mam The Contractor shall leave a gap longer than 3.0m (10') if conditions warrant, or if
directed by the Engineer
C The new pipeline shall have successfully passed pressure testing in accordance with Section 15044 and
disinfection and bacteriological testing in accordance with Section 15041 prior to proceeding with the
connection to the existing pipeline.
D After the Engineer has given approval to proceed with the connection, the Contractor shall schedule with the
District for the wet tap or cut-in installation.
1 Shutdowns will be scheduled at the convenience of the District Shutdowns may be scheduled for
nights or weekends if required.
2 The Contractor shall give the District a minimum of 5 working days notice pnor to any proposed
excavation or shutdown of existing mams or services Scheduling shall be subject to approval by
the District Engineer
3 The District may postpone or reschedule any shutdown operation if, for any reason, the District
Engineer believes that the Contractor is improperly prepared with competent personnel, equipment,
or materials to proceed with the connection
4 If progress in completing the connection within the time specified is inadequate, the Engineer may
order necessary corrective measures. Corrective measures may consist of directing District
personnel or another contractor to complete the work. All costs for corrective measures shall be
borne by the Contractor
E Contractor may proceed with excavation only after potholmg has been completed, materials have been
approved and delivered, and wet tap or cut-in installation has been scheduled with approved Connection
Permit
1 The Contractor shall saw-cut pavement, excavate and provide and install shoring and steel plating,
when necessary, one day prior to the wet tap or cut-in installation
WLC/0414200 PVC PRESSURE PIPE (AWWA C900) AND FITTINGS
(Consultant 1/31/07) 15064-5
2 The Contractor shall provide lights, barricades and traffic control in accordance with the agency of
jurisdiction and as deemed necessary for the excavation by the Engineer
3 The Contractor shall de-water existing mams in full compliance with NPDES standards where cut-in
installations are required and shall be done in the presence of the Engineer and in accordance with
Section 15041 Only District personnel are authorized to operate existing valves The Contractor
shall be responsible for any and all damage resulting from unauthorized operation of existing
District facilities
4 The Contractor under the inspection of the City shall perform the following work for wet taps and
cut-in installations
a Wet taps' Disinfect and install and tapping saddle and tapping valve and perform tapping
operations.
b Cut-ins- Cut and remove portions of existing mams, and disinfect and install tees, valves,
couplings, and appurtenances required to complete the closure. The Contractor shall
discard pipe and appurtenances removed from service in accordance with this Section.
5. After the Contractor has performed tapping or cut-in operations, and the Engineer has given
approval to proceed, the Contractor shall complete the installation as shown on the Approved Plans
in accordance with the Standard Specifications including, but not limited tcr
a Disinfecting and installing the pipe section(s) necessary to make the closure to the new
system
b Installing and setting the valve gate well(s) in accordance with the Standard Drawings,
c Installing thrust and anchor blocks in accordance with Section 15064
d Completing all backfill and compaction of the trench in accordance with Section 02300
e Repairing or replacing pavement as necessary
3 10 FIELD TESTING AND DISINFECTION
A Field testing and disinfection and water mams shall conform to the requirements of Section 15044 and
Section 15041
END OF SECTION
WLC/0414200 PVC PRESSURE PIPE (AWWA C900) AND FITTINGS
(Consultant 1731/07) 15064-6
SECTION 15100
RESILIENT WEDGE GATE VALVES (RWGV's)
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
This section includes materials, testing, and installation of manually operated resilient wedge gate valves
(RWGV's).
1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS
The publications listed below form part of this specification to the extent referenced and are referred to in the
text by the basic designation only Reference shall be made to the latest edition of said standards unless
otherwise called for
1.3 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
Standard Drawings
Section 15064 - PVC Pressure Pipe (AWWA C900) And Fittings
1 4 SERVICE APPLICATION
A. Resilient wedge gate valves (RWGV's) shall be installed on potable and recycled water mams and
appurtenances in accordance with the Approved Plans and the Standard Drawings.
B Resilient wedge gate valves shall be used for open/closed operations, throttling service and frequent
operation after long periods of no actuation.
C In general, resilient wedge gate valves shall be used when valves are required on pipelines and
appurtenances 100m (4") through 400mm (16").
D. Valves for pipelines sized 450mm (18") and larger generally require the use of butterfly valves (BFV) in
accordance with Section 15102
1 5 SUBMITTALS
The following items shall be submitted for review and approval per Section 1330, prior to ordering or delivery
of resilient wedge gate valves.
A. An affidavit from the valve manufacturer stating that valves have successfully passed hydrostatic tests in
accordance with AWWA C509 and manufacturer's own coatings tests.
B. The valve manufacturer's catalog data showing the size to be used, valve dimensions, pressure rating and
materials of construction
C Manufacturer's catalog data and proof of NSF certification for the lining materials to be used
1 6 SIZING OF VALVES
Valves shall be the same size as the line in which they are installed unless otherwise noted on the Approved
Plans
1 7 VALVE ENDS
A Valve ends shall be compatible with the piping system in which they are being installed in accordance with
the Approved Plans or directed by the Engineer.
B Valve Flanges The flanges of valves may be raised or plain faced with full-face gaskets Flanges of valves
for water working pressures of 150 psi or less shall be faced and drilled to the 125-lb American Standard
template unless otherwise shown or specified. Flanges of valves for water working pressures greater than
150 psi shall be faced and drilled to the 250-lb American Standard template unless otherwise shown or
specified
WLC/0414200 RESILIENT WEDGE GATE VALVES (RWGV'S)
(Consultant 1/31/07) 15100-1
1 8 VALVE TESTING
Resilient wedge gate valves shall be hydrostatically tested and valve coatings shall be holiday detected prior
to shipment to the field Valves delivered to the site prior to successful hydrostatic testing and holiday
detection shall be subject to rejection.
1 9 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
Valves shall be delivered and stored in accordance with AWWA C550 The port openings shall be covered
with plastic, cardboard or wood while in transit and during storage in the field. These covers shall remain in
place until valves are ready to be installed. Valves shall not be stored in contact with bare ground Valves
shall not be stacked.
110 POLYETHYLENE WRAP
Polyethylene wrap shall be used for the buned installation of resilient wedge gate valves in accordance with
Section 15064
PART 2 - MATERIALS
2 1 RESILIENT WEDGE GATE VALVES (RWGV's)
A Resilient wedge gate valves and appurtenant components and materials shall be selected from the
Approved Materials List.
B RWGV's shall be ductile-iron in accordance with AWWA C509 and C515 except as modified herein
C Each valve shall have a smooth unobstructed waterway free from any sediment pockets.
D All RWGV's shall be leak-tight at their rated pressure.
E RWGV's shall have a non-rising low-zinc bronze or stainless steel stem, opened by turning left
(counterclockwise).
F Stem seals shall be the O-rmg type incorporating a minimum of two rings as required by AWWA C509
G Low-friction torque-reduction thrust washers or bearings shall be provided on the stem collar.
H Wedge (gate) shall be fully encapsulated with a bonded-m-place Nitnle elastomer covering. Minimum
thickness of the rubber seating area shall be 6.35mm (1/4")
I Valves for buried applications shall be provided with a 50mm (2") square operating nut, and valves located
above ground or in structures shall be equipped with a hand wheel in accordance with AWWA C509 unless
otherwise indicated on the Approved Plans.
J RWGV interior and exterior surfaces (except for the encapsulated disc) shall be coated as described below
K All bolts and nuts used in the construction of RWGV's shall be Type 316 stainless steel.
2.2 EPOXY LINING ANDrCOATING
Epoxy linings and coatings for valves shall be provided in accordance with AWWA C210, C213, and C550,
with the following modifications
A. Epoxy lining and coating of valve surfaces shall be performed by the manufacturer in a facility with qualified
personnel, where the environment can be controlled Epoxy lining and coating of valves in the field is
prohibited
B Repairs made to manufactures applied coatings shall be performed in a facility with qualified personnel,
where the environment can be controlled The facility shall be approved by the valve manufacturer
C Surface preparation shall be as detailed in SSPC-SP5, White-Metal Blast Cleaning.
y
WLC/0414200 RESILIENT WEDGE GATE VALVES (RWGV'S)
(Consultant 1 /31 /07) 15100-2
D.
E.
F.
23
A
Liquid epoxy lining and coating materials shall be listed in the NSF Listing for Drinking Water Additives,
Standard 61, certified for use in contact with potable water
The minimum dry film thickness for epoxy linings shall be 0 203mm (0.008" or 8 mils). Liquid epoxy lining
shall be applied in two (2) coats in accordance AWWA C210
Powder epoxy coating materials shall contain one hundred percent (100%) solids, in accordance with
AWWAC213
GATE WELLS
Gate wells shall be used for buried valves 50mm (4") and larger, unless otherwise indicated on the Standard
Drawings Gate well box and lid shall be used on all gate wells.
Valve gate wells shall be as indicated below in accordance with the Approved Materials List.
zee?
Larger than 1 00mm (4")
flS^lfi^M^
200mm (8") diameter Class 150, C-900 PVC
B.
24
25
26
1 PVC gate wells for use in recycled water system applications shall be white.
2 PVC gate wells for use in potable water system applications shall be white or blue
Gate well lids shall be as indicated below in accordance with the Approved Materials List.
1 Gate well box lids shall be circular ductile-iron, and shall include a skirt for a close fit inside the
upper portion of the gate well Lids shall be cast with the AGENCY NAME (CMWD) and the word
WATER for use on potable water systems, and Recycled Water for recycled water systems
2
3.
4.
Lids shall be Brooks 4TT with long skirt or approved equal.
Normally closed potable water valves and recycled water valves shall use box lids by Brooks 3RT
or approved equal.
Lid sizes shall be as follows
Larger than 1 00mm (4") where the speed limit is 56
km/h (35 mph) or greater
•-*1- ;.>,;%f:ij»1
Machined ductile-iron frame and 200mm
(8") lid with 150mm (6") long skirt
VALVE STEM EXTENSIONS
Stem extensions shall be complete with operating nut, locating ring, and lower socket to fit valve-operating
nut. The configuration of the extension stem nut shall match that of the valve it operates.
Stem extensions shall be square fiberglass tubing glued together to make a continuous one-piece unit used
to a maximum length of 2 4m, eight feet (8').
Steel stem extensions shall be used where the maximum length of the extension exceeds 2 4m (8') or at the
request of the District Engineer Steel stem extensions may be round or square hot-dipped galvanized steel
tubing of solid design (no pinned couplings permitted) with guides
CONCRETE THRUST BLOCKS
Concrete thrust or anchor blocks shall be placed as shown on the approved plans or as specified in Section
15064.
POLYETHYLENE WRAP
Polyethylene wrap shall be in accordance with Section 15064 and selected from the Approved Materials
List
WLC/0414200
(Consultant 1/31/07)
RESILIENT WEDGE GATE VALVES (RWGV'S)
15100-3
PART 3 - EXECUTION
31 INSTALLATION
A. Install valves with the bolt holes straddling the vertical centerlme of pipe and the operating nut in the vertical
position unless otherwise noted on the Approved Plans.
B. Valves shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and the applicable
section of these specifications for the piping material and joint type being used
3.2 POLYETHYLENE WRAP
Installation of polyethylene wrap for buried valves shall be in accordance with Section 15064
3.3 CONCRETE
Concrete thrust, anchor, and support blocks shall be installed in accordance the Standard Drawings The
concrete shall be placed so that valves and valve operators will be accessible for repairs or replacement.
3 4 GATE WELLS AND EXTENSION STEMS
A Gate wells shall be installed as shown on the Standard Drawings.
B Valve Stem Extensions shall be installed when the valve operating nut is more than 1.5m (5') below grade.
Stem extensions shall be of sufficient length to bring the operating nut to a point between 300mm (12") and
450mm (18") below the gate well lid. Valve stem extensions shall be installed in accordance with the
Standard Drawings.
3 5 DISINFECTION OF VALVES
Disinfection and flushing of valves shall be in accordance with Section 15041, as part of the process of
disinfecting the main pipeline. The valves shall be operated dunng the disinfection penod to completely
disinfect all internal parts.
3 6 HYDROSTATIC TESTING
Valves shall be hydrostatically tested in conjunction with the pipeline in which they are installed in
accordance with Section 15044.
3 7 FIELD PAINTING AND COATING
The exterior of valves installed above ground or exposed in vaults or enclosures shall be field painted in
accordance with CMWD Standard Drawings and Specifications.
END OF SECTION
WLC/0414200 RESILIENT WEDGE GATE VALVES (RWGV'S)
(Consultant 1/31/07) 15100-4
SECTION 15300
AUTOMATIC FIRE SPRINKLERS
1 PART 1 GENERAL
1 1 SCOPE
A. Furnish all labor, materials, services, testing, transportation and equipment necessary for and reasonably
incidental to the proper and satisfactory installation of the automatic fire protection systems as specified
herein.
B. The Contractor shall be responsible for the Automatic Fire Sprinkler inside of the building within five feet
(5') of the foundation, and within the building itself See Civil Engineer's plans for onsite Fire system This
specification is intended to establish the required performance and quality of the work necessary to
provide for a complete automatic sprinkler system to serve the building on site as indicated on the
drawings
C Work or equipment not indicated or specified which is necessary for the complete and proper operation of
the work of this Section in accordance with the true intent and meaning of the contract documents shall be
provided by this contractor and incorporated under this Section of the work at no additional cost to the
Owner
1 2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A Plumbing
B. Electrical Work
C Painting
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Code Requirements' All work covered by this Section shall conform to the latest requirements of the
National Fire Protection Association, NFPA 13, and the State Fire Marshal The design shall conform to
Uniform Fire Code with California Amendments
B UL and FM Compliance. Fire protection system materials and components shall be Underwriter's
Laboratories listed and labeled, and Factory Mutual approved for the application anticipated
C Permits and Inspections The Contractor must obtain and pay all fees for permits, licenses, inspections,
etc., which are required by all legally constituted authorities and shall deliver all certificates to the Owner
D Installing Contractor shall have a California C-16 license
1 4 SPECIAL DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A. This section of the specifications is general and is not intended to define specific types of systems that are
necessary to meet the requirements of the governing authorities mentioned herein.
B. It shall be the contractor's complete responsibility to determine in advance of submitting a bid for the work
under this section any areas requiring other than a wet automatic fire spnnkler system due to the type of
occupancy, storage of materials, or climatic conditions (below 40 degrees F. at spnnkler pipe locations)
These special requirements shall be incorporated into the automatic fire spnnkler design as necessary to
conform with the requirements of NFPA-13, Owners Insurance Underwriter and all other governing
authorities '
1 5 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to provide a complete automatic fire sprinkler system in complete
conformance with the governing agencies mentioned herein. The contract drawings indicate only the
underground fire line, point of connection and the mam fire line riser location. It shall be this Contractor's
complete responsibility to prepare drawings indicating the entire automatic fire sprinkler system.
B Arrangement, size, location and quantity of service, riser and appurtenances indicated on the drawings is
suggested as a minimum requirement only. It shall be this Contractor's responsibility to venfy the exact
requirements of the governing agencies and include these items in the bid. Piping sizes indicated are to
be considered as a minimum and where sizes are not indicated the Contractor shall provide the sizes as
necessary to meet the code requirements Any vanation from the drawings and specifications and/or
piping or equipment relocation shall be approved by the Architect prior to bid.
WLC/0414200 AUTOMATIC FIRE SPRINKLERS 15300
Consultant 7/11/06 (1)
C Prior to installation of any work, the Contractor shall carefully prepare complete working drawings of the
automatic fire sprinkler system The Contractor shall examine the Structural, Architectural, Mechanical,
Plumbing and Electrical Drawings for the construction of the building in order to fully inform himself as to
the scope and detail for the work which will be required of him before proceeding with the design and
preparation of the final working drawings Submit for approval to Local Fire Department six (6) copies of
completed working drawings All spnnkler head locations shall be carefully coordinated with the lighting
and diffuser systems to provide a symmetrical appearance.
1 6 PERMITS, LICENSES AND INSPECTIONS
A Permits and Inspections This Contractor must obtain and pay all fees for permits, licenses, inspections,
etc., which are required by all legally constituted authorities and shall deliver all certificates to the Owner
B Installing Contractor shall have a California C-16 license
1 7 EXAMINATION OF PREMISES
A. Before bidding on this work, Contractors shall make a careful examination of the premises and shall
thoroughly familiarize themselves with the requirements of the contract By the act of submitting a
proposal for the work under this section of the specifications, the Contractor shall be deemed to have
made such study and examination and that he is familiar with and accepts all conditions of the site
1 8 COORDINATION
A Clearances and Openings Contractor shall cooperate and coordinate his work with all other trades to
avoid confliction and permit for a neat and orderly appearance of the entire installation The Contractor
shall, in advance of the work, furnish instructions to the General Contractor as to his requirements for
equipment and material installation of any kind, whether or not specifically mentioned on drawings or in
the specifications, and shall include recesses, chases in walls, and all required openings in the structure.
Should furnishing this information be neglected, delayed or incorrect and additional cuttings are found to
be required, the cost of the same shall be charged to this Contractor
B Piping runs found to be in conflict with work of other trades, as a result of neglected coordination, shall be
removed and reinstalled in new locations designated by the Architect at no additional expense to the
Owner.
C To achieve coordination, Contractor shall contact the Architect and obtain necessary information to design
his system to fit into allotted spaces without interfering with work by other trades.
1 9 SUBMITTAL DATA
A Furnish all at one time, within the time noted below, six (6) bound copies of valid submittal data on all
material, equipment and devices. The Contractor shall make all presentations and clarifications although
he may bring suppliers representatives for technical assistance to meetings called by the architect Each
submitted item shall be indexed and referenced to these specifications and to put identification numbers
on fixtures and equipment schedules Submittals not complying with this paragraph shall be rejected.
B Submittals are required on all items to insure the latest and most complete manufacturer's data is
available for review Manufacturer's submittal literature and shop drawings often contain information not
available in design literature, requirements of the submittals and engineer's submittal notes are a part of
the work of this Division except that engineer's notes may be used as a means of increasing the scope of
work of this Division
C. Submittals will be checked for general conformance with the design concept of the project, but the review
does not guarantee quantities shown and does not supersede requirements of this Division to properly
install work.
D. A list of names is not a valid submittal. To be valid, all submittals must.
1. Be delivered to the Architect's office within thirty-five (35) days of award of the contract
Corrections or changes in submittals returned as inadequate or incomplete shall be
accomplished within this time limit.
WLC/0414200 AUTOMATIC FIRE SPRINKLERS 15300
Consultant 7/11/06 (2)
1 10 PROTECTION
A All work, equipment and materials shall be protected at all times Contractor shall repair all damage
caused either directly or indirectly by his own workpersons. Contractor shall also protect his own work
from damage He shall close all pipe openings with caps or plugs during installation. He shall protect all
his equipment and materials against dirt, water, chemical and mechanical injury. Upon completion, all
work shall be thoroughly cleaned and delivered in a new condition
B. Contractor shall be held responsible for all damage to equipment and materials until he has received
written notice from the Architect or Engineer that his work has been accepted
1.11 UNINSPECTED WORK
A Contractor shall not allow or cause any of his work to be covered up before it has been duly inspected,
tested and approved by the authorized inspectors having legal jurisdiction over his work Should he fail to
observe the above, he shall uncover his work and, after it has been inspected, tested and approved,
recover it at his own expense
1.12 RECORD DRAWINGS
A. Contractor shall provide and keep up-to-date a complete "as-built" record set of bluelme prints which shall
show every change from the original drawings and the exact "as-built" locations and sizes of the work
provided under this Section of the specifications This set shall include locations, dimensions, depth of
buried piping, shut-off valves, etc On completion of the work, this set of prints shall be delivered to the
Architect
1 13 FINAL APPROVAL
A. Prior to final acceptance of the installation, the Contractor shall furnish to the Architect "certificates of
approval" signed by the state fire marshal having jurisdiction, stating that the systems, as installed, have "
been inspected and tested and meet all governing code requirements
1 14 GUARANTEES
A Contractor shall guarantee the automatic fire sprinkler systems unconditionally for a period of one (1) year
after final acceptance. If, dunng this period, any matenals, equipment, or any part of the systems fail to
function properly, Contractor shall make good the defects promptly and without any expense to the Owner.
2 PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
A. All material installed shall be approved and/or listed for fire protection use by referenced authonties, codes
and standards All material shall be new, without field modifications, and be the best possible grade of its
kind.
B Mam Water Services Below Grade: Pipe shall be ductile iron, cement lined with mechanical joint fittings
Class 250, flanged or mechanical joint, in accordance with ANSI-AWWA C111/A21.11, Class 52 or
AWWA C153 ductile iron compact fittings of dimensions to match pipe outside diameter, with AWWA
C104, cement lining and AWWA C111 neoprene gaskets. Provide concrete thrust blocks at all
underground fittings per manufacturers recommendations
C Pipe and Fittings (within the building):
1 Black steel Schedule 40, ASTM A 135 or ASTM A 795 for all piping with threaded joints and fittings
U.L/F.M approved threadable schedule 10 lightwall pipe, such as Allied "XL" or equivalent, will be
accepted.
2. Black steel Schedule 40, ASTM A 135 or ASTM A 795 with grooved ends, may be used for pipe 1-
1/4" diameter and larger, unless otherwise noted U.L./F.M approved extra lightwall pipe, such as
Amencan Tube Co. "Dyna-flow" or equivalent, will be accepted
3 Threaded fittings shall be of cast iron or malleable iron, class 125, conforming to ANSI B16.3 and
ANSI B16 4
4. Flanged fittings shall be provided where required. Flanges shall be of cast iron, class 125,
conforming to ANSI B16 1
5. Welded fittings shall be of wrought steel, conforming to ANSI B16 9.
WLC/0414200 AUTOMATIC FIRE SPRINKLERS 15300
Consultant 7/11/06 (3)
6 One-piece reducing fittings shall be used wherever a change is made in pipe size Bushings shall not
be used, except where fittings of the required size are not available
7 Grooved thmwall steel pipe connections shall be made using a U L./F.M approved ductile iron cou-
pling, with rubber gasket Installation shall be per manufacturer's instructions
8 Grooved Mechanical Fittings ASTM A536, Grade 65-45-12 ductile iron; ASTM A47 Grade 32510
malleable iron; or ASTM A53, Type F or Types E or S, Grade B fabricated steel fittings with grooves
or shoulders designed to accept grooved end couplings
9 Fittings for hole-cut connections, such as Victaulic "Hooker" or equivalent, are not acceptable and
shall not be used
10 Plain end couplings such as "Roust-a-bout" or "Plain Lock" are not acceptable.
D Dram and Test Piping
1 Pipe Schedule 40, galvanized steel, ASTM A-53
2 Fittings: Cast iron, drainage pattern, standard weight, screwed.
3 Mam Riser Dram: Mam riser dram shall terminate flush to exterior wall with 2" Zum ZANB-199-SS
decorative wall flange and outlet nozzle.
E Sprinkler Heads
1 Interior Finished Ceilings and Exterior Soffits.
a Heads shall be Reliable Model F4FR quick response, concealed, flush-to-ceiling automatic
sprinklers Equivalent products of Gnnnell, Star, Viking or Central are acceptable Corrosion-
resistant finish shall be installed at exterior areas, finish shall be polyester or Teflon coating with
matching escutcheon Cover plate finish shall be per Architect's specifications Color shall be
factory finish in custom color as selected by the Architect. Up to four (4) different colors will be
selected for use in varying amounts at all sprinkler head locations.
b All areas without Suspended Ceilings, Concealed Areas, Unfinished Ceilings and Storage Areas.
Heads shall be Reliable, model F1FR quick response sprinkler upright/pendent with rough brass
finish Equivalent products of Gnnnell, Star, Viking or Central are acceptable Where required,
escutcheons shall be Sweet and Donaldson #401 with chrome finish at storage, mechanical, and
electrical room ceilings
c. Concealed Areas. Heads shall be Reliable, model F1FR quick response sprinkler
upright/pendent with rough brass finish Equivalent products of Gnnnell, Star, Viking or Central
are acceptable. Where required, escutcheons shall be Sweet and Donaldson #401 with chrome
finish at storage, mechanical, and electrical room ceilings.
d. Temperature Ratings Heads below finished ceilings, and in all other occupied areas shall have
a temperature rating of Ordinary (155-165 degrees). Heads in unventilated, concealed and void
spaces shall have a temperature rating of Intermediate (200-212 degrees), unless otherwise
required by code
e Provide metal cabinet for a reserve supply of sprinkler heads, as required by N.F.P.A 13.
Include suitable head wrenches for each type of sprinkler installed. Stock shall include all types
and temperature ratings installed Locate as directed by Architect.
F. Escutcheons'
1. Furnish and install steel chrome plated set screw type escutcheons on all exposed pipes passing
through walls, floors, ceilings and partitions.
G Provide U.L listed guards for sprinkler heads which are located in areas where they are susceptible to
mechanical damage.
WLC/0414200 AUTOMATIC FIRE SPRINKLERS 15300
Consultant 7/11/06 (4)
H Valves All valves shall be UL & FM compliance approved as manufactured by Mueller, Clow, Stockham
or Kennedy
1 General Duty Valves
a Gate Valves - 2 Inch and Smaller. Body and bonnet of cast bronze, 175 pound cold water
working pressure - non-shock, threaded ends, solid wedge, outside screw and yoke, rising stem,
screw-m-bonnet, and malleable iron handwheel Valves shall be capable of being repacked
under pressure, with valve wide open
b Gate Valves - 2-1/2 Inch and Larger Iron body, bronze mounted, 175 pound cold water working
pressure - non-shock Valves shall have solid taper wedge, outside screw and yoke, nsmg stem,
flanged bonnet, with body and bonnet conforming to ASTM A126 Class B, replaceable bronze
wedge facing rings, flanged ends, and a packing assembly consisting of a cast iron gland flange,
brass gland, packing, bonnet, and bronze bonnet bushing
c Interior dram and test valves shall be brass, rubber disc, angle or globe pattern, with screwed
ends, rated 200psi WOG United Brass Works, Model 125 or 126, or equivalent, is acceptable
2 Specialties Valves (State Fire Marshal approved)
a Alarm Valve Provide Reliable Model E or approved equal alarm valve, 175 psig working
pressure, designed for vertical installation, with cast iron, flanged inlet and outlet Provide trim
sets for bypass, dram, electric sprinkler alarm switch, pressure, gauges, precision,retarding
chamber, dnp cut assembly piped without valves separate from mam dram line, and fill line
attachment with strainer. Alarm valve shall have an Underwriter's approved waterflow indicator
for variable pressures with recycling retard with minimum retard of 30 seconds. Voltage to suit
building electrical system. One N O and one N C. contact Alarm bell Underwriter's approved,
weather-proof electric gong or bell.
I Seismic Joints Seismic expansion joints as manufactured by Metraflex, MLU series, UL listed
J Alarm Devices
1 General' Types and sizes shall mate and match piping and equipment connections
2 Water Flow Indicators Vane type waterflow detector, rated to 250 psig, designed for horizontal or
vertical installation, have 2-SPDT circuit switches to provide isolate alarm and auxiliary contacts, 7
ampere 125 volts AC and 0 25 ampere 24 volts DC, complete with factory-set, field adjustable retard
element to prevent false signals, and tamper proof cover which sends a signal when cover is
removed
K Sprinkler System Supervision Alarms:
1 All valves controlling the water supply for automatic sprinkler systems and water flow switches on all
sprinkler systems shall be electrically supervised in accordance with Section 904 3 of the 2001
Uniform Building Code
2 All required alarm devices including flow switches and tamper switches shall be provided and
installed by the automatic fire spnnkler contractor All associated conduit, wiring and electncal
connections between such devices and the fire alarm system shall be the responsibility of the fire
alarm contractor It shall be the automatic fire sprinkler contractor's responsibility to coordinate with
the fire alarm contractor regarding the points of connection for electrical services
3 Refer to electncal drawings and specifications and fire alarm specifications for additional information
L Local Alarm
1 Electncal alarm bell shall be Wheelock, Model MBS-G10 or U L listed equivalent, 10" diameter
combination horn/strobe, 12 or 24 vdc, with standard mounting hardware Bell shall be located as
required by authonties having junsdiction, and as acceptable to Architect
2 Water-Motor Gongs- 10 inch diameter cast aluminum gong, with factory-finish in red enamel; Pelton
Wheel type operator with nylon shaft bearings, and shaft length and sleeve to suit wall thickness and
construction, 3/4 inch inlet and 1 inch dram
3 Supervisory Switches: SPST, normally closed contacts, designed to signal valve in other than full
open position
WLC/0414200 AUTOMATIC FIRE SPRINKLERS 15300
Consultant 7/11/06 (5)
M Sleeves
1 Sleeves shall be provided for all pipes passing through walls, floors, and lath and plaster partitions
and ceilings. For concrete, construction, sleeves shall be set in forms before concrete is poured
Provide one inch (1") clearance between sleeves and pipe Where installed in fire walls, caulk space
between pipe and sleeves with ceramic fire rope and DOW Corning Fire Stop Sealant U.L No
827U
2 In slab construction, Schedule 40 black steel pipe Sleeves shall extend two inches (2") above
finished floor and upper surface to be sealed with mastic.
N. Pressure Gauges- Install as required by Code Underwriters' approved four and one-half inch (4-1/2") dial
type, and shall have a maximum limit of not less than twice the normal working pressure at the point where
installed
O Identification Signs' Control valves, test valves, chain valves, and water flow indicators shall be fitted with
approved enameled sign indicating their use
P Identification of Piping- (PerNFPA-13)
3 PART 3 EXECUTION
3 1 INSTALLATION - GENERAL
A Supervision. The Contractor shall furnish the services of an experienced Superintendent who shall be
qualified in all phases of the work of this Section and who shall constantly be in charge of the work of this
Section
I. All installations shall be per referenced standards Follow manufacturer's directions and
recommendations in all cases as required for all approvals and warranty enforcement
2 Any cutting of structure shall be subject to approval by the Architect Beams, decks and other
structural components shall not be cut or altered in any way unless previously approved
3 Provide flexible couplings where required to provide extension capability, and for earthquake"*
protection per N F P A 13 Provide sway bracing as required by coupling locations
4 Entire sprinkler system shall be installed in such a manner so that it can be drained in accordance
with N F P A 13 Drains shall be located at suitable points as approved by Architect No primary or
auxiliary dram shall be located in any public area or electrical room. All drains shall discharge into
dedicated receptors
5 No work shall be covered or enclosed until inspected, tested, and approved by Architect and authority
having jurisdiction Should any work be concealed before inspection, the Contractor shall, at his own
expense, uncover such work and after it has been inspected, tested and approved, provide for all
repairs as may be necessary to restore any other affected work to its ongmal and proper condition.
6 Sprinkler heads at finished ceilings, and in exposed locations shall form a symmetrical pattern,
carefully integrated into the ceiling layout Heads shall be located at the centerlme of ceiling tiles.
7. Use best of workmanship in the installation of all piping and in particular all piping exposed in areas
having no suspended ceilings. Install all piping as high as possible and where possible, install branch
piping between structural framing and run main piping only below beams.
8 Sprinkler head layout must accommodate ceiling-mounted HVAC register and lighting locations
Coordination with work of these trades is the responsibility of Contractor
9 Without exception, no piping shall be run under or through any skylight, or skylight well Any addi-
tional upright or pendent sprinklers, which may be required by skylight locations, shall be the respon-
sibility of this Contractor
10 All penetrations of wall and/or floor assemblies shall be suitably sleeved, patched and/or sealed in
order to preserve fire rating, where applicable.
II. Location of control valves, fire department connection, and inspector's test shall be as indicated and
as required by authorities having jurisdiction, and as approved by Architect.
12 Local alarm bell shall be located so that it can be easily heard and seen by passersby and fire depart-
ment personnel Locate on exterior wall, approximately 10'-0" above finished grade, as approved by
Architect
WLC/0414200 AUTOMATIC FIRE SPRINKLERS 15300
Consultant 7/11/06 (6)
B Excavation, Trenching and Backfill Do all necessary trench excavation, backfilling and compaction
required for the proper laying of the underground piping Pro-vide a 6" sand bed above and below piping
and backfill with selected materials properly moistened and mechanically compacted to ninety percent
(90%) Piping shall have a minimum of thirty-six inches (36") of cover
C Concrete' Concrete, anchor and thrust blocks required for underground piping shall be provided under the
work of this Section
D Corrosion Protection
1 General
a. Corrosion protection shall be provided for all below grade ductile iron piping and associated
valves and fittings Such piping shall be protected from corrosion by encasement in a
polyethylene protective wrapping, referred to hereafter as polywrap Although not intended to be
a completely air and water tight enclosure, the polywrap shall provide a continuous barner
between the pipe and surrounding bedding and backfill
2 Materials
a The polywrap shall minimum 8 mil in thickness, group 2, linear low density, flat tube, natural
(clear) virgin polyethylene film formed into tubes or sheets as required Material shall meet or
exceed the requirements of AWWA C105-99, ANSI A21 5-99 and ASTM D4976
1. The polywrap shall be as manufactured by Northtown Company or approved equal,
b The minimum Polywrap flat tube width for each pipe diameter shall be as follows
i. Pipe Size / Type Polywrap Flat Tube Width
3" ductile iron 12"
4" ductile iron 16"
6" ductile iron 20"
8" ductile iron 24"
c The polywrap shall be secured as specified with 2 inch wide pressure sensitive plastic tape not
less than 10 mils thick /
Tape shall be Scotchwrap No 50, Polyken No 900, Tapecoat CT, Johns-Manville No
V-10 Trantex or approved equal.
Installation.
a. The polyethylene tubing shall be cut into lengths approximately 2 feet longer than the pipe sections.
With the pipe suspended from the center, the tube shall be slipped over the spigot end and bunched
up between the point of support and the spigot end. After the pipe is installed into the bell of the
adjacent pipe the pipe shall be lowered to the trench bottom and the supporting sling removed from
the center of the pipe. The pipe shall then be raised at the bell end enough to allow the tube to be
slipped along the full length of the barrel with enough left.at each end to overlap the adjoining pipe
about 1 foot. A shallow bell hole must be made at each joint to facilitate installation of the polywrap.
The bunched-up polywrap shall be pulled from the preceding length of pipe, slipped over the end of
the new length of pipe, and secured in place with one circumferential turn of tape plus enough overlap
to assure firm adhesion. The end of the polywrap shall be slipped from the new pipe section over the
end of the first wrap until it overlaps the joint at the end of the preceding length of pipe and tape it in
place. The loose wrapping on the barrel of the pipe shall be pulled snugly around the barrel of the
pipe and excess material folded over the top of the pipe and the folds held in place by means of short
strips of adhesive tape, at about 3 foot intervals along the pipe
b Rips, punctures or other damage to the tube shall be repaired with the adhesive tape or pieces of
tube matenal secured with tape. Bends and reducers in the line shall be covered with polyethylene in
the same manner as pipe
c Valves, tees, crosses and outlets shall be wrapped with flat sheets of the same material The sheets
shall be passed under valves and brought up around the body to the stem. Edges shall be brought
together, folded twice and secured with the adhesive tape
WLC/0414200 AUTOMATIC FIRE SPRINKLERS 15300
Consultant 7/11/06 . (7)
3 2 FABRICATION
A General.
1 All pipe, fittings, etc shall be prepared by qualified and trained personnel, experienced with the
products involved, and the recommended methods of preparation. All cuts, threads and grooves shall
be made according to applicable codes, standards and accepted good practices Pipe shall be free
of damage, flaws and burrs. Threads and grooves shall not be excessively shallow or deep Fittings
shall be made onto pipe no tighter than necessary Cracked or broken fittings shall be replaced by
Contractor, without exception Excess dope and oils shall be removed before shipment to job site
B. Welding:
1 Welding methods shall comply with AWS D10 9, Level AR-3 and ANSI B31 1. Contractor shall be
responsible for all welded joints and any qualifying procedures or certification required for welders and
related personnel.
2 Joining Materials Section II, Part C, ASME BOILER & pressure vessel code for welding materials
appropriate for the wall thickness and chemical analysis of the pipe being welded
3 Holes in pipe for welded outlets shall be cut to full inside diameter of fitting, prior to welding in place
Holes shall be free of slag and welding residue, and of smooth, continuous bore Fittings shall not
penetrate internal diameter of run piping Holes shall be cut by hole saw or other rotary bit. Torch-
cutting of holes is strictly prohibited
4 All welded pipe shall be subject to inspection by serving Fire Department before it is installed
Provide documentation of acceptance, as required, at time of project close-out
C Hangers and Supports
1 Provide U L /F M. approved hangers as required by N F.P A 13 Shop-fabricated supports shall be
designed to meet requirements of N.F.P A 13
2 Provide U L /F.M approved earthquake bracing as required by N.F P.A 13 Locations of all bracing
shall be clearly shown on shop drawings
3 Size all anchors and fasteners per N.F PA 13. All lag screws, bolts and drive screws shall be
installed as required by codes and accepted good practices Pilot holes shall be drilled in all wood
framing members as required by structural engineer Under no circumstances shall lag screws or
bolts be hammered or pounded into framing
D Service Connections Co-ordinate exact location with contractor installing underground service mam
E Cleaning Equipment-
1 Thoroughly clean all parts of apparatus and equipment Exposed parts which are to be painted shall
be thoroughly cleaned of cement, plaster and other materials, and all oil and grease spots shall be
removed Such surfaces shall be carefully wiped and all cracks and corners scraped out.
2. Exposed metal work shall be carefully brushed down with steel brushes to remove the rust and other
spots and left smooth and clean.
3 3 TESTING AND FLUSHING
--A. Upon completion of the system, the Contractor shall subject same to a hydrostatic pressure of 200 pounds
per square inch for a four (4) hour continuous period. Any leaks or defects due to materials or
workmanship occurnng during this test shall be immediately and properly corrected.
3.4 MAINTENANCE MANUAL
A. Submit maintenance manual fully descnbmg all equipment maintenance schedules and replacement
parts.
3.5 CLEAN-UP
A. Upon completion of the work specified, and at other times during the progress of the work when required,
the Contractor shall remove all surplus materials, rubbish and debns resulting from this work, and shall
leave the entire building and involved portions of the site, insofar as the work of these Sections are
concerned, in a neat, clean and acceptable condition
WLC/0414200 AUTOMATIC FIRE SPRINKLERS 15300
Consultant 7/11/06 (8)
B. Closeout.
1 Upon completion and final approval of system, and prior to occupancy, provide instruction to the
Owner, or his authorized representative, in all details of operation and maintenance Submit main-
tenance and operation manuals
2 Provide three copies of final inspection and certification as required by Owner's Insurance
Underwriter, and/or authorities having jurisdiction
3 Submit two copies of guarantee
END OF SECTION
WLC/0414200 AUTOMATIC FIRE SPRINKLERS 15300
Consultant 7/11/06 (9)
SECTION 15400
PLUMBING
1 PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 WORK INCLUDED
A Furnish all labor, materials, services, testing, transportation and equipment necessary for the completion
of all plumbing work as indicated on drawings and specified herein. Work materials and equipment not
indicated or specified which is* necessary for the complete and proper operation of the work of this Section
in accordance with the true intent and meaning of the contract documents shall be provided and
incorporated at no additional cost to the Owner.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A Code Requirements All work covered by this Section shall conform to the latest requirements of the
following regulations
1 C C R , Title 24, Part 5 (2001 CPC)
2 2001 California Plumbing Code
3 SMACNA Seismic Restraint Manual Guidelines for Mechanical Systems
4 National Fire Protection Association
5 California State Division of Industrial Safety.
6 County Health Department
7 Any other legally constituted body-having jurisdiction thereof
B Nothing in the specifications or drawings shall be construed to permit deviation from the requirements of
governing codes unless approval for said deviation has been obtained from the legally constituted
authorities having jurisdiction and from the Owner's representative
1 3 DRAWINGS
A Because of the small-scale drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets, fittings and accessories which
may be required The Contractor shall carefully investigate the conditions surrounding installation of his
work, furnishing the necessary piping, fittings, valves, traps, and other devices which may be required to
complete the installation
B. The general arrangement indicated on the drawings shall be followed as closely as possible Coordinate
with the Architectural, Structural, Mechanical and Electrical Drawings and the work of other trades prior to
installation of piping fixtures and equipment to verify adequate space available for installation of the work
shown In the event a field condition arises which makes it impossible to install the work as indicated,
submit, in writing, the proposed departures to the Architect for his approval Only when Architect's
approval is given, in writing, shall Contractor proceed with installation of the work
C Special Note Should the Contractor make changes in the installation differing from what is indicated on
the contract drawings and not necessitated due to field conditions as indicated heremabove, the
Contractor shall be required to re-install the work to comply with what has been indicated on the contract
drawings Should it be impossible to re-install the work and the installation is in accordance with all
governing authorities, the architect may permit the installation to remain. However, all costs incurred to
revise the contract drawings by the engineer for resubmrttal to the building department indicating the as-
installed condition shall become the responsibility of the Contractor
D. In case of a difference in the specifications or between the specifications and the drawings, the Contractor
shall figure the most expensive alternate and after award of contract, shall secure direction from the
Architect.
1.4 PERMITS, INSPECTIONS AND LICENSES
A All permits, inspections and licenses required by the legally constituted authorities for installation of the
work according to the plans and specifications shall be obtained and paid as a part of the work of this
section
WLC/0414200 PLUMBING 15400
Consultant 7/11/06 > (1)
1 5 UTILITIES
A See Drawings for Points of Connection
B Certain site utilities are to be connected to and extended Before laying of any pipe or digging of any
trenches, Contractor shall determine by actual excavation and measurement exact location and depth of
lines to which he is to connect In event depth of lines is not sufficient to permit connection in manner
indicated, Contractor shall obtain direction from the Owner's representative before proceeding with this
work
C Venfy that utility companies size their services and meters to suit ultimate demand indicated on the
drawings.
D Gas Service and Meter Assembly The Contractor shall arrange with the serving utility company for the
installation of new gas service with complete meter assembly of the capacity indicated and in the location
as shown on the drawings. All items served with gas shall be operated at full fire and adjusted by the
Contractor In cooperation with gas utility, make all required adjustments to mam gas pressure regulators
The Owner shall pay for all required fees.
E. Sanitary Sewer The Contractor shall be responsible for the soil and waste piping outside of the building
within five feet (5') of the foundation, and within the building itself. See Civil Engineer's plans for onsite
sewer system
F Domestic Water The Contractor shall be responsible for the domestic water service outside of the building
within five feet (51) of the foundation, and within the building itself See Civil Engineer's plans for onsite
domestic water system.
G Storm Dram The Contractor shall be responsible for the storm dram service outside of the building within
five feet (5') of the foundation, and within the building itself. See Civil Engineer's plans for onsite storm
dram system.
1 6 EXAMINATION OF PREMISES
A Before bidding on this work, Contractors shall make a careful examination of the premises and shall
thoroughly familiarize themselves with the requirements of the contract By the act of submitting a propos-
al for the work included in this contract, the Contractor shall be deemed to have made such study and
examination, and that he is familiar with and accepts all conditions of the site
1 7 PROTECTION
A All work, equipment and materials shall be protected at all times Contractor shall make good all damage
caused either directly or indirectly by his own workmen Contractor shall also protect his own work from
damage He shall close all pipe openings with caps or plugs during installation. He shall protect all his
equipment and materials against dirt, water, chemical and mechanical injury Upon completion, all work
shall be thoroughly cleaned and delivered in a new condition.
B Contractor shall be held responsible for all damage to equipment and materials until he has received
written notice from the Architect or Engineer that his work has been accepted
1.8 LOCATIONS
A. The locations of apparatus, piping and equipment indicated on the drawings are approximate. Piping and
equipment shall be-installed in such a manner as to avoid all obstruction, preserve headroom, and keep
openings and passages clear The locations of and mounting heights of all fixtures shall be coordinated
with the architectural plans and room elevations
B Clearances and Openings Contractor shall cooperate and coordinate his work with all other trades to
avoid conflict and permit for a neat and orderly appearance of the entire installation. The Contractor shall,
in advance of the work, furnish instructions to the General Contractor as to his requirements for equipment
and material installation of any kind, whether or not specifically mentioned on drawings or in the
specifications, and shall include recesses, chases in walls, and all required openings in the structure.
Should furnishing this information be neglected, delayed or incorrect and additional cuttings are found to
be required, the cost of the same shall be charged to this Contractor.
C. Contractor shall verify and coordinate pipe routing with location of all electrical rooms, elevator equipment
rooms, telecom/data rooms, and other rooms dedicated to the housing of switchgear, panels, or other
electrical equipment. In no case shall piping be installed within or above the ceiling of such rooms.
WLC/0414200 PLUMBING 15400
Consultant 7/11/06 , (2)
1 9 SUBMITTAL DATA (Also see General Conditions)
A Submittal Requirements:
1. Furnish, all at one time, pnor to any installation, within the time noted below, six (6) copies of valid
submittal data on all fixtures, material, equipment and devices Each submitted item shall be indexed
and referenced to these specifications and to identification numbers on fixtures and equipment
schedules
2 Manufacturers' submittal literature and shop drawings are required on all items to ensure the latest
and most complete manufacturer's data is available for review Requirements of the submittals and
Engineer's submittal notes are a part of the work of this Division except that Engineer's notes may not
be used as a means of increasing the scope of work of this Division
3 Submittals will be checked for general conformance with the design concept of the project but the
review does not guarantee quantities shown and does not supersede requirements of this Division to
properly install work
4 To be valid, all submittals must'
a Be delivered to the Architect's office within thirty-five (35) days of award of the contract
Contractor shall make time allowance for Engineer's review, return of comments, if any, and
resubmittal if required Corrections or changes in submittals returned as inadequate or
incomplete shall be accomplished within this time limit
b Clearly indicate and label as such any items proposed as substitution for that specified or shown
on plans.
c Include all pertinent construction, installation, performance and technical data
d Have all product data sheets clearly labeled to indicate the individual items being submitted. In
addition, all required options and accessories shall be clearly marked.
i Product data sheets corresponding to items indicated on plans shall be clearly labeled with
the corresponding fixture or equipment tag number
ii Product data sheets corresponding to items indicated in specifications shall be clearly
labeled with the specification section, page and item numbers
e. Include, for every item which differs in size, configuration, connections, service, accessibility or
any other significant way, a drawing to the same (or larger) scale as to the pertinent portions of
the contract drawings In this drawing show a complete layout of the system except that which is
identical to the contract drawings, unless the unchanged portions must be shown to indicate
such things as clearances This drawing, together with the contract design drawings must show
the complete system as revised to accommodate the proposed alternate
B Substitution Requirements
1 Any items included in submittals and proposed by the Contractor as substitution for that specified or
shown on plans shall be submitted within thirty five (35) days of award of the contract After such time,
proposed substitutions shall not be accepted for review, and the Contractor shall submit all items as
specified or shown on plans.
a. For each item proposed as substitution for that specified or shown on plans, copies of product
data sheets for the specified item shall be placed side by side with product data sheets for the
proposed substitution item within the submittal
i In addition to the Submittal Requirements for labeling listed above, product data sheets for
the specified item shall be clearly labeled "SPECIFIED ITEM, NOT SUBMITTED" Product
data sheets for the corresponding proposed substitution item shall be clearly labeled
"PROPOSED SUBSTITUTION".
b Provide calculations and other detailed data justifying how any items proposed as substitution
were selected for proposal Data must be complete enough to permit detailed comparison of
every significant characteristic for which the specified item was analyzed during design.
2 It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to provide sufficient information to allow the Engineer to
analyze any proposed alternate If inadequate information is provided, the proposal will not be
approved and resubmittal will not be allowed.
WLC/0414200 PLUMBING 15400
Consultant 7/11/06 (3)
3 The Contractor shall provide or perform tests required by Engineer for purpose of judging
acceptability of proposed substitutions.
4 The Contractor assumes full responsibility that alternate items and procedures will meet the job
requirements and is responsible for cost of redesign and of modifications to this and other parts of
work caused by alternate items furnished under work in this Section In view of these responsibilities,
it is the purpose of these specifications to establish procedures to ensure that the Contractor has
considered all the ramifications of proposed alternates before submitting them for review Submittals
which do not comply with the requirements of these specifications or which indicate proposed
alternates that were selected without proper regard to the requirements of the job will not be
approved No more than one proposed alternate will be considered for each item
5 Alternate items installed without Engineer's approval will be replaced with specified items at
Contractor's expense
6 The Architect or his authorized representative shall be the sole judge as to the quality and suitability
of proposed alternate equipment, fixtures or materials Decisions of the Architect or that of his
representative shall be final and conclusive
110 UNINSPECTED WORK
A Contractor shall not allow or cause any of his work to be covered up before it has been duly inspected,
tested and approved by the Owner, Architect or any other authorized inspectors having legal jurisdiction
over his work Should he fail to observe the above, he shall uncover the work and, after it has been
inspected, tested and approved, recover it at his own expense
1.11 RECORD DRAWINGS (Also see General Conditions)
A Contractor shall provide and keep up-to-date a complete "as-built" record set of blueline prints which shall
show every change from the original drawings and the exact "as-built" locations and sizes of the work
provided under this Section of the specifications This set shall include locations, dimensions, depth of
buried piping, cleanouts, shut-off valves, sewer invert locations, plugged wyes, tees, etc On completion of
the work, the Contractor shall incorporate all as-built information on a set of reproducible tracings provided
by the Architect and this set of reproducibles shall be delivered to the Architect
1 12 GUARANTEES (Also see General Conditions)
A Contractor shall guarantee the entire plumbing and piping systems unconditionally for a period of one (1)
year after final acceptance. If, during this period, any materials, equipment, or any part of the systems fail
to function properly, the Contractor shall make good the defects promptly and without any expense to the
Owner
B Contractor shall be responsible for all damage to any part of the premises caused by leaks in pipelines or
equipment furnished and installed under this Section for a period of one (1) year after date of acceptance
of his work.
C All equipment and fixtures shall carry manufacturer's warranty against defective parts or poor
workmanship for not less than one (1) year See specific equipment specifications for extended warranty
requirements.
2 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2 1 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT (See Schedules on Drawings)
A General All materials, as specified or required in the work, shall be new, free from defects and
imperfections
B. Pipe and Fittings:
1 Soil and Waste Piping-
a. Soil and waste piping within the building itself and outside within five feet (51) of the foundation,
shall be no-hub cast iron pipe and fittings, asphaltum coated, free from defects, and shall comply
with CISPI. Standard 301-04 or ASTM A-888-04. Fittings shall be made up with "Husky" SD
4000 series or "Clamp All" 125 series stainless steel type 304 couplings and shall conform to
ASTM C1540 & ASTM C564 except all above ground vent pipe fittings may be made with
"Anaco" or "Tyler" stainless steel two band couplings conforming to CISPI Standard 310-04.
WLC/0414200 PLUMBING 15400
Consultant 7/11/06 (4)
2. Vent Piping
a Concealed or underground vent piping shall be cast iron pipe and fittings as specified for soil and
waste piping
b Exposed vent piping shall be Schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe, ASTM A53, with black cast iron
recessed drainage fittings.
3. Domestic Water Piping '
a. Piping within the building and above grade shall be Type "L" ASTM B88, hard drawn copper
tubing with wrought copper sweat fittings ANSI B16 18 and B16 22
b. Outdoor underground piping in sizes 2-1/2" and 3" shall be Type "L" ASTM B88, hard drawn
copper as specified for water piping within the building Piping 2" and smaller shall be Type "K"
ASTM B88, hard drawn copper with wrought copper sweat fittings ANSI B16 18 and B16 22
c. Piping below the building floor shall be Type "K" soft annealed copper tubing with no fittings
below the slab
4. Gas Piping
a Concealed gas piping within the building shall be Schedule 40 black steel pipe conforming to
ASTM A-53 using 150 pound banded malleable iron screwed fittings for piping 2" and smaller
and weld type steel fittings for piping 2-1/2" and larger
b Exposed gas piping outside the building shall be Schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe conforming
to ASTM A-53 using galvanized 150 pound banded galvanized malleable iron screwed fittings for
piping in sizes 2" and smaller and seamless weld type steel fittings for all piping in sizes 2-1/2"
and larger
5. Storm Dram Piping
a Concealed storm drain piping within the building itself and outside within five feet (5') of the
foundation, shall be no-hub cast iron pipe and fittings, asphaltum coated, free from defects, and
shall comply with C.I.S P I Standard 301-00 Fittings shall be made up with "Husky" SD 4000
series or "Clamp AH" 125 series stainless steel type 304 couplings and shall conform to ASTM C
1540 & ASTM C564
6 Indirect Waste Piping
a. Shall be Type "L" copper as specified for water piping.
7 Air Conditioning Condensate Dram Piping
a Shall be Type "M" copper as specified for water piping
8 Compressed Air Piping.
a Shall be Type "L" copper as specified for water piping.
9 All exposed piping at plumbing fixtures shall be chrome plated yellow brass except exposed pipes in
shop or utility areas
10 Unions or flanges shall be furnished and installed at each threaded connection to all equipment or
valves The unions or flanges shall be located so that the piping can be easily disconnected for
removal of the equipment, tank, or valve, and shall be of the type specified in the following schedule
a Unions
Black Steel Pipe. 250 pound screwed black malleable iron, ground joint, brass to iron seat
Galvanized Steel Pipe: 250 pound screwed galvanized malleable iron, ground joint, brass to
iron seat
Copper or Brass Tubing: 150 pound cast bronze or copper, ground joint, nonferrous seat
with ends, by Walseal, Nibco or Mueller
WLC/041420Q PLUMBING 15400
Consultant 7/11/06 (5)
b Flanges: Tube Turn or approved equal, raised face 150 pound class forged steel, weld, neck or
slip-on type conforming to ASA B165 and ASTM A181 For copper piping systems, provide
flanges conforming to ANSI B16 24 The faces of the flanges being connected to be alike in all
cases Locate flanges so that the piping can be easily disconnected for removal of the
equipment or valve Gasket material shall be of material suiting the service of the opening
system in which installed and which conforms to its respective ANSI Standard (A21 11 B16.21)
Provide materials that will not be detrimentally affected by the chemical and thermal conditions of
the fluid being carried
11. All piping on roof shall be anchored to 4" x 4" redwood blocking with pipe straps Blocking shall be
set in mastic at 6'-0" on center
12 All underground non-metallic piping shall have 14 gauge copper "Tracer Wire" continuous for entire
length
C. Valves
1 General >
a Piping systems shall be supplied with valves arranged so as to give complete and regulating
control of each building and piping systems throughout the building, and located so all parts are
easily accessible and maintained
i Valve Design Rising stem or outside screw and yoke stems. Non-rising stem valves may
be used where space conditions prevent full extension of rising stems
ii Sizes Same size as upstream pipe, unless otherwise indicated
HI Operators
1 Hand wheels fastened to valve stem for all valves other than quarter turn
2 Lever handles on quarter-turn valves, 6 inch and 8 inch and larger gear operated,
except for plug valves. Provide plug valves with square heads and operating wrench.
3 Provide gear operator for valves 8 inch or larger
iv Extended stems Where piping insulation is indicated or specified, valves shall be equipped
with 2" extended handles of non-thermal conductive material. Also provide a protective
sleeve that allows operation of the valve without breaking the vapor seal or disturbing the
insulation Supply with memory stops, which are fully adjustable after insulation is
applied
v End Connection' 2 inch and under shall be threaded, 2-1/2 inches and larger shall be
flanged or full lug style
b Where possible, valves of one manufacturer shall be used
c Provide Class 150 valves meeting the valve specifications where Class 125 valves are specified
but are not available
2 Approved Manufacturers The following manufacturers (or equal) shall be accepted for submittal
review provided that all features and options are equivalent to the corresponding items as specified
a General valves
i NIBCO
ii Hammond
in Milwaukee
b Below grade domestic water shut-off valves (gate valves) 2" and larger
i NIBCO
ii Clow,
in Mueller.
•£>
c. Butterfly Valves
i NIBCO.
WLC/0414200 PLUMBING 15400
Consultant 7/11/06 (6)
ii Demco
in Dezunc
d. Plug Valves
i Hammond
ii Milwaukee
e Check valves, lift type
i Hammond
ii Milwaukee
Valves and cocks shall be installed in locations as indicated on plans per the following usage criteria'
a Below grade domestic water shut-off valves 1-1/2" and smaller
i Gate valve
b Below grade domestic water shut-off valves 2" and larger
i Resilient seated gate valve
c Above grade domestic water shut-off valves 2" and smaller
i Ball valve
d Above grade domestic water shut-off valves 2-1 /2" and greater
i Butterfly valve
e. Above grade gas shut-off cocks
i Ball valve (for gas service).
f. Below grade gas shut-off cocks
i. Polyethylene ball valve (for gas service)
g Check valves, general, horizontal
i Check valve, swing type,
h Check valves, general, vertical, 2" and smaller
i Check valve, lift type
i Check valves, general, vertical, 2-1/2" and larger
i Check valves, wafer-style spring actuated
j Check valves, pump discharge.
i Check valves, wafer-style spring actuated
Gate Valves
a. Gate Valves, 1-1/2-Inch and Smaller
i Rising Stem Valves shall be Class 125 and 200 PSI CWP, nsmg stem, union bonnet, solid
wedge and manufactured in accordance with MSS-SP 80. Body, bonnet and wedge shall
be of bronze ASTM B-62. Stems shall be of dezmcification-resistant silicon bronze ASTM B-
371 or low-zinc alloy B-99, non-asbestos packing and malleable or ductile iron hand wheel
Valve ends shall be threaded.
1 Acceptable Valves NIBCOT124 (threaded), or approved equal.
WLC/0414200 PLUMBING 15400
Consultant 7/11/06 (7)
ii Non-Rising Stem Valves shall be Class 125 and 200 PSI CWP, non-rising stem, screw-in
bonnet, solid wedge and manufactured in accordance with MSS-SP 80 Body, bonnet,
external stuffing box and wedge shall be of bronze ASTM B-62 Stems shall be of
dezmcification-resistant silicon bronze ASTM B-371 or low-zinc alloy B-99, non-asbestos
packing and malleable or ductile iron hand wheel. Valve ends shall be threaded
1. Acceptable Valves NIBCO T113 (threaded), or approved equal
b Resilient Seated Gate Valves, 2-Inch and Larger.
i Valves shall conform to AWWA C-509 and C515, fusion-bonded epoxy coating inside and
out, meets or exceeds AWWA C-550, ductile iron body, rubber encapsulated D I wedge,
rubber bonnet gasket, low torque operation, full diameter waterway, flanged, mechanical
joint or rmg-tite, UL/FM listed and approved Provide complete with traffic weight cast iron
valve box with cast iron cover and operating wrench
1 Acceptable Valves NIBCO F-607-RW OS&Y or F-609-RW MRS or M-609-RW, or
approved equal by Clow or Mueller.
5 Ball Valves, 2 Inches and Smaller
a Valves shall be rated 150 PSI SWP and 600 PSI WOG, shall have 2-piece full port cast
bronze bodies, TFE seats and seals, separate packing nut with blow-out proof adjustable
stem packing, vented stainless steel ball and shall conform to ASTM B-61, ASTM B-62, or
ASTM B-584 and conform to MSS-SP-110.
1 Acceptable Valves NIBCO T-585-70-66 (threaded), or approved equal
6 Butterfly Valves, 2-1/2" and Larger
a Valves shall be rated 200 PSI, full lug Ductile Iron Body ASTM A-536, with 2" extended neck
for insulation, EPDM liner, 416 Stainless Steel Stem, and Aluminum Bronze disc All Butterfly
Valves shall be suitable for bi-directional dead end service at valves rated pressure without
the need for a down stream flange. Valves 6" and smaller shall be supplied with 10 position
lever locking handle Valves 8" and larger shall have enclosed weatherproof gear operators
and conform to MSS-SP 67
i Acceptable Valves NIBCO LD 2000, or approved equal
7 Gas Shut-Off Cocks, Above Grade, 4" and Smaller
a Ball valves (for gas service) shall be rated at 150 WSP 600 WOG, UL listed, bronze body,
stainless steel ball, and threaded ends Valve shall be A.G.A certified
i Acceptable Valves NIBCO T-FP-600, or approved equal
8 Gas Shut-Off Cocks, Below Grade.
a Valves- Nordstrom "Poly-Gas" polyethylene gas valves or equal Valves shall meet the
requirements of ASTM D-2513 and ANSI B16 40
b Valve boxes cast iron tops marked "GAS", high-impact heavy-duty ABS valve can as
manufactured by C.P Test Services-VALVCO, Inc or equal
9 Check Valves, Swing-Type, 2" and Smaller.
a Valves shall be Y-pattem swing-type manufactured in accordance with MSS-SP80, Class 125,
bronze ASTM B-62 body with TFE seat disc. Valve ends shall be threaded.
i Acceptable Valves NIBCO T413-Y (threaded), or approved equal.
10 Check Valves, Swing-Type, 2-1/2" and Larger.
a Valves shall be swing-type manufactured in accordance with MSS-SP71, Class 125, flanged
ASTM A126 Class B cast iron body with bronze trim, non-asbestos gasket.
i Acceptable Valves: NIBCO F918-B, or approved equal.
WLC/0414200 PLUMBING 15400
Consultant 7/11/06 (8)
11 Check Valves, Lift Type, 2" and Smaller.
a Valves shall be class 125, cast-bronze body and cap conforming to ASTM B 62, horizontal or
angle pattern, lift-type valve, with stainless steel spring, bronze disc holder with renewable
"Teflon" disc. Provide valves capable of being refitted and ground while the valve remains in the
line
i Acceptable Valves Hammond IB 943, or approved equal.
12 Check Valves, Wafer-Style Spring Actuated, 2-1/2" and Larger.
a Valves shall be wafer-style with stainless steel spring, bronze disc plates, rubber seat, body of
cast iron ASTM A126 Class B or A48 for use with Class 125/150 flanges
i. Acceptable Valves NIBCO W920-W or KW900-W or W910-W, or approved equal
13 Combination Temperature and Pressure Relief Valves Shall be McDonald, Watts, or approved equal,
bronze body, test lever, thermostat, complying with ANSI Z21 22 listing requirements for temperature
discharge capacity. Relief valves shall be factory set for 210 degree F and 150 psi pressure.
Relief valves shall be type as recommended by water heater manufacturer
D Traps, Strainers and Tailpieces Every sanitary fixture, unless otherwise specified, shall be provided with a
seventeen (17) gauge chromium tailpiece, a Los Angeles pattern chrome plated cast-brass trap and
galvanized nipple trap arm and wall flanges Trap arm shall be provided with chromium plated brass
casing between the trap and wall flanges at each fixture. All sanitary waste system floor drains and floor
sinks shall have cast iron "P" traps
E Fixed Air Gaps' Jay R Smith No 3955 fixed air gap, 1" inlet,'dura coated cast iron.
F Cleanouts Shall be Jay R. Smith, Zurn or Josam
1 General' Provide cast-iron ferrule and countersunk brass clean-out plug with round cast iron access
frame and heavy duty secured top cover.
2 Wall Cleanouts Jay R Smith No 4472 for steel pipe and Jay R Smith No 4532 for cast iron pipe
3 Floor Cleanouts. Jay R Smith No 4023 or 4028, bronze plug and non-skid nickel bronze top.
4 Cleanouts to Grade: Jay R Smith No 4258 or Jay R Smith No. 4253 with X-H bronze plug and X-X-
H non-skid cover with lifting device set flush with surface for concrete areas Asphalt or nonsurfaced
areas shall be installed with ring of concrete poured around the bottom flange six inches (6") below
surface Use cast iron soil pipe on cleanout risers For cleanouts in non-traffic areas, terminate
cleanout plug in concrete yard box^
G. Access Panels: Wall access panels shall be minimum 12" x 12" for concealed valves and other equipment
unless otherwise specified or indicated Ceiling access panels shall be 18" x 18" minimum Access panels
shall be located and positioned for ready access and service of equipment housed within Where access
panels are specified with keyed cylinder locks, all such locks shall be identically keyed.
1 Wall, Non-Fire Rated Elmdor/Stoneman DW-SS-AKL, drywall, stainless steel finish, alien key latch
2 Ceiling, Non-fire Rated. Elmdor/Stoneman DW, drywall, prime coated finish, screwdriver latch
3 Wall, Fire Rated. Elmdor/Stoneman FR-SS, fire rated, stainless steel finish, return latch
4 Ceiling, Fire rated' Elmdor/Stoneman FRC, Fire rated, prime coated finish, return latch.
H. Yard Boxes & Vaults: For service shut-off valves on gas and domestic water, for pressure regulator
assemblies and for cleanouts, shall be Brooks Products or Fraser Cement Products Co., rectangular
concrete type with vandal-proof cast iron cover and name of service clearly marked on cover Box shall be
of size to permit full range of valve operation and to permit easy removal of valve assembly. Vaults shall
be sectional type.
I Roof Flashing
1 Sanitary vents thru roof and grease vents thru roof Stoneman No 1100-5, one (1) piece, seamless,
four (4) pound, series with reinforcing steel boot counterflashed with cast iron flashing sleeve and
equipped with vandal-proof hood for all vent piping Seal joint between flashing and pipe with
waterproofing compound per flashing manufacturer's recommendations
WLC/0414200 PLUMBING 15400
Consultant 7/11/06 (9)
2 Water, gas, condensate drainage and other metallic piping thru roof Stoneman No 1100-4, one (1)
piece, seamless, four (4) pound, series with reinforcing steel boot counterflashed with cast iron
flashing sleeve Seal joint between flashing and pipe with waterproofing compound per flashing
manufacturer's recommendations
J Flues. Flues shall be double wall type "B" Metalbestos or approved equal, complete with tee, support,
pipe collar, roof flashing, storm collar and top
K Escutcheons Shall be chrome plated cast brass with setscrew locking device
L Water Hammer Arresters Shall be sized per the manufacturer's recommendations Install at all quick
closing valves, clothes washers and dishwashers behind access panel
M Dielectric Union Isolators Connection between incompatible materials above grade and inside building
shall be made with two (2) dielectric unions separated by a twelve inch (12") section of red brass pipe
Dielectric union isolator for connection piping or non-compatible materials shall be of standard commercial
design with threaded connections.
N. Pipe Supports Unless otherwise indicated on the drawings, shall be as follows-
1 The Contractor shall furnish and install all miscellaneous iron work including angles, channels, etc ,
required to appropriately support the various piping systems Hanger spacing and location shall
conform to Uniform Plumbing Code requirements
2 All horizontal runs of piping within the building to be supported from the structural framing with steel
rods and split ring hangers, B-Lme, Gnnnell Company, Tolco, or approved equal Steel rods shall be
secured to overhead framing with side beam connectors Where necessary, install angle iron
between framing to accommodate hanger rods Where several pipes are running together, Unistrut,
B-Lme or Powerstrut channels with clamps may be used in lieu of individual pipe hangers, and
supported from structure as herein specified Submit test data for type of hanger supports to be
provided For support conditions other than specified herein, the Contractor shall submit method of
support for approval prior to any installation.
3 Horizontal Piping Hangers and Supports
a General- Provide factory fabricated horizontal hangers and supports complying with one of the
following MSS types listed to suit horizontal-piping systems, in accordance with MSS SP-69 and
manufacturer's published product information Select size of hangers and supports to exactly fit
pipe size for bare piping, and to exactly fit around piping insulation with saddle or shield for
insulated piping Provide copper-plated hangers and supports for copper-piping systems.
Adjustable Steel Clevis Hangers- (MSS Type 1 ) B-Lme B 3100
Adjustable Swivel Pipe Rings (MSS Type 5) B-Line B3690
4 Vertical-Piping Clamps.
a General Provide factory fabricated vertical-piping clamps complying with the following types
listed, to suit vertical piping systems, in accordance with MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's
published product information Select size of vertical piping clamps to exactly fit pipe size of bare
pipe Provide copper-plated clamps for copper-piping systems
b Two-Bolt Riser Clamps (MSS Type 8) B-Line B3373
5. Hanger-Rod Attachments-
a. General Provide factory fabricated hanger-rod attachments B-Line, Tolco or approved equal,
selected by Installer to suit horizontal-piping hangers and building attachments, in accordance
with MSS SP-58 and manufacturer's published product information Select size of hanger-rod
attachment to suit hanger rods. Provide copper-plated hanger-rod attachments for copper-piping
systems
b. Side beam eye socket, Tolco Fig. #57 for rod sizes 3/8" dia. and Tolco Fig. #25-30-251 for rod
sizes 1/2" dia
WLC/0414200 PLUMBING 15400
Consultant 7/11/06 (10)
6 Building Attachments
a General Provide factory fabricated building attachments, selected by Installer to suit building
structural framing conditions, in accordance with MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's published
product information. Select size of building attachments to suit hanger rods Provide copper-
plated building attachments for copper-piping systems
7 Hanger Rods and Spacing shall conform to the following table
Pipe Sizes Spacing Rods
2 Inch and Smaller 6 Feet 3/8 Inch
2-1/2 Inch to 3 Inch 8 Feet 1/2 Inch
4 Inch and larger 8 Feet 5/8 Inch
8 Hangers and Supports shall be adequate to maintain alignment and prevent sagging and shall be
placed within 18 inches of joint Support shall be provided at each horizontal branch connection
9. Provide lateral bracing as manufactured by B-Line or approved equal for all piping to prevent swaying
or movement in accordance with SMACNA "Guidelines for Seismic Restraints of Piping Systems".
Piping smaller than indicated in the guidelines shall be provided with bracing as specified for the
smallest size indicated The entire water distribution system shall be properly braced and will not
move due to the action of quick closing of valves.
10 Miscellaneous Supports, Wall Brackets, Etc • Provide where required in accordance with the best
standard practices of the trade Submit shop drawings for all fabricated supports
11 Isolators. All piping which is not isolated from contact with the building by its insulation shall be
installed with a manufactured type isolator Isolators shall be B-Lme vibra clamp and cushion, Super
Strut, Stoneman "Tnsolator", or approved equal. Piping shall be installed and supported in a manner
to provide for expansion without strains. Guides shall be properly installed to ensure this requirement.
12 Shields
a General Provide shields at piping hangers and supports, factory-fabricated, for all insulated
piping as manufactured by Pipeshields Incorporated or approved equal Size shields for exact fit
to mate with pipe insulation
b Protection Shields MSS Type 40, provide high density insert of same thickness of insulation or
equal 100-psi average compressive strength, waterproofed calcium silicate, encased with a
sheet metal shield Insert and shield shall cover entire circumference of the pipe and shall be of
length indicated by manufacturer for pipe size and thickness of insulation
Insulation
1. Hot Water Pipe Insulation All hot water supply and return piping, except exposed connections to
plumbing fixtures, flanges and unions shall be insulated with ASTM C-534 Imcoa Imcolock or "ASTM
C547, Class I, "Johns-Manville" "Micro-Lock" 850-APT, Owens-Coming Fiberglass Corp., ASJ/SL-11
or approved equal, 1" thick for sizes up to 2" and 1-1/2" thick for sizes 2" and larger Insulation shall
have a flame spread of not more than 25 and a smoke density not exceeding 50 per 2001 CMC
a Exposed insulated piping in occupied areas and equipment rooms shall be covered with Johns-
"Zeston" 30-mil thick white PVC jacketing material per ASTM D1784 with "Johns-Manville" pre-
formed insulation inserts for all fittings Insulation at all fittings shall be equal in thickness to
insulation for piping Jacketing shall comply with ASTM E84, and shall have a flame spread of
not more than 25 and a smoke density not exceeding 50 per 2001 CMC
b Hot water piping below slab shall have insulation protected by a 10-mil thick polyethylene plastic
sleeve sealed watertight with poly vinyl chloride tape
2. Condensate Pipe Insulation All condensate piping within the building shall be insulated with
"ArmaceH" "Armaflex" insulating tape Insulation shall have a flame spread of not more than 25 and a
smoke density not exceeding 50 per 2001 CMC
3. All insulation shall be continuous through supports and hangers
WLC/0414200 PLUMBING 15400
Consultant 7/11/06 (11)
4 All fixtures complying with the provisions of the Americans with Disabilities Act shall be provided with
Prowrap insulation for exposed hot water pipe, tailpiece, and trap as manufactured by McGuire, and
secured per manufacturers recommendations No tape wrapping shall be permitted /
P Equipment and Fixtures
1 Fixtures:
a. See schedule on drawings.
2 Acceptable Manufacturers '
a The following manufacturers (or equal) shall be accepted for submittal review provided that all
features and options are equivalent to the corresponding items as specified on plans and in
specifications
i Vitreous China Plumbing Fixtures
1 American Standard
2 Kohler
u. Flushometer Valves
1. Sloan
HI Toilet Seats
1 Olsonite
2. Church
iv. Stainless Steel Sinks.
1 Elkay
2 Just
v Faucets
1. Chicago
vi Lavatory and Sink Drains
1 McGuire
2 Elkay.
vn Angle Stops / Supplies.
1 Chicago
VIM Enameled Cast Iron Service Sinks
1. Ceco
ix. Trap Primers
1 Mifab.
2 Precision Plumbing Products.
x Water Hammer Arresters.
1. Zurn
2 Precision Plumbing Products
xi. Floor Drains and Area Drains
1. Zurn
2 Jay R Smith
xii Roof Drains and Overflow Drains.
1. Zurn
WLC/0414200 PLUMBING 15400
Consultant 7/11/06 " (12)
2 JayR Smith
XMI Single Stall Showers
1 Symmons
xiv Floor Sinks
1 Zurn
xv Washing Box.
1 Acorn
xvi Sand/Oil Interceptors
1 Jensen Precast
xvn Thermal Expansion Tanks
1 Wilkms
2 Watts
3 Amtrol
xvin Hose Bibbs
1 Acorn
2. Woodford
xix Recessed Hose Bibbs
1 Acorn
xx Gas Fired Storage Tank Type Water Heaters
1 Rheem
2 Bradford White
3 American
xxi Hot Water Circulation Pumps
1. Grundfos
xxii Seven-Day Time Clocks
1. Paragon
3 Furnish complete with necessary trim, including stops All trim and fittings shall be chrome-plated
brass including handles, supply tailpieces, traps and escutcheons
4 Connections to fixtures shall be in accordance with code requirements except as exceeded herein or
on the drawings and in no case less than the supply stop size
5 All plumbing fixture faucets submitted for review shall have identification label or certification showing
compliance with California TITLE 24, PART 5, ARTICLE I, "Energy Conservation Standards"
ARTICLE I, T20-1406; ARTICLE 2, T20-1525 and ARTICLE 4,1604 and 1606.
6 Minimum waste sizes shall be four-inch (4") for water closets and two inch (2") for lavatories.
Q Water Heaters (See Equipment Schedule on Drawings):
1 Gas Fired Storage Tank Type Water Heaters:
a Water heater shall be of the model, size and capacity as indicated on the drawing and as
manufactured by Rheem, Bradford White, or American. Water heater shall be of glass-lined
commercial gas-fired, and certified by the American Gas Association Heater shall be provided
with a manual reset gas shutoff device, a gas pressure regulator set for the type of gas supplied,
coated steel burners, an approved draft diverter, magnesium anodes for cathodic protection and
flue damper ASME pressure and temperature relief valve shall be furnished and installed by the
factory The heater shall be insulated with foam insulation or equal. The outer jacket shall have
WLC/0414200 PLUMBING 15400
Consultant 7/11/06 (13)
a baked enamel finish over a bondenzed undercoatmg All internal surfaces of the heater
exposed to water shall be glass-lined Heater tank shall have a 3 year limited warranty against
corrosion or sediment buildup as outlined in the written warranty Fully illustrated instruction
manual to be included
b. Provide Type "B" double wall flue up through roof complete with all required appurtenances and
supports required
R Sand Oil interceptor
1 General Provide sand and grease interceptor as manufactured by Jensen or approved equal of size
and capacity as indicated, complete with sample box
2 Construction Prefabricated reinforced concrete construction, multiple compartment, with cast iron
fittings
a Concrete Portland Cement Type II, minimum compressive strength 3000 psi at 28 days
b Reinforcing bar intermediate grade ASTM A615
c Reinforcing welded wire mesh ASTM A185
d Precast unit coated outside with Hunts process black No 120 ASTM C-309, Type IV-ASTM D-
41-FHA requirements.
e Manholes Galvanized cast iron cover and frame, traffic grade construction, complete with pre-
cast concrete extension rings between interceptor and manhole cover at finished grade
3 PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 1 INSTALLATION - GENERAL
A Locations and Accessibility. Install equipment for ease of maintenance and repair If changes in the
indicated locations or arrangements are made by the Contractor, they shall be made without additional
charges
B Openings Furnish information to the other trades on size and location of openings which are required in
walls, slabs, roof, for piping and equipment at the proper times
C Closmg-ln of Uninspected Work Do not allow or cause any of the work to be covered up or enclosed until
it has been inspected, tested, and approved by the Architect Any work enclosed or covered prior to such
inspection and test shall be uncovered and, after it has been inspected, tested, and approved, make all
repairs with such materials as may be necessary to restore all work, including that of other trades, to its
original and proper condition
D Before laying of any pipe or digging of any trenches, Contractor shall determine by actual excavation and
measurement exact locations and depth of existing utility and service lines to which he is going to connect.
In event depth of existing sewer mam or storm dram is not sufficient to permit installation of piping as
detailed on drawings or to make connection in manner indicated, Contractor shall confer with the Architect,
Owner's representative and Engineer for Direction
E Excavation, Trenching and Backfill Perform all necessary trench excavation, shoring, backfilling and
compaction required for the proper laying of the pipe lines
1 The Contractor shall coordinate the layout of all below grade piping and components with the General
Contractor prior to bid to determine the extent of required sawcuttmg, excavation, alterations, and
subsequent repair/restoration of all affected hardscape and softscape surfaces. All such items shall
be included in bid
2 Backfill shall be clean soil free from rocks and debris. Compact to ninety percent (90%) of
surrounding soil All piping shall be installed in a minimum 6" sand bed and covered with 6" of sand
prior to backfill. Continue backfill with materials free of rocks and debris, properly moistened and
mechanically tapered and compacted to 90% of surrounding soil
3 Water, soil and waste piping shall have twenty-four (24") of cover minimum, except all PVC pipe
material and all gas piping shall have eighteen (18") of cover minimum All other pipe shall have not
less than eighteen inches (18") of cover, unless otherwise noted on the drawings. Offset gas and
water piping as required to permit crossover of underground piping systems, and electrical conduit
systems
WLC/0414200 PLUMBING 15400
Consultant 7/11/06 (14)
4 Bottoms of Trenches Cut to grade and excavate bell holes to ensure the pipes bearing for their entire
length upon the outside periphery of the lower third of the pipe.
5 Trees When it is necessary to excavate adjacent to existing trees, the Contractor shall use all
possible care to avoid injury to trees and roots Where a ditching machine is run close to trees having
roots smaller than 2" in diameter, the wall of the trench adjacent to the trees shall be hand trimmed
making clean cuts through the roots All cuts through roots 1/2" and larger in diameter shall be
painted with "Tree-Seal", or equal Trenches adjacent to trees should be filled within 24 hours after
excavation, but where this is not possible, the side of the trench adjacent to the tree shall be kept
shaded with burlap or canvas Stockpiling of earth or building materials within the drip line of trees is
prohibited Where any roots 2" and larger are encountered, the Contractor shall hand tunnel under
root and protect it by burlap wrapping
6 Water piping shall not be run in the same trench with sewer or drainage piping unless separated as
required by the CPC
7. All horizontal soil and waste piping 3" and smaller shall be installed to a uniform grade of not less than
one-fourth inch (1/4") per foot All horizontal soil and waste piping 4" and larger shall be installed to a
uniform grade of not less than one-eighth inch (1/8") per foot, unless otherwise indicated or directed
Piping Installation-
1 All piping shall be concealed in finished portion of the building except where otherwise indicated or
directed at the time the work is done All piping shall be installed to clear all framing members and
beams, even if drawings do not indicate same Contractor shall constantly check the work of other
trades so as to prevent any interference with the installation of this work
2 All piping into stem walls and footings shall be double half lap wrapped with 1/8" thick "Armaflex"
insulation The Contractor shall also provide blocked out areas in stem wall and footing as required
for the installation of the piping All piping shall avoid the lower 9" of the footing and the Contractor
shall coordinate and provide dropped footings as required for the installation of the underground
piping.
3 Unions shall be installed on one side of all screwed shut-off valves, at both sides of screwed
automatic valves and on all by-passes, at all equipment connections and elsewhere as indicated or
required for ease of installation and dismantling.
4 Connections between copper tubing and equipment shall be with Mueller Brass Company, or
approved equal, brass stream line copper to P P S ground joint unions
5 Hot and cold water supplies to lavatones and sinks shall be provided with ninety degree (90°) drop-
ear copper to pipe thread elbows Bolt securely to backing plates located between wall studs to
provide a rigid anchor for exposed supply pipes and stops.
6 Corrosion Protection
a General.
i Corrosion protection shall be provided for all below grade cast iron and copper piping and
associated valves and fittings. Such piping shall be protected from corrosion by
encasement in a polyethylene protective wrapping, referred to hereafter as polywrap.
Although not intended to be a completely air and water tight enclosure, the polywrap shall
provide a continuous barrier between the pipe and surrounding bedding and backfill.
b Materials
i Cast iron piping encasement.
1 The polywrap shall be minimum 8 mil. in thickness, group 2, linear low density, flat
tube, natural (clear) virgin polyethylene film formed into tubes or sheets as required
Material shall meet or exceed the requirements of AWWA C105, ANSI A21.5 and
ASTM A674.
2 The polywrap shall be as manufactured by Northtown Company or approved equal
WLC/0414200 PLUMBING 15400
Consultant 7/11/06 (15)
ii Copper piping encasement
1 The polywrap shall be minimum 6 mil in thickness, group 2, linear low density, flat
tube, natural (clear) virgin polyethylene film formed into tubes or sheets as required
Material shall conform to the requirements of ASTM D1248.
2 The polywrap shall be as manufactured by Northtown Company or approved equal
in The minimum Polywrap flat tube width for each pipe diameter shall be as follows
Pipe Size / Type Polvwrap Flat Tube Width
Vs." to %" copper 2"
1" to 1-1/2 copper 3"
2" copper 4"
2-1/2" copper 5"
3" copper 6"
2" to 3" cast iron 14"
4" cast iron 16"
6" cast iron 20"
8" cast iron 24"
10" cast iron 27"
12" cast iron 30"
15" cast iron 37"
iv The polywrap shall be secured as specified with 2 inch wide pressure sensitive plastic
tape not less than 10 mils thick
1 Tape shall be Scotchwrap No 50, Polyken No 900, Tapecoat CT, Johns-Manville
No V-10 Trantex or approved equal
c Installation.
i. The polyethylene tubing shall be cut into lengths approximately 2 feet longer than the pipe
sections Slip the tube around the pipe, centering it to provide a 1-ft overlap on each
adjacent pipe section, and bunching it accordion fashion lengthwise until it clears the pipe
ends. Lower the pipe into the trench and make up the pipe joint with the preceding
section of pipe A shallow bell hole must be made at each joint to facilitate installation of
the polywrap. The bunched-up polywrap shall be pulled from the preceding length of pipe,
slipped over the end of the new length of pipe, and secured in place with one
circumferential turn of tape plus enough overlap to assure firm adhesion. The end of the
polywrap shall be slipped from the new pipe section over the end of the first wrap until it
overlaps the joint at the end of the preceding length of pipe and tape it in place The loose
wrapping on the barrel of the pipe shall be pulled snugly around the barrel of the pipe and
excess material folded over the top of the pipe and the folds held in place by means of
short strips of adhesive tape, at about 3 foot intervals along the pipe
ii. Rips, punctures or other damage to the tube shall be repaired with the adhesive tape or
pieces of tube material secured with tape. Bends and reducers in the line shall be
covered with polyethylene in the same manner as pipe
in Valves, tees, crosses and outlets shall be wrapped with flat sheets of the same material
The sheets shall be passed under valves and brought up around the body to the stem
Edges shall be brought together, folded twice and secured with the adhesive tape
G Sleeves: Shall be plastic or galvanized steel where pipes pass through concrete walls or floor slabs
1 Isolate pipes through ground floor slabs with Kraft paper, plastic tape or similar materials unless
conduit is specified or indicated.
2 Sleeves for pipes through exterior walls shall be non-metallic with minimum 2" weep ring as
manufactured by Link Seal. Pipe shall be sealed with Link Seal modular seal with EPDM seal
elements
3 Sleeves in or through fire rated walls shall be per U.L Fire Resistance System No. WL1146 for
drywall construction, and U.L. Fire Resistance System No CAJ1044 for concrete construction. See
architectural plans for all locations of rated walls
WLC/0414200 PLUMBING 15400
Consultant 7/11/06 (16)
4. Below-grade piping through exterior walls shall be sealed using Link Seal modular seal with nitrile
seal elements and stainless steel bolts and sleeves as manufactured by Century Line.
H Contraction and Expansion Install all work in such a manner that its contraction and expansion will not do
any damage to the pipes, the connected equipment, or the building Install offsets, swing joints, expansion
joints, seismic joints, anchors, etc , as required to prevent excessive strains in the pipe work All supports
shall be installed to permit the materials to contract and expand freely without putting any strain or stress
on any part of the system Provide anchors as necessary
I Pipe Joints and Connections
1 Copper Tubing and Brass Pipe with Threadless Fittings: *>
a Solder joints for copper shall be made with 95/5 lead free solder in accordance with
manufacturer's recommendations for the service intended
b Use threaded adapters on copper tubing where threaded connections are required
2 Welded Joints All welding to be performed by welders certified as passing ASME Boiler and
Pressure Code (Section IX) and shall comply with ANSI Std B31 1 0 and the American Welding
Society, Welding Handbook '
J All closet bends shall be adequately blocked and secured. Trap arms and similar connections installed
below the floor level or under concrete slabs shall be adequately supported and anchored to prevent
motion in any direction All piping installed above grade within buildings shall be secured to structural
framing with Unistrut or pipe clamps to provide a rigid installation Piping utilizing gaskets as a seal shall
be given prime consideration to providing adequate stability through proper supports and anchors
because of its flexible nature
K Flexible piping of any kind will not be permitted except when indicated on drawings Provide Hose Master
Inc, flexible pipe appliance connector model UNP, female union, male nipple and plastic cover, AGA
approved for kitchen equipment only
L Each pipe penetration of the roof shall be separated from other piping and any roof equipment by a
minimum of 18" to insure a proper pipe flashing installation.
M Floor, Wall and Ceiling Plates Where pipes pierce finished surfaces, C P. brass split flanges with
setscrew lock shall be provided
N Roof Flashings Extend pipe a minimum of seven inches (7") above finished roof line, except where a
vandal proof hood is required in which case pipe shall extend to a height required to receive the hood and
also where specifically required to exceed this dimension by the local authority due to snow conditions
O Installation of Plumbing Fixtures
1 Install each fixture at the exact height and location shown on the Architectural Drawings
2 Set fixtures, supplies, trap and trap outlet square with the wall, in line with fixture outlets without any
offsets, angles, or bends
3 Grout joint between the fixtures and the walls or floors with polysulfide or silicone sealant to be
smooth, even and watertight
P Completion of Installation-
1. Cleaning and Flushing Clean all equipment and materials thoroughly. Leave surface to be painted
smooth and clean, ready for painting
2. Flush each unit of water supply and distribution system thoroughly with clean water at the highest
velocities attainable
3 Clean all piping, valves, traps, water heaters, fixtures and other devices thoroughly and flush or blow
out until free of scale, oil silt, sand, sediment, pipe dope and foreign matter of any kind
3.2 STERILIZATION OF DOMESTIC WATER LINES
A. Sterilize water lines by filling with a solution containing fifty (50) parts of chlonne per million parts water and
holding the solution therein for at least eight (8) hours with a water head of at least five feet (51) above the
highest point in the system Unless otherwise directed, thoroughly flush each line pnor to sterilization
Introduction of sterilizing solution or materials into the lines shall be such as to provide thorough and
uniform distribution throughout the system.
WLC/0414200 PLUMBING 15400
Consultant 7/11/06 (17)
1 Operate all valves during the retention period Following retention period, the heavy chlorinated water
shall be flushed from the system with clean water.
2 Continue flushing until the residual chlorine at the end of 24 hours is as required by AWWA C651
3 All work and certification of performance must be done by an approved laboratory utilizing qualified
applications and personnel.
i Upon completion of the domestic water line sterilization, Contractor shall submit sterilization
report directly to the Architect stating that all testing was performed as specified and that
testing was performed by an approved laboratory utilizing qualified applications and
personnel
3 3 TESTING
A No piping work shall be concealed or covered until piping has been tested, inspected and approved by the
Inspector All piping for plumbing systems shall be completely installed and tested as required by the
Uniform Plumbing Code Test pressures and times indicated are a minimum only. All tests shall be as
required by the governing authority as well
Schedule of Test Pressures
System Tested Gauge Test Duration
Water 100PSI Water 4 Hours
Gas 60 PSI Air 4 Hours
Air 200 PSI Air 4 Hours
Waste, Vent and Storm Dram Per California Plumbing Code (Minimum 10 Feet of Head)
3 4 OPERATION INSTRUCTION
A Prior to occupancy or prior to the date of final inspection, whichever may occur first, the Contractor shall
prepare two (2) sets of typewritten instructions for the operation of all equipment, valves, etc., specified
and furnished as a part of the work under this section, and shall assign a competent person, thoroughly
familiar with the job, to demonstrate and instruct a representative of the Owner in the operation of the
equipment The time of said demonstration and instructions shall be arranged with the Owner's
representative approximately one (1) week in advance Verbal instructions shall include shut-off location
of gas and water. The Contractor shall assemble all operation and maintenance data supplied by the
manufacturers of the various pieces of equipment, all keys and special wrenches required to operate and
service the equipment (including keys for yard boxes, gas stops and fixture stops), and all equipment
warranties and deliver same to the representative of the Owner on date of said instructions
3 5 PIPE AND EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION
A Each operating and service line shut-off valve shall be identified by a 19 ga. brass tag with stamped,
engraved type of service identified and area served, complete with hole and brass chain mounted on valve
stem or handle Tag shall be a minimum of one and one-half inch (1-1/2") in diameter.
B Provide on exterior wall of each building opposite the building's main gas service a sign reading "Gas Shut
Off" Sign shall be metal with minimum 1-1/2" high-embossed letters
C All equipment shall be provided with name plate indicating all pertinent information on it.
END OF SECTION
WLC/0414200 PLUMBING 15400
Consultant 7/11/06 (18)